Home

MODEM 32Fast

Contents

1. op shoe 6 PME RE 8 21 DI Da Eo E obese s ERE ELSE 8 M Heer 8 2 9 Extended 0 8 22 Synchronous Data Compression SG perd 9 2 9 Network 9 LIE o0 E 9 97 Automode Multimode 9 2 3 AT eb t 9 9 10 2 11 Remote EP 10 M m 10 2 125 Status Shapsliols ua be E ek ei eese E A OEE YN cast ovatus disse HONEC EE FEE ds 10 2 14 Adaptive Rate Syster M 10 2 15 Tro bleshooting V 54 and V 22 bis Tests tied Aa ndi AQ uod 10 MOSCA ACM OM EE 11 Sel Unpacking Your 11 2 2 CHOOSE 11 22 EOG EET 11 54 Meat Panel Lay Ou 11 Cabling Your 12 Connecting toa DTE eene teta 12 30 2 Connecting t
2. CHAPTER 11 Command Cross Reference Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued AT V 25 bis AT V 25 bis Command Front Panel Option Command Command Front Panel Option Command AT LDO DTE Ct 140 AT MR1 DSR High AT LD1 DTE Ct 140 On AT MR2 DSR DTR AT LEO D to L Manual AT MR3 DSR Drop on Disc AT LE1 D to L 15 min AT MR4 DSR Sim LL AT LE2 D to L 30 min AT MSO AT Msg After CD AT LE3 D to L 1 Hr AT MS1 AT Msg Before CD AT LE4 D to L 2 Hr 300 AT LE5 D to L 4 Hr AT MX1 Max Rate 1200 AT LLO LAL Busy Out Off AT MX2 Max Rate 2400 AT LL1 LAL Busy Out On AT MX3 Max Rate 4800 AT LNm n Link Phone 5 to zn AT MX4 Max Rate 7200 AT LSO Low Speed Bell AT MX5 Max Rate 9600 AT LS1 Low Speed CCITT AT MX6 Max Rate 12 0 AT LTO DTE Pin 25 Busy AT MX7 Max Rate 14 4 1 Pin 25 Test AT MX8 Max Rate 16 8 AT MDO PSTN Signaling Off AT MX9 Max Rate 19 2 AT MD1 PSTN Signaling On AT MX10 Rate 21 6 AT MFO Modem Flow Off AT MX11 Max Rate 24 0 AT MF1 Modem Flow On AT MX12 Max Rate 26 8 AT MMO Mod V32bis Auto AT MX13 Max Rate 28 8 AT MM1 Mod Auto A32 AT NBO Buffers Regular AT MM2 Mod V32bis Only AT NB1 Buffers Reduced AT MM3 Mod V32 Only AT NCO Netwrk Comp Off AT MM4 Mod V22bis Only AT NC1 Netwrk CompzLv1 1 AT MM5 Mod 212 Only AT NC2 Netwrk Comp Lv12 AT MM6 Mod 103 Only AT ND View Phone n AT MM7 Mod V21 Only AT O
3. 155 AE Sa Manual Dialing ETE ERSS ESS asas 156 SL 6802 COM Mami s i acs 156 8 15 1 How to Tor LPDA2 AGU 156 815 2 LEDAS AGLI Control 156 8 15 3 L PDA Message Format ce eee 156 8 12 4 Information Field Format and Command 157 8 16 Information Field Format and Response rettet tenter netter ete pe ee eren inert rar 157 S161 Header Response Field usnaeoetcetescnceri ad 157 6 16 2 Iden fie r Field 158 8 16 3 158 8164 Command Code 158 8 16 5 Sense Byte etin HE EH De 158 NEST NIE c es 158 Eran etiani ieu 158 9 16 8 Dial Cormimland nene trece eret us o apes ev era eaae Rae 158 8 16 9 Dial Command Sense Bytes ehe rtu Fe tete Luis 160 8 10 10 Dial Response Data Field s tee oet et 161 817 LPDA Disconnect Command cnn quon e sud qu f RR p 161 8 17 1 Disconnect Command Sense
4. 91 WOW umm 83 LPDA escas eteeeseeente veo decia toe bx 123 IDtrOGQU CIO eoen ll LPDA2 9 160 Main 53 95 Memory reinitializing 62 tree eorr edet ie ERE 20 how 0 USE 19 Menus POM PANE 111 NOW 21 MI MIC control by external dialer 45 Minima r 94 Mirror III Version 3 7 35 MNP Set Dy AT COPDEDADEL 85 Modem ID 62 Modem ID displaying 71 Modular jacks SC CCUG 63 Modulation 0 E ERES 95 Options Sas 114 NC Network Control 179 Network compensato REESE 96 Network control Options 132 Network performance 28 Option SENS ss 92 25 22 E 24 creating CUSLOIDMEGU 74 e 24 74 selecting AT command 59 selecting by external 97 SUBDITI odo n 22 mode setting 79
5. Hm 9 Press b until the modem displays Once you have determined the remote modem s serial number do the following to search for its Enter to Set address 10 Press If successful the modem displays 1 Establish a leased line connection with the New Address xxx where xxx is the address you just set If unsuccessful the modem displays Rmt Set Failed Or Rmt Set Denied Failure to set a remote modem s address can be caused by the following The remote modem s Rmt Acc option is set to Disabled The remote modem is running a test 7 13 7 SEARCHING FOR A REMOTE MODEM S LEASED LINE ADDRESS The SRCH RMT LL ADDR Figure 7 15 is intended for use with remote configuration on leased lines Using the SRCH RMT LL ADDR option you can search for the remote modem s address SET RMT LLADDR remote modem at 7200 bps or greater Display SRCH RMT LL ADDR Press gt until the modem displays Rmt See Section 7 13 10 for details on how to enter modem s remote serial number Press modem displays Enter to Set Press The modem displays wee WA S us If successful the modem displays Address xxx If unsuccessful the modem displays Rmt Srch Failed or Rmt Srch Denied Figure 7 15 SRCH RMT LL ADDR Menu 2545 CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation 7 Press b until the mode
6. Clock RmtAcc Enable TpDlyMin RixD Diy AT RCO Rmt Cnfg Terminate AT TLO Tone Length 72 Cnig Abort AT TL1 Tone Length S11 ATREA init Call Timeout 30 SUNT AKO SHE 1 45 AIRES AT TT2 60 AVREI R Only AT TT3 Call Timeout 90 AT RE2 Restore FP 108 1 4 Timeout 180 Restore FP 116 5 Call Timeout S7 AT RE4 Restore FP Auto AT XCO RelMsg Off AT RE5 Restore AP 108 ACU AT XC1 RelMsg Short AT RE6 Restore FP116 ACU 2 RelMsg Long AT RPO Parity V 25 AT ZCO Callback Off AT RP1 Parity Even AT ZC1 9 Callback Intern 1 9 AT RP2 Parity Odd AT ZC10 Callback Remote Parity Mark AT ZC12 Calback Rmt Ind AT RP4 Parity Space AT ZDO DialRstrct Off AT RSO0 HTS Normal AT ZD1 DialRstrct Lv11 AT RS1 RTS High AT ZD2 DialRstrct Lv12 AT RS2 2 Enter Group PW AT RTO Retrain Off AT ZPO Tone None AT RT1 Retrain Low BER AT ZP1 Tone Prompt Only AT RT2 Retrain High BER AT ZP2 AT RVO Accept RDL Off AT ZP3 Tone Prompt Ack AI DVI Accept RDL O 280 Num Rqrd Off AT SCO Speed Conver Off AT ZR1 Rem Num Rard On ATSC Speed Conver On AT ZS0 Ring Disable ATSI Inactivity Off AT Z81 Ring Enable 511 Inactivity 3min 2 PW Verify Dis AT SI2 Inactivityz 10min AT ZVI PW Verify Intem AT SI3 Inactivit
7. 128 Network 128 TADS Network Port c TT 129 ud ME M E 129 713 5 Remote Configuration dre 129 7 13 6 Setting Remote Leased Line Add ess 131 7 13 7 Searching for Remote Modem s Leased Line 4 2 08 132 7 13 8 Setting or Searching for a Remote Modem s Leased Line Address eese 133 713 9 tein arcs cme tains a een ee Ee ie EEEE SEENEN EE e 134 Performing Numeric EOY sssrinin EA E RE 134 9 Calling Interfaces deer eo eer no EAS 136 PD CD 136 8 2 136 8 rem 136 8 4 Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing ristori riede 138 S5 CUBO E EEA TER 139 ani 140 TheEscape Sega ci ESEE eaae E E E a LEEA EEE 141 88 Non Gonfiguraton Gommrmands e Er EP E 141 cc 143 147 8 10 1 Call Es
8. 36 Software communications eee 32 t 56 6 CCMA NIN 176 5101 1 79 6 5peed CONVELSION euer mieten es erts eh IVa 105 Speed detection aene ecrire veio ex 144 Spftware using flow control with 41 Status COMS parameter 71 disp laying information 66 TEDS 17 messages the front 67 BUT T TNI Tm 70 DEUS uia uiri rires 11 Sync dial restoral configuration for 23 Sync dial only configuration for 23 Sync dialing from as 00 UP A IRR 43 122 Sync leased line with dial restoral no ACU 24 System administrator 17 Telco Options citt rr rece ere etes 125 Telephone numbers E E 90 remote callback 110 76 VIEWINGS SLOLEG 96 Terminal ODUOUS 124 TESTS t 166 automat c selE tests ode 166 PUSY OUt c 55 174 d ta mode 172 DTE cables db p REALI Eu 175 fomi tront panel erret ides 113 local analog
9. 22 SAPE GE sas nali e 25 2 Table of Contents AAS SDG vez 25 4 13 1 Op ration RequiremeLis 25 25 215 2 Op mizing Network Perio amie 26 4014 V 545DC Apphcation Exatmples eee SE A EEE E 26 4 14 1 Single Channel Point to Point Digital Link Restoral via Switch sss 26 4 14 2 Point to Point Leased Line Application with Dial Ras 27 SDG Dial Only Ap Plan M 29 4 144 Bandwidth on Demand eie rotten Eesi EA aee 30 4 15 Communications S ftware Packages 30 4 15 1 Asynchronous Communications Software Packages Option Set 31 4 15 2 Communications Software Packages Operating ol 1 OCS m EE 38 417 Flow Corntrol XXE CHO DUES a deca aper CI Ht NEG 39 418 Using Automate Calling Interface to Configure Your Modem Lii acit rta 40 4 18 1 AT Au to Caling Ebro cr S 40 418 2 V 29 pis Auto Pr Erro POPE Cr RES 40 4 18 3 Sync Di ling from IBM AS 400 Option Bet 3
10. DTE Rate Auto 1 TpDlyMin Rx 2 3 4 DIR High 1 4 gt RIS High 1 1 Rem RIS DCD Codex TERMINAL OPT S 128 0 XON XOFF 1 Escape Normal 2 3 4 Normal 2 3 4 Normal 2 3 4 2152 276 015 1 Discon Remote ACU On 980 215 015 768 XON XOFF PT 720 Ck 2 3 4 64 0 2 3 4 ex US Can 57 6 To next page 156 0 2 34 in Reset Remote Tail 2 1 108 1 3 RIS 108 2 v 6 AT Commands From previous page ATL ATENC PD 1 1 1 Volume Medium D Loud Netwik Comp 0ff D 1 1945 of og bog RNC 1 i 1 5 1 E bd ATP ATT NEPT n DIALING OPT S nem 9 B 5 331 351 L 4 1 1 1 ATID AXN ATIC PW Verify Dis D Collback Off 0 Tone None 0 DialRstic off A intem intem 1 Prompt Only intem n Ack Only 9 Prompt Ack Remote Manager Rmt Ind NC Address 000 NC Port Rate 75 D 110 150 1200 ii 2400 4800 r 3 L Country specific option 1 Default for Option Set 1 2 Default for Option Set 2 3 Default for Option Set 3 4 Default for Option Set 4 A Default for all option sets D Default for options not included in option sets
11. 116 boli ttti pn LER ER ULL 87 initiating OF ise 102 Result COD e 143 diS play T tM 57 eaei M MD 57 pero 155 Retrain 104 PP 174 Rune CLOUD eto torpe 148 Rime back smi lated cette 110 RJ 11 RJ 45 jacks selecting essences 63 RIS Control eot 104 RTS CTS 84 151 vais MM DN 147 changing Serreta eeil 147 57 148 57 Saving changes to modem options 74 SDC application examples 28 what to know before USING 27 SDC applications PO 27 Security access security tone 151 callback ferie 108 130 110 front panel 127 128 DasSWOFG aie 109 PASEWONO E MAR NE 97 password verification 110 Sel test IE 166 Iur M 15 Serial 255 nod rcns ede FIXE dL DER HERR 137 Shipping damage eiie ee 12 Sidekick Voice Only Verion 1 56A 38 Site CHOOSING T 12 SmartCom Version 3 1 inert tenen 38 SmartCom III Version 37 SmarTerm 320 Version
12. 167 local analog loopback pattern 168 local digital 172 niu cm E 166 remote loopback 169 remote loopback accepting 66 sync data COMPTESSION 167 nur TEES 150 Throughput optimization methods SUpport deusa 7 Timeout 108 M 105 Timing sync 75 TG Bie WEIN NN 107 Transmit TIMIDO nono 6 6 Unpacking H 12 P CUm 151 programming TOU mrii 156 Dis 43 Map bis Commands sorsero 152 122 154 34 47 42 V 42 bis used si OpHOD Set Zarain 99 used ni Option 25 V 42 bis data compression modified used in Option 24 Wait for data 149 FOP dialtone certet try ree soe eret 149 PTI DOREY mM 86
13. AMX ATCA MODULATION OPT S Line Dial 1 2 3 gt Mod V 34 Auto A gt Mox Rate 28 8 A gt Min Rate 300 1 Fast Call Off 1 gt Mode Originate 1 3 2w Lease 4 N 34 Only 264 1200 1 Answer 2 4 4w Lease 3255 Auto 240 2400 1 Auto V32 3255 Only 32 Only A32 Uncoded 2255 Only 212 Only 2108 Only N21 Only 216 192 168 244 120 4800 7200 9600 2 3 4 120 144 168 192 216 240 264 288 1 3 2 3 4 Auto Ain 0 Retroin High BER 0ff BER AMD AT amp G podine 1 1550 1500 ATRE ATDI ATE ATAS Restore 0ff 1 2 FP Only P 106 1 T FP Auto 4 LtoD Low Fast A DtoL Manual A 1low Slow gt Hold Diotine Off 1 23 RESTORAL OPT S min 215 min 130 min T hour High Fost High Slow 2 hour 32 108 ACU 4 hour 29 116 ACU 08 gt Delay 0ff 1 2 4 or 38 3 Buf amp 38 538 Mode Direct Normal Reliable EC V42 gt Break Destruct A Expedited Standard EC DC OPT S Auto Rel 2 3 4 Spd AutoRel ARM ATDA AT Form Async A V25Form Async gt Default 001 06 Sync Data AsynSync 1034 ACU Select AT 1 25b 3 ACU OPT S gt Char Length 8 LPDA2 DIR Dial 3Bitsync A n None 2 4 Mon Dial Xharsync 9 v NRD NRS ATCT ATC
14. RsltForm command selects format of result codes that are sent to your DTE AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Numeric 0 Result codes are sent to your DTE as numbers short form Verbose 1 Result codes are sent to your DTE as full words long form ATX Call Progress ACU OPT S eee The ATX Call Progress command determines whether the modem waits for call progress signals or blind dials when establishing calls AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 0 0 The modem uses only NO CARRIER and CONNECT result codes 1 1 The modem uses only NO CARRIER CONNECT and CONNECT lt Rate gt result codes 2 2 The modem waits for dial tone and uses only NO CARRIER CONNECT CONNECT lt Rate gt and NO DIALTONE result codes 3 3 The modem waits for dial tone and uses only NO CARRIER CONNECT CONNECT lt Rate gt and BUSY result codes 4 4 The modem waits for dial tone and detects busy signal Only NO CARRIER CONNECT CONNECT lt Rate gt BUSY and NO DIALTONE result codes are used The following section discusses how each ATX Call Progress command setting works 0 or 1 Call Progress 0 and 1 The modem goes off hook waits for the amount of time specified by the Blind Dial option and blind dials whether or not dial tone is present After processing all of the characters in the dial string including dial modifiers the modem looks for data carrier for the amount
15. c 7 Overspeed compensating 97 lign Me P 103 Password see also security CMAN UID tie mer er 99 enabling Or dis bling 97 uir e E 109 129 98 M 110 PAUSE Delay T M 84 Pause Dine ace cce 149 Version 1 36 36 Phone numbers a OPI 80 90 remote Callback e Rer hes 110 d PM TN 76 EWING SEOUEE e M M 96 Power COMECON 15 Ve UI CREDE 177 ProComm Version V2 1 39 ProComm Plus Version l1 1b 40 PSIN SIENA 92 Rate 95 94 Re Execute 145 Rear Panel D3y0Ub iier 12 Redial 84 dieto ye cetero eset otto rer ero t 62 RELAY Gold Version 4 39 Remote ACC SSA nino Rete 99 Remote access TESEL oi eerie eerte eter e 21 Reset 2 Restoral from front 115 iere Her 115 Restoral dial configuring from front
16. 2 Save all configuration changes in memory location before you use the software s Disconnect feature 3 RELAY Gold does not support modem data rates of 12 Kbps You must disconnect the modem set the modem s Max Rate 9600 and re establish a connection 4 When the modem and RELAY Gold are operating at speeds of 14 4 or 7 2 Kbps you must change the modem s front panel Terminal Option DTE setting to match the connection speed This ensures that the modem is able to respond to the AT commands that you ve issued from the escape data mode Select Software s Modem Type Speed Range for Communications Software Package 300 9600 bps Default 300 bps OPERATING NOTE ProComm Version V2 1 Make These Software Changes Change baud rate to 9 6 Kbps or lower Modem Modem Make These Modem Changes Set DTR Disc AT amp D2 Yes See Flow Fontrol Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings Before selec ng the ProComm Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 Dials Answers Yes ProComm Plus Version 1 1b Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 300 115 2 Kbps Hayes compatible Change baud rate to Default 1200 bps modem 115 2 Kbps or lower OPERATING NOTE Set DCD to Normal Yes Yes AT amp C1 See
17. ARGU CIB INF bis Data Format ENTRE T 117 117 KE Character 118 Tdo V 29 Dis Character SelecHo quee tin e SERA i aN Ea eae trac tnu dude tubi emma tuc 118 o 118 118 m NT 119 1 4 9 LPDA Identification M best tM Ra 119 LPDAP Determination 119 i 120 79 121 TXI EhalEne Transmit Level 122 7 9 2 Leased Line Transmit Level oi 122 CELER MR OPU OS eE 122 AIL FrontPanel Security OG MT 125 MNT die Un 124 7 12 1 Group PW 125 7 1929 the Answer Modem is Not Using the Callback Feature enero retain iniu gos 125 7 12 3 If the Calling Modem is Providing the Callback Number 126 7 12 4 Using the Callback Feature with an Originate Only Modem eee 127 7 12 5 Manual Dialing and Callback DTMF Equivaleitcies eer see tica ctn eorr 127 T13 Network I E RE ERAEN EE EEan 128
18. 89 141 etes 151 91 rate cess 82 DTE COMME CONG o 13 DTMF Tone Duration eee 150 DTMF tone length yesh 107 DIR brc 150 DIR Delay 85 CPU ONS M 118 DTR signal determinging modem s 60 EBCDIC ASCII conversion chart 186 Ulp 55 Elephone numbers 80 Environmental 177 A E E E 105 1655068 3 108 set Dy AT CONINBATIO 85 Error cprrection TYPES Supported NM 6 Error eei eren ern ete Eee rre nue 166 retenti ed eed dena 145 External 96 Externa eee ei 44 Fast er M 24 86 e 12 Ferrite Cable Dial Line Connection 14 FOW CONO 41 set DY AT commaid 0 86 po ly Mitt t 25 Front Ranell Display cento tto 19 EronbPane Keys 21 Frontgauel LDS ve nato p ER E 17 18 Front Panel 20000 0 000 0000 Ga 20 Front panel menus how they correspond to command
19. APEC Con Msg DTE Rate D Rel Msg 0fF A AQ gt RsliCode Enable A Disable Orig V25 Resp V25bis N25rate NALOnly None ATO ATS 05 ALSI Loss Dis Off E DSR High 1 T yit Pn 25 Busy 1 Ext Select Off 0 Inactvity Off I 1 2 3 4 Test 3min Js 1 1 510 1 Drop on Disc 2 20min Le Simulate LL S30min Figure 6 1 Main Menu 6 1Selecting Options and Settings The figure in the left margin that precedes each AT command illustrates the main menu option the right arrow b button indicating that you must press the across key until the described appears and the resulting submenu option For example the first AT command in the following list is ATD Dialing an Unstored Telephone Number In the figure accompanying this entry you see The main menu option to access Data 9600 T Ds The front panel control key b to press to display the submenu The ATD Command prompt Enter Then Dial Each front panel option has a default setting Some front panel defaults are determined by the assigned factory preset option sets These preset defaults are exclusive to the particular option set The other factory options are not exclusive to a particular option set and they always have the same default settings regardless of which factory preset option set you use For optio
20. RESTORAL OPT S eee The AT AS Ans Rest command controls whether the modem answers a call on the dial line while it s connected to the leased line AT Option Command Setting Setting Description LL Fail 0 When connected on the leased line all the modem answers an incoming call only if the leased line fails Always 1 A dial call is always answered As soon as the dial call is answered the leased line connection is dropped with auto answering the leased line is dropped after the correct number of rings If training on the dial line fails the modem returns to the leased line RESTORAL 5 The Auto Type command determines how the modem negotiates modulation modes with the calling modem if it s answering calls and one of the Auto modulation modes V 34 Auto V 32bis Auto or Auto V32 is selected AT Option Command Setting Setting Codex 1 Description During answer back tone the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V 32 modulation mode After sending answer back tone the modem continues to attempt to negotiate a connection in the V 32 modulation mode If unsuccessful the modem tries to negotiate a connection in the V 22 bis modulation mode Note Use this setting if the calling modem is a Codex 2264 or 2266 Modem with software revision 3 0 or below The modem operates in accordance with Annex A Automode to the V
21. The Rel Msg command applies to Reliable and Auto Reliable data transfer modes only The local modem can send a reliable message to the DTE along with the normal connect message if both modems negotiated a reliable error corrected connection AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 If enabled the modem sends a all connect message to the DTE but it does not send the reliable portion of the connect message A typical connect message appears as follows CONNECT 9600 Short 1 The modem sends a reliable connect message to the DTE when a reliable connection is successful The message indicates the local DTE to modem data rate but no error correction or data compression is included A typical short reliable connect message appears as follows CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE The modem sends a reliable connect message to the DTE whena connection is successful The message indicates that the local DTE to modem data rate as well as the error correction and data compression schemes are being used A typical long reliable connect message appears as follows CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE EC LAPM DC V42bis Long 2 AT ZC Callback Feature b 4 mem AT ZC Callback command determines source of the telephone number that your modem calls when it receives a valid access security password from the remote mode AT Option Command Setting Setting Description O
22. 8 16 3 MODEM ADDRESS A This field contains two bytes The same value received in the command frame is used in the response frame 8 16 4 COMMAND CODE C This field contains one byte The same value received in the command frame is used in the response frame 8 16 5 SENSE BYTE SB The sense byte contains a return code that describes the results of the command operation The following values are applicable for all commands Other return codes are specific to individual commands and are defined under the Dial and Disconnect command descriptions in the next sections Sense Byte Return Codes Definitions 0x00 Command was executed successfully 0x01 through 0x03 Reserved 0x04 An unsupported command code was received 0x05 0x07 Reserved 0x08 The contents of the command data field were not valid 0x09 through OxOF Reserved 8 16 6 FIELD D The length and contents of the data field are command dependent 8 16 7 FRAMING RULES A frame with a control or FCS field error is invalid and ignored Each command and response is conveyed by a single frame The modem does not accept a new command from the DTE until a response to the previous command has been returned to the DTE If a command is valid and the modem executes it a positive response is returned to the DTE If the command is invalid or the modem cannot execute it a negative response containing an error code is returned to the DTE 8 16 8
23. AT amp F lt CR gt 4 8 Option Sets The modem gives you four preprogrammed option sets designed to get your modem working quickly in common application These option sets govern how the local modem and DTE interact with the remote modem and DTE For proper async modem operation you must also select a communications software package to operate in conjunction with the selected option sets Table 4 3 Option Set Summary SDC Modem Async dial applications in which you are using the AT ACU to originate calls to a central site default option set Sync restoral application Sync dial only application Sync leased line application with dial restoral no ACU CHAPTER 4 Getting Started 4 9 Option Set Descriptions OPTION SET 1 ASYNC CALLS TO CENTRAL SITE See the description in Table 4 3 OPTION SET 2 SyNc Diar RESTORAL With this set the clock option is set to external since network timing is provided by the DSU CSU Note When this option is selected the DSU s restoral configuration should be set to Timing Internal In this set your local and remote modems are configured for sync data compression The modems default to Fast Call Lv13 and use LAPM error correction with modified V 42 bis data compression For proper operation be sure to enable Option Set 2 in both the local and remote modems and make sure that the Mode AT SM option is set the same in both the answer an
24. you begin operation Tx Level Measured in dBm transmit level is a measure of by obtaining a baseline of normal good quality the receive signal s power This parameter service of typical connections With this deviations displays the strength of the signal the MODEM from the normal can be spotted Also to help you 32Fast is receiving in decibels relative to 1 mW locate persistent trends use CQMS value Receive level measures the power level of the information in conjunction with current and Signal entering the device s receiver Acceptable nj receive level varies with the carrier detect historic network information Once your network splection determines the baseline the thresholds for each Rx Level Measured in dBm receive level is a measure of parameter can be used to identify abnormal line the received signal s power This parameter performance For example if all local calls connect displays the strength of the signal the MODEM as expected yet the long distance calls show a 32Fast is receiving in decibels relative to 1 mW higher rate of errors the CO to CO or remote local Receive level measures the power level of the loop connections mas signal entering the device s receiver Acceptable P y 8 receive level varies with the carrier detect The MODEM 32Fast COMS parameters measure end to end performance and monitor Retrains This parameter displays the number of trainin
25. Must match LCLLOCNAME on remote System device description Must match RMTLOCNAME on remote System device description e RMTNETID e CTL NONE for Control unit description associated with the device description NO for APPC SECONDARY AS 400 CONFIGURATION CRTLINSDLC LIND RSRCNAME ROLE CNN EXCHID MODEM AUTODIAL DIALCMD e STNADR DUPLEX CRTCLAPPC e CTLD LINKTYPE e SWITCHED APPN SWTLINLST RMTNETID EXCHID e CNNNBR ROLE e STNADR LIND LINO12S RSRCNAME LINO12 ROLE SEC CNN SWTPP EXCHID 05600002 MODEM V45 AUTODIAL YES DIALCMD V25BIS STNADR 01 DUPLEX FULL Name of line description being created Communications line being used Secondary SDLC Must match control unit description of remote system Switch point to point Must match control unit description of remote system Use V 54 diagnostics Use automatic calling feature Use V 25 bis dial commands Station address must match control unit description of remote system Select full duplex RTS always on CTLD SYSTEM2CTL LINKTYPE SDLC SWITCHED YES APPN NO SWTLINLST LINO 128 RMTNETID NONE EXCHID 05600001 CNNNBR 5551212 ROLE PRI STNADR 01 Name of the control unit being created SDLC is being used Switched line being used NO for APPC Name of switched line s being used NONE for APPC Must match line description of remo
26. gt BLACK BOX ETT ESTEE TS JANUARY 1995 MD855A R2 MODEM 32Fast CUSTOMER Order toll free in the U S 24 hours 7 A M Monday to midnight Friday 877 877 BBOX SUPPORT FREE technical support 24 hours a day 7 days a week Call 724 746 5500 or fax 724 746 0746 RM Mail order Black Box Corporation 1000 Park Drive Lawrence PA 15055 1018 INEO ATION Web site www blackbox com E mail info blackbox com FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION AND INDUSTRY CANADA RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio communication It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits f
27. indicates if there are errors in the frame Terminal a T oem mene Flag 7E A Address FF C Control 03 or 13 FCS Frame Check Sequence Figure 8 2 Sync Bit Oriented Frame Format The RLN Request Listed Numbers command is used in Figure 8 3 to illustrate a typical exchange between the modem and DTE The MODEM 32Fast uses the poll final bit in the control field to indicate multiple responses which it transmits The modem ignores the poll final bit in commands it receives The control field in intermediate responses contains a hexadecimal 03 The control field in the final response of a multiple response indication contains a hexadecimal 13 CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces UE z ay Modem Legend 7E Flag FF Address 03 Control for Intermediate Response 13 Control for Final Response FCS Frame Check Sequence Figure 8 3 Using the RLN Command in a Bit Oriented Frame Format If the modem receives either a framing or FCS error it ignores the command and sends no indication to the DTE If a command is entered incorrectly or if the modem cannot execute the command entered the modem responds with the Invalid response described in V 25 bis Responses under Addressed Mode in this chapter The data characters may be 8 bit EBCDIC or 7 bit ASCII with a parity bit You select the character set through the V25 Char character set option T
28. s rear panel Use the Pass Thru option when you ve configured the modem This allows network management data to be passed through to second tier devices NETWK CNTL OPT S 4 RMT CONFIG OPT S 4 SET LLADDR Init Rmt Option Setting Description opt 1 The local modem connected to a network manager though the NC port will not forward all network management data received from the NC port to the remote modem over the in band secondary channel Only commands from the network manager designated for the remote modem are passed through to the in band secondary channel Only responses from the remote modem are passed through to the NC port The remote modem does not pass network management data to its NC port out jack opt 2 No filtering is performed by the local or remote modems The modems pass all network management data received from the NC port to the in band secondary channel and from the in band secondary channel to the NC port 7 13 5 REMOTE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS Figure 7 13 illustrates the RMT CONFIG OPT S menu The options in the RMT CONFIG OPT S menu along with the SET RMT LL ADDR and SRCH RMT LL ADDR menus provide all the options needed to read status information and configure a connected MODEM 32Fast All guidelines described in this section apply to all three of these menus The RMT CONFIG OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are de
29. v Option Included _ Country Specific in Option Sets Option Figure 7 1 Status Option Sets Dialing Menu 7 2 Status Option Sets Dialing Menu The top menu in Figure 7 1 is used for displaying modem status information using option sets and dialing All Status Option Sets Dialing options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ATD Dialing an Unstored Telephone Number ATDS Dialing a Stored Telephone Number ATS Assigning an S Register ATZ Selecting an Option Set amp Reinitiate Memory AT amp I Viewing Modem Identification AT amp V AT ST Viewing Modem Status AT amp W Save Changes AT amp Y Power Up in Option Set AT amp Z AT CN Entering Phone Numbers AT DR Auto Redial AT DS Dialing a Stored Phone Number AT LN Linking Phone Number AT ND Viewing Stored Phone Numbers CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation Data 9600 0 modem status Enter key in this node is T D b d TEST OPT S TEST End Test Accept RDL On LAL Busy Out On v Off Off ROL Pattern LAL Pat Pat Busy Out KEY Y Option Included 1 _ Country Specific MODULATION OPT S in Option Sets Option Figure 7 2 TEST OPT S Menu OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS AT amp T ATH Test Figure 7 2 illustrates the TEST OPT S menu TEST OPT
30. 1 6 seconds in duration The modem does disconnect when it receives space that exceeds respond to the AT MD PSTN signal from 1 6 seconds in duration The modem does the remote modem respond to the AT MD PSTN signal from the remote modem For V 34 V 32 bis V 32 V 22 bis V 21 Bell 212 and Bell 103 Modulation Modes AT MD PSTN On Off ATY Longspace On The modem disconnects when it receives The modem disconnects when it receives space space that exceeds 1 6 seconds in duration that exceeds 1 6 seconds in duration When When terminating a call the modem sends terminating a call the modem sends continuous continuous space for 4 seconds space for 4 seconds Off The modem disconnects without signaling The modem disconnects without signaling the the remote modem and without sending remote modem and without sending continuous continuous space for 4 seconds The modem space for 4 seconds The modem does not does not disconnect when it receives space 1 6 seconds in duration that exceeds 1 6 seconds in duration CHAPTER 6 AT Commands AT MF Modem Flow Control EC DC OPT S gt AT MF Modem command lets modem generate and respond to XON XOFF flow control signals received at the DIAL LINE or LEASED LINE port Note This option only applies to the Normal data transfer mode AT Option Command Setti
31. 19 1 L6 E 75 Command Cross Reference 180 Command mode 146 Communications software CODIDatiDIlity inco eror sons 32 using flow control with eee 41 Configuration asyne calls to central site ete 22 for sync dial only 25 for sync dial A B 1 29 for sync leased line with dial restoral 94 OPUON SOUS i re erbe T 24 SDC Ap PTCA D 27 via remote modem rnnt n 99 with automatic calling interface 43 rn UU 22 CONNEC I JImessape 145 Connect MESSAGES 80 Connect MESSIDE cc eerie se ren eec 94 12 CQMS Parameter Status px E ba pF Eben 71 Crosstalk MK 4 Version 2 00 34 Crosstalk XVI Version 3 71 33 CTS signal M 64 Data carrier LOT M 149 Data compression dewtermining technique used 8l 5 6 D ta format Aud aie casi ie stretto tdi 6 Data Totinat 64 IRL 6 Data transf
32. 40 1 19 External A to Cal Unit Bell 8010 teo FERE eoe eo 42 2 19 T In ate a Galli tette er deiade are er 43 4192 Termmate Calli er eee Ke eade pesa so su ua re KT e FREE CE EVE 43 CABINE A 44 51 44 5 2 Gable COnsid Gravion t 44 Dro TBM Cape DIA CTIOSUICS NR E 45 SMS OM 47 6 1 5elecung Opuons ANd SUUMGS p ehe 54 62 Industry Standard AT Command that begin with rette 54 Te ASE ESETE E E E 107 7 107 72 Status Sets Dialing 108 eu eoo ce 109 TA Muodulaton ODIO 110 111 Restoral 111 T52 Conngpuring for Dial Restoral 112 1 5 3 Interpreting the DTR Option 114 7 6 Error Correction and Data Compression sisarsscnsiivrncsconssovotnnsneveniensianigssasepdshnsbusnensossscnrzosanets 115 TE CEP mm rc a 116
33. AT DA under the ACU OPT S menu To use the Link Phone option AT LN enter a phone number in each address During a dial restoral if you want the modem to disconnect from the dial line automatically after a specified interval set the D to L Dial to Leased option under the RESTORAL OPT S menu in the originate modem only If you want to hold the dial line and test the leased line after this interval set the Hold Dialine option under the RESTORAL OPT S menu in both modems While operating in dial restoral the modem periodically returns to the leased line according to the time interval specified in the Dial to Leased option to test the line in an attempt to reestablish the leased line connection If during 21 seconds the modem fails to qualify the leased line data transmission resumes on the held dial line If the modem successfully establishes a valid connection on the leased line within 21 seconds it holds the dial restoral connection for the period of time set in the Hold Dialine option The modem passes data on the leased line while holding the dial line If a retrain occurs while the modem is testing the leased line the test is determined and the modem returns to the dial line After the timer expires if the leased line is qualified the dial line is dropped and data CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation 10 11 transmission resumes on the leased line If the leased line qualification fails
34. An 8 bit sequence of binary digits bits that a computer accepts as a single unit CCITT Consultative Committee on International Telephone and Telegraph International data communications standards group CCITT V 13 The V 13 signaling lets your modem communicate with non Codex modems This signaling operates when the modem is configured for sync mode CCITT V 22 bis 2400 bps modem standard for use with dial and leased line circuits CCITT 24 electrical standard for interconnecting datacomm equipment DCE and data terminal equipment DTE established by the CCITT It s most commonly used as a computer modem interface Nearly equivalent to EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V 25 Bis A CCITT specified serial ACU for operation with both async and sync DTE equipment CCITT V 32 Standard 2 wire full duplex modems operating at up to 9600 bps Used on the general switched telephone network and on leased telephone circuits CCITT V 32 bis A modulation standard that extends the speed of 2 wire leased line and 2 wire dial line modems to include 14 4 and 12 Kbps It s backward compatible with the V 32 modulation mode When operating in the V 32 bis modulation mode the modem supports sync and async transmission rates of 4 8 7 2 9 6 12 and 14 4 Kbps CCITT V 34 V 34 modulation uses a trellis coding scheme similar to V 32bis However V 34 uses three four dimensional coding schemes V 32 bis on
35. Data Compression options EC DC OPT S category are set the same in both the answer and originate modems If your local and remote Modem 32FAST devices are configured for sync data compression operation and you ve selected Fast Call Lv13 the modems use LAPM error correction with V 42 bis data compression only For proper operation be sure to enable this option in both the local and remote modems and ensure that the AT SM Mode is set the same in both the answer and originate modems AT FL Flow Control The AT FL Flow command lets modems DTEs in a link control the flow of data when buffers near their capacity Use some type of flow control when operating in the Normal or Reliable mode Check the DTE s manual to ensure that the DTE supports the type of flow control you select AT Option Command Setting Setting Off 0 1 all DTR CTS 2 Description Flow control is disabled The local modem and DTE operate flow control by passing characters embedded in the data stream between them The XOFF character signals the transmitting device to stop sending data The XON character allows the halted device to start sending data Note XON XOFF flow control is not supported in the sync data compression mode If sync data compression is enabled and you select XON XOFF the modem behaves as if flow control were disabled In async applications the local modem and DTE use D
36. End Office to End Office connections This may occur when you are making a local call and using round trip delays less than 10 ms Line compensation corrects the effects of low loss in the inter CO connections on the received signal on short connections Note The AT LC command applies only when the modem is set for V 32 V 32 bis operating mode AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 Disables the Line Compensation all option On 1 Enables the Line Compensation option AT LD DTE Circuit 140 The AT LD DTE Ct 140 command controls whether or not the local DTE can put the modem into a remote digital loopback by sending a signal on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 The DTE must support V 24 Circuit 140 to use this option TERMINAL OPT S eee DTE Ct 140 Note remote digital loopback test initiated DTE Circuit 140 will be overridden by front panel or AT test commands AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not respond to a all signal on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 On 1 An off to on transition on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 sends the modem into a remote digital loopback test An on to off transition on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 takes the modem out of a remote digital loopback test AT LE Dial to Leased Option Automatic Disconnect RESTORAL OPT S gt eee AT LE D to L command lets modem automatically disconnect from the dial lin
37. FP 108 ACU 5 FP 116 ACU 6 number of retrains over a period of time exceeds the threshold set by the L to D Leased to Dial option the originating modem disconnects from the dial line and returns to the leased line The 108 ACU restoral setting lets you use off to on signal transitions from the DTE to activate the ACU This allows the modem to accept dial commands In the FP 108 ACU restoral setting the answer or originat ing modem can enable the ACU when the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on Once a call is successful an on to off transition of DTR disconnects the affected modem from the dial line and returns it to the leased line If a call is terminated by any means other than DTR the modem remains in a disconnected state waiting for ACU commands An on to off transition is required to return to the leased line Note The Ext Select option overrides FP 108 ACU restoral if Ext Cntrl option is configured for a setting other than Off The 116 ACU restoral setting lets you use off to on signal transitions from the DTE to activate the ACU This allows the modem to accept dial commands to initiate restoral In the 116 ACU restoral setting the answer or originating modem can enable the ACU when the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on Once a call is successful an on to off transition of Circuit 116 disconnects the affected modem from the dial line and returns it to the leased line If a
38. Hanging up Exiting command mode and returning to data mode Redialing the last telephone number This section addresses AT commands that do not cross reference to a front panel option A RE EXECUTE LAST COMMAND Settings Not applicable Format A This command re executes the last AT command string issued to the modem including redialing a telephone number To re execute the last command enter but do not follow this command with CR You may enter the A command in either uppercase or lowercase characters However when you enter characters in lowercase the modem cannot use the autobaud feature to determine parity The modem continues to use the parity determined by the previous command The AT ZD Dial Rstrct AT command limits the A command MANUAL ANSWER Settings Not applicable Format ATA lt CR gt This command instructs the modem to go off hook and send answer back tone over the line When you use the ATA command during an incoming call the modem initiates the answer end of the modulation mode handshake sequence DSR transitions from off to on when the answer back tone is sent if DSR is not configured for the High setting If the modem is using error correction the error correction link handshake takes place after the modulation mode handshake and before DCD if DCD is not configured for the High setting transitions from off to on This command causes the modem to answe
39. RC ABORTED OK THE FRONT PANEL To use your front panel to abort a session 1 Display Rmt Cnfg Established 2 Press wp until the modem displays Rmt Cnfg Abort 3 Press The modem displays RC Aborted AT RE Initiate Terminate Restoral RESTORAL OPT S gt The Restoral command determines how modems operating on a leased line handle initiation of dial restoral The modem gives you four different ways to initiate restoral Automatic Manual signal Option Set 4 configures modem for automatic restoral initiation Restore FP Auto Note The Restoral option and its operation settings appear on your modem s front panel only if you have the Restoral option installed AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 This option disables the initiation of 1 2 3 4D restoral FP Only 1 Manual initiation lets you initiate and terminate restoral by pressing the Talk Data key key in the Home position on the modems front panel FP 108 1 2 The modem lets the DTE initiate restoral using its DTR signal DTR restoral an off to on DTR transition from the DTE interface initiates restoral This option is provided for DTEs that cannot manipulate Circuit 116 for restoral purposes In DTR restoral either the answering or originating modem can initiate restoral when the connected DTE turns DTR from off to on by dialing the number sto
40. S menu options control how the modem and AT amp T4 AT amp T5 Accept RDL DTE execute certain modem and line tests AT LL Local Analog Loopback Test Busy Out 7 3 Test Options All TEST OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 For specific information on how to use the various tests see Chapter 9 TEST OPT S MODULATION OPT S 4 line Dial Mod C Fast Auto E NEM gt Auto Type CCITT Fast Call Off v Codex ale 19 2 E 3255 Auto 2 AW Lease 168 Auto V32 MA 120 2W Lease Only v 3255 Only 37 Only 2205 Only 212 Only 103 Only N21 Only gt ADA ATX gt ART gt ANY D gt ADMD gt 86 gt AdaptiveRate On Mode Originate Clock Internal PSTN On Guard Tone 0ff w External Auto A in 0 Y RESTORAL OPT S Off Answer i Loopback MUT bad ww 5 On 208 C KEY L Option Included L _ Country Specific in Option Sets Option Figure 7 3 MODULATION OPT S Menu 7 4 Modulation Options Figure 7 9 illustrates the MODULATION OPT S menu MODULATION OPT S menu options control signal variations between the local and remote modems over PSTN or private lines MODULATION OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equivalents w
41. an async DTE you must set the Parity option in the ACU OPT S menu to the appropriate setting Framing characters and data are all assigned parity bits The modem uses a start bit and at least one stop bit for each character Figure 8 1 illustrates a typical async exchange between the modem and DTE Terminal CRN 555 4231 LF Modem Legend CR Carriage Return Line Feed LF is optional from DTE and may precede Figure 8 1 Async Exchange The V 25 bis ACU lets you perform line editing if you make a mistake when you enter commands You can use backspace and delete characters to change commands The modem does not execute a command until it receives the carriage return CR If the modem receives a framing error such as missing stop bit or a parity error it ignores the command and sends no indication to the DTE If a command is entered incorrectly or if the modem cannot execute the command it responds with the Invalid response described in V 25 bis Responses under Addressed Mode in this chapter 8 11 2 SyNc Brr ORIENTED FRAME FORMAT The bit oriented frame is compatible with HDLC and SDLC sync protocol frame formats see Figure 8 2 All commands and indications are preceded with at least one flag F in an HDLC unnumbered information frame with the address A set to global The modem uses the control field poll final C bit to signal the final response to a given command The frame check sequence FCS
42. approximately 1 in 10 000 When Retrain Low BER the originating modem initiates restoral more quickly because the criteria for retraining is more sensitive For restoral applications set the Longspace option ATY under the MODULATION OPT S menu to Off When changing to any of the default settings save the changes in nonvolatile memory Refer to AT amp W Save Changes Creating New Option Sets in Chapter 6 for information on storing customized options in nonvolatile memory 7 5 3 The following section describes how signal behaves when the Restore option is set to FP Only FP 116 or FP Auto INTERPRETING THE DTR OPTION SETTING When DTR 108 108 1 108 2 Tail Reset or Discon the following DTR signal behavior applies On the leased line on to off DTR signal transitions have no effect Off to on DTR transitions have no effect on connection or disconnection but they do control whether the modem answers or initiates a call see Table 7 1 On the dial line in restoral on to off signal transitions cause the modem to drop the dial line and return to the leased line Off to on DTR transitions have no effect on connection or disconnection but they do control whether the modem answers or initiates a call see Table 7 1 When DTR High or Esc the DTR signal has no effect on modem behavior except for answering and initiating calls see Table 7 1 When Restore FP 108 1 or FP 1
43. data is not sent or received for an amount of time greater than the value stored in S Register 30 multiplied by 10 seconds Given the range of this S Register the timeout values range from 10 to 2550 seconds 42 5 minutes A value of 0 stored in S Register 30 disables the DTE inactivity option S REGISTER 38 DISCONNECT BUFFER DELAY Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 5 Range 0 to 255 seconds S Register 38 determines how long the modem processes buffered data when a disconnect is initiated For S Register 38 to have an effect on the Delay option AT DB the Delay option under the EC OPT S menu must be set to Buf or 538 or Buf amp 538 S REGISTER 45 55 SECURITY TONE DURATION Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 5 Range 0 to 10 seconds This S Register specifies the prompt tone duration when the ACCESS SECURITY option Tone AT ZP is set to Prompt Only or Prompt Ack This delay is measured from the time the answer modem generates the prompt tone to the time the answer modem detects the first digit of the calling modem 5 password S REGISTER 46 ACccEss SECURITY LEAD DELAY TIMEOUT Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 12 Range 0 to 255 seconds This S Register specifies the lead digit delay timeout when ACCESS SECURITY Tone option AT ZP is enabled 8 10 V 25 bis ACU
44. follow the 0 with H a semicolon followed immediately by an H the originating modem hangs up upon completing the call and is ready to be called back Also for any dial modifiers used in the callback number you must use the DTMF equivalencies provided in Table 7 2 7 19 5 MANUAL DIALING AND CALLBACK DTMF EQUIVALENCIES If you are dialing the answer modem manually via a Dual Tone Multi frequency keypad or you are providing the callback number in a dial string you do not have the ability to enter all of the dial characters that are available through the ACU or your modem s front panel In order to accommodate these conditions the modem recognizes the following DTMF codes as equivalencies see Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Tone Equivalencies Equivalent AT or Front Panel Dial Character 0 End W w Dial Wait K k lt Pause Delay Wait for five seconds of silence T t Tone R Reverse calling modem trains as an P p Pulse Provides a as part of the callback number Delineates password from callback number ACCESS SECURITY ww CONFIG OPT S NETWK CNTL OPT S OvertideMode Of D NC Port Rate 75 D 0 Pass Thru opt 1 110 opt 2 150 1200 2400 4800 9600 Figure 7 12 NETWK CNTL OPT S Menu 7 13 Network Control Options Figure 7 12 illustrates the NETWK CNTL OPT S menu NETWK CNTL OPT S menu
45. mode after the test To start this test using an AT command enter the following command AT amp T6 lt CR gt To stop this test enter the following command When the screen displays OK enter 0 lt gt to end the test The screen displays the message indicating that the test has been terminated Note You can also automatically terminate this test by entering a non zero value in the Test Timer S Register 18 The function of S Register 18 is valid only when you issue loopback tests with an AT amp T command You cannot use S Register 18 to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel When the test terminate the screen displays No Carrier This test will run indefinitely if not preprogrammed to terminate itself through S Register 18 CHAPTER 9 Testing Your Modem REMOTE DIGITAL LOOPBACK PATTERN TEST AT amp T7 Using an internally generated test pattern to provide data the remote digital loopback pattern RDL pattern examines the local and remote modems transmit and receive circuitry and the telephone line Important If your modem is operating in SDC mode see Synchronous Data Com pression Testing earlier in this section for testing considerations Note For maximum reliability run the RDL LDL and RDL Pat tests at a data rate of 19 2 Kbps or lower This test is not valid in the Bell 103 or 21 modulation modes If you attempt to
46. option to Verbose and the Save Changes to Option Interprets command as AT amp XO so that Set 1 transmitter timing is set for internal ATS2 No response Needs a carriage return The AT command buffer length is 60 characters after is command aikoa pom lt gt The modem ignores everything before the characters Commands such as dial commands that AT command prefix so the G in the are followed by a telephone number must be at the command is ignored This command end of the line However if the dial modifier disables the async echo feature just as if it semicolon is entered after a telephone number had been written ATEO the modem returns to the command mode after ATS2 Q 1 lt CR gt Multiple command line Selects S Register dialing Therefore AT commands can be entered 2 as the current S Register displays ft d contents of S Register 2 turns on result ALL EE A SEIMICO OMIN A COMIN ALL code displays and sets S Register 2 to 1 Note If an error occurs all AT command settings prior to the error are executed all commands following the error are ignored If you enter an AT command that requires a postscript number and no number is entered your modem defaults to the 0 setting for the command entered Commands prefixed amp are industry standard AT commands Commands beginning with AT are enhancements of the industry standard comm
47. quality lines Data quality lines offer improved line quality specifications guaranteed by the local carrier When one dial modem connects to another modem the connection spans different telephone facilities The connection between the dialing modem and the telephone company central office CO is referred to as the local loop COs are connected by intra office exchange connections or by inter LATA long distance connections depending on a call s distance At the remote answering mode there is a central office to modem remote local loop connection For a given dial modem dialing various remote modems the only connection that remains constant from call to call is the local loop When one modem dials another modem multiple times the local and remote local loops remain the same other connections are likely to vary from call to call Good quality on one call is no guarantee of equal quality on the next call even if the call is to the same location Likewise poor quality for one call does not mean poor quality for the next When you monitor line quality it s important to Table 6 4 CQMS Parameters spot trends and persistent conditions Examples are Front Panel provided below Display Description PhaseJitter Measured in degrees phase jitter is a continuous fluttering of the incoming analog signal from either its timing signal or referenced phase of the Consistent poor connections for all local calls can
48. rate on the first connection and then constantly monitors signal quality and changes speeds as necessary to optimize user data throughput Based on the signal quality the modem shifts speeds up or down to choose the appropriate transmission rate This minimizes the error rate and maximizes throughput and efficiency CHAPTER 6 Commands ARS operates in the following modulation modes and corresponding data rates V 34 24 21 6 19 2 16 8 14 4 12 and 9 6 Kbps V 32 bis 14 4 12 9 6 7 2 and 4 8 Kbps V 32 9 6 7 2 and 4 8 Kbps e V 22 2 4 and 1 2 Kbps When line conditions deteriorate poor signal quality the modem retrains and determines the rate that the line can support Under poor line conditions the modem may fall back by more than one rate For example if operating at a data rate of 24 Kbps under poor line conditions the modem may retrain to 19 2 Kbps instead of 21 6 Kbps ARS fallback is based on the High BER setting of the AT RT Retrain option When the modem falls back a long retrain occurs When line conditions improve based upon the identification of good signal quality the modem falls forward increases the data rate one rate ata time The minimum time required to fall forward is 4 minutes When the modem falls forward a quick retrain occurs Note AT RT Retrain command must be enabled set to Low BER or High BER if you use the adaptive rate setting The 32FAST 3
49. 24 Signal Status Messages Data Carrier Detect The modem is receiving carrier from the remote modem Request to Send The DTE is requesting to send data from the DTE Clear to Send The modem is ready to accept data from the DTE Data Set Ready On The modem is ready to exchange data Data Terminal Ready On The DTE is ready to exchange data Answer Originate On The DTE is requesting the modem to enter answer mode Remote Digital Loopback Test On The DTE is requesting a remote digital loopback test V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 Local Analog Loopback Test On The DTE is requesting a local analog loopback test V 24 Circuit 141 Pin 18 Table 6 3 Status Summary Line continued Pressing from EIA TIA 232 D Signal Status Message Definition display brings you to Status Summary Line see DR 36 Answer back tone detect timeout no answer Status Summary Line Table 6 3 for definitions Table 6 3 displays disconnect reasons test indicator answer or originate and dial and leased line status Table 6 3 Status Summary Line Message DR Definition Disconnect Reason Indicates reasons for last disconnect or failed call 1 DTR dropped 2 ATH command issued 3 Remote modem disconnected 4 Manager request 5 Configuration change caused disconnect 6 Restoral Manager 7 End Restoral Manager 8 MI MIC signal transition to off 9 Talk Data at the Home positio
50. 32 bis specification During answer back tone the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V 32 modulation mode As soon as answer back tone ends and if a V 32 tone has not been detected during ABT the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V 22 bis modulation mode CCITT 0 AT BD Blind Dial AT BD Blind Dial command determines time interval that the modem waits before dialing Once the time interval has expired the modem dials It does not wait for a dial tone AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 2 0 The modem waits 2 seconds before dialing 4 1 The modem waits 4 seconds before dialing S6 2 The modem waits the amount of time specified by S Register 6 before dialing AT BK Break Handling EC DC OPT s eee Break command controls how modem handles the break signal in the reliable and auto reliable data transfer modes During a Normal mode connection the modem handles breaks as standard regardless of this option setting During a Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable connection breaks are handled according to the modem s option setting where the break originated Break signals are sent to the DTE for a duration of one second AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Destruct 0 The modem uses destructive and all expedited break handling It passes the break to the remote site immed
51. 34 Auto V 34 Auto V 34 Auto Auto Type CCITT CCITT CCITT CCITT Low Speed Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Max Rate 28 28 28 28 Min Rate 300 9600 9600 9600 Fast Call Off Lv13 Lv13 Lv13 Adaptive Rate On On On On Mode Originate Answer Originate Answer Clock Internal External Internal Internal Retrain High BER High BER High BER High BER Longspace Off Off Off Off PSTN On On On On Guard Tone Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Restore RESTORAL OPTIONS Auto FP Lto D Low Fast Low Fast Low Fast Low Fast DtoL Manual Manual Manual 1Hr Hold Dialine Ans Rest Off LL Fail Off LL Fail Off LL Fail 5min LL Fail EC DC OPTIONS Mode Auto Rel Auto Rel Auto Rel Auto Rel EC V 42 42 42 42 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Break Destruct Destruct Destruct Destruct Modem Flow On On On On Delay Buff or S38 EC ID Default Default Default Default Table 4 4 Option Set Summary continued Option OptionSeti OptionSet2 OptionSet3 OptionSet4 ACU OPTIONS ACU Select AT None V 25b None AT Form Async A
52. 34 Auto modulation mode This setting ensures maximum throughput when line quality 15 poor MODEM V 34 SDC Figure 4 7 V 34 SDC Dial Only Application Option Set 3 4 14 4 BANDWIDTH DEMAND Bandwidth on demand supports peak loads that occur sporadically due to large file transfers or peak network access periods With the MODEM 32Fast you can ensure full network availability and performance at low dial up line costs without having to prioritize users or applications Figure 4 8 illustrates a point to point digital link with CSU DSUs connecting two routers over DDS circuit In addition to the CSU DSUs the modems are connected directly to the routers When peak network access periods occur the router can be configured to signal the modem to establish a dial connection though the PSTN Individual users transparently bypass the digital link using the MODEM 32Fast s PSTN link to continue data transmission As bandwidth demands subside the dial call is dropped and data transmission resumes over the DDS link minimizing operating costs while maintaining network performance under peak utilization periods The modem supports all of the industry standard ACUs including AT V 25 bis DTR dialing and LPDA 2 You can initiate bandwidth on demand under the control of the nodal equipment via a secondary post Note Nodal equipment must be configured for secondary port restoral bandwi
53. 4 CTS RTS amp 2 Clock Loopback AT DAO Default Dial Off AT amp YO Power Up In Old AT DA1 9 Default Dial 1 9 AT amp Y1 Power Up In 1 AT DBO Delay Off AT amp Y2 Power Up In 2 Delay Buff or 538 AT amp Y3 Power Up In 3 AT DB2 Delay Buff amp 538 AT amp Y4 Power Up In 4 ANDES 0 2 821 9 Enter Phone 1 9 PRN1 9 AT DCO phone no phone no AT DC1 DC Enable AT AAO Answer Manual AT DDO Dial Wait 2 sec AT AA1 Answer Ring 1 AT DDI Dial Wait 3 sec AT AA2 Answer Ring 2 AT DD2 Dial Wait 4 sec AT AA3 Answer Ring 3 AT DD3 Dial Wait 6 sec Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued AT V 25 bis AT V 25 bis Command Front Panel Option Command Command Front Panel Option Command AT DD4 Dial Wait 12 sec AT DR1 Auto Redial 1 AT DD5 Dial Wait 15 sec AT DR2 Auto Redial 2 AT DD6 Dial Wait 20 sec AT DR3 Auto Redial 3 AT DD7 Dial Wait 30 sec AT DR4 Auto Redial 4 AT DD8 Dial Wait 40 sec AT DR5 Auto Redial 5 AT DD9 Dial Wait S7 AT DR6 Auto Redial 6 AT DE2 DTE Rate 300 AT DR7 Auto Redial 7 AT DE4 DTE Rate 1200 AT DR8 Auto Redial 8 AT DE5 DTE Rate 2400 AT DR9 Auto Redial 9 AT DE6 DTE Rate 4800 AT DR10 Auto Redial 10 AT DE7 DTE Rate 7200 AT DR11 Auto Redial 11 AT DE9 DTE Rate 12 0 AT DR12 Auto Redial 12 AT DE10 DTE Rate 14 4 AT DR13 Auto Redial 13 AT DE11 DTE Rat
54. AT CT CTS Control Eo The AT amp R CTS commands determine how the modem sets the CTS signal The modem signals the DTE with the CTS on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 5 V 24 Circuit 106 Note If you use RTS CTS or DTR CTS flow control and you re in the Normal or Reliable data transfer mode CTS option settings are overridden The CTS signal discussed below is the state of the CTS signal after it has been acted upon by the modem s RTS option In order for CTS to follow the RTS signal from the DTE set the RTS option to Normal CHAPTER 6 AT Commands AT amp R AT CT CTS Control continued AT Option Command Setting Setting High AT CTO AT amp R1 Normal AT CT1 2 3 4 ACU AT CT2 AsynSync 1 AT amp RO RTS ATSCT4 Description CTS remains on at all times Use this setting if you plan to use RTS CTS or DTR CTS flow control The modem controls CTS as it s required in normal handshaking For V 25 bis ACU operation CTS follows DTR in command state CTS if off during training retraining and follows RTS in data mode For AT ACU operation CTS follows RTS in command state CTS is off in training retraining and follows RTS in data mode If an ACU is not selected CTS is low CTS is on in ACU mode goes off during training retraining and follows RTS in data mode CTS is on in async mode CTS is off in sync ACU mode If the data transfer mode is sync CTS i
55. AT MF Modem Flow Control AT SL Error Correction ID AT SM Mode RESTORAL OPT S ACU OPT S ACU Select AT 1 AT Form Async Form Async NoAcu Form Async 1 44 Default Dial Off 1 2 3 4d Answer Manual V25b 3 SyncData AsynSync Syne 2340 Ring 1 ww LPDA2 DTR Dial A 2 3 SDC Ring 42 None 2 4 Man Dial Charsync n Ring 4 19 Ring 8 Using 50 Char Length 8 V25 Char ASCII 7 9 EBCDIC 10 A 11 None Sync Idle Mark V25 Resp V25bis Parity V 25 AT Msg Before CD A RsltCode Enable A char A wosate Even after CD Disable VAL Only Odd Y gt amp gt gt gt RsltForm Numeric Con Meg DTE Rate D Rel Msg Off A LPDA2 Addr FF LPDA2 ID 326X LPDA2 Det Enab Call Progress 0 Verbose A DCE Rate Short 7855 Disab al Y Long KEY Option Included Country Specific Option Sets Option Figure 7 6 ACU OPT S Menu 7 7ACU Options OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Figure 7 6 illustrates the ACU menu ACU OPT S menu options control how you configure ATQ Result Code Display operate and test your modem using the AT LPDA2 or V 25 bis options ATV Result Code Format Some ACU OPT S menu options listed below have ATX Call Progress AT command equivalents which are described
56. AT amp X XON XOFF PT 4 TxClk 5 2 3 41 Default with the MODEM 32Fast SDC AT HD Hold Dial Line RESTORAL OPT S Hold Dialine AT HD Hold Dial Line command forces modem to hold a dial restoral connection while testing a leased line connection This command applies to modems configured for restoral While operating in dial restoral the modem periodically returns to the leased line according to the time interval specified in the Dial to Leased option to test the line in an attempt to reestablish the leased line connection If during 21 seconds the modem fails to qualify the leased line data transmission resumes on the held dial line If the modem successfully establishes a valid connection on the leased line within 21 seconds it holds the dial restoral connection for the period of time set in the Hold Dialine option The modem passes data on the leased line while holding the dial line If a retrain occurs while the modem is testing the leased line the test is terminated and the modem returns to the dial line After the timer expires if the leased line is qualified the dial line is dropped and data transmission resumes on the leased line If the leased line qualification fails the leased line cannot be qualified after 21 seconds or if a retrain is initiated another attempt to qualify the leased line is made according to the time specified in the Dial to Leased option
57. D eee DTE 19 2 RELIABL gt view on your control terminal screen non action information that identifies your modem This information is referred to as the short form status snapshot display The following command option list describes short form modem identification information AT Command Setting Description 0 Software number 1 Factory product code 2 Country code 3 Product code 4 Network control address optional 5 Serial number The Front Panel You can also view modem status snapshot by using the front panel Press until DTE 19 2 RELIABL appears and press until Display Modem Id appears CHAPTER 6 Commands Dial Line Types TELCO OPT S gt eee AT amp J Telco command lets you make correct registered jack selection that is compatible with your equipment The FCC is a telecommunications and standards organization that specifies a series of registered jacks for use with a dial line network sometimes referred to as PSTN These jacks are designated as RJxxx type jacks where RJ means Registered Jack and xxx specifies the series of the jack For example RJ11 indicates that the jack is a registered jack from series 11 Sometimes the jack designation is followed by a letter RJ11C that indicates the jack housing style Jacks specified under FCC Part 68 fit into one of the following categories Permissive voice or Programmable data AT Option Co
58. Discon 4d Reset 2 SDC 108 1 3 SDC 108 2 2 3 CTS High Normal 2 3 4 ACU AsyncSync 1 RTS AT amp S DSR High 1 Normal 3 491 as 2 SDC Y Drop On Disc 2 F Simulate LL gt ATOS Overspeed 1 AT DT gt Delay 25 DTE Pin 25 Busy 7 Test Ext Select Off 0 1H 2L 1H 4L 2H 1L 2H 3L 2H 4L 3HhL Inactivity Off F 3min F Aomin F 20min F 30min F s30min 3H 2L 3H 4L AHAL 4H 2L 4H 3L 444444444444 Figure 7 7 TERMINAL Menu 7 8 Terminal Options Figure 7 7 illustrates the TERMINAL OPT S menu TERMINAL OPT S menu options control signals between a co located modem and a DTE Some TERMINAL OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 The remaining TERMINAL OPT S options which you can select from the front panel a network management system or by using remote configuration are described following this list CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS 7 9 Telco Options AT amp C DCD Control Figure 7 8 illustrates the TELCO OPT S menu AT amp D DTR Control TELCO OPT S menu options control the modem s interface transmit level with the PSTN and private AT amp R AT CT CTS Control lines the speaker and telco jack AT amp S AT MR DS
59. LPDA2 DiAL COMMAND The command code format is as follows Command Code Format 0x21 This command causes the modem to go off hook to dial the number included in the data field of the command and all dial modifiers to be implemented Call progress is then dictated by the option mode selected The command can contain up to 58 bytes but the modem can only dial 50 characters Some of the dial modifiers which may be included in the command string would not be counted as part of the 50 dial characters LPDA2 specific dial modifiers may be inserted into the number dialed to implement special functions as described in Table 8 9 In leased line operation a dial command whole on the leased line will cause the modem to initiate a restoral If a dial command is received while the modem is in restoral an error response is returned to the DTE Note Any invalid characters not specified below force the command to be aborted and an error code is returned to the DTE CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces Table 8 9 LPDA2 Dial Modifiers LPDA2 Dial Hex Modifiers Value Definition 0 0 0 9 Dial digits packed two per byte OxE2 This modifier causes a delay of up to the number of seconds specified in S Register 6 Dialing continues only when the modem receives dial tone If the modem doesn t detect dial tone during the delay time it terminates the command and goes on hook Table 8 9 LPDA2 Dial Modifiers continue
60. Modem Changes Dials Answers 110 to 57 6 Kbps Default 1200 bps 1 See Flow Control Yes Yes Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings For all Hayes modems 1 Run Setup Script select 1 and then C Do not enable the Crosstalk speed adjustment feature Change speed to 57 6 Kbps or lower For text file transfers set the Crosstalk Outfilter setting to Off Set modem s DTE rate AT DE to match the software speed if greater than 38 4 Kbps OPERATING NOTES 1 Before using the Crosstalk Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 2 Enable Crosstalk automatic speed detect feature only when you have configured modem to Mode Direct and the modulation mode Mode V22 bis Only 3 Change Crosstalk remote command character value to Ctrl R before placing or answering a call Refer to Crosstalk software s operating instructions for the correct procedure Crosstalk MK 4 Version 2 00 Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 300 115 2 Kbps 2400 baud Hayes Change speed to See Flow Control Yes Yes Default 1200 bps compatible modem 115 2 Kbps or lower Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings Set DCD to Normal AT amp C1 Set DTR to Disc AT amp D2 Set modem s DTE rate AT
61. RELIABLE RC ABORTED CONNECT 72000 RELIABLE RC SESSION IN PROGRESS CONNECT 76800 RELIABLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT INHIBITED CONNECT 600 CONNECT 96000 RELIABLE CONNECT 115200 RELIABLE CONNECT 2400 CONNECT 128000 RELIABLE CONNECT 4800 CONNECT RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 7200 CONNECT 600 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy Table 8 3 Result Codes continued Word Form Response CONNECT 1200 RELIABLE EC Numeric Form Response CONNECT 2400 RELIABLE EC CONNECT 4800 RELIABLE EC CONNECT 7200 RELIABLE EC CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE EC CONNECT 12000 RELIABLE EC XXX CONNECT 14400 RELIABLE EC DC T CONNECT 16800 RELIABLE EC xxx DC a CONNECT 19200 RELIABLE EC XXX CONNECT 21600 RELIABLE EC XXX CONNECT 24000 RELIABLE EC XXX CONNECT 38400 RELIABLE EC XXX CONNECT 48000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC CONNECT 56000 RELIABLE DC yyy CONNECT 57600 RELIABLE EC DC yyy CONNECT 64000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 72000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 76800 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 96000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 115200 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 128000 RELIABLE EC Notes xxx DC yyy 1 When the modem displays CONNECT messages xxx displays
62. RU Dre 161 82102 Disc nnect Response Data Field 161 9 Westin Your irte eene exe Oa aav deve er derer ges ud ox 162 9 1 Cl troQUCDOTI 162 TOS Es 162 OD 162 SM c cuME 163 10 Operating SDeCIlCatiOns e tr rete EE 172 INE T 172 10 2 Operating 172 TOO 173 10 4 Primary Power Bequireieuls TA teh Coe lee EM 173 aro PM PTT 173 174 11 Command ge d arare M 176 12 ASGIIZEBGDJIG Hexadecimal FUE FIN MURDER EUH INT CURE 182 Appendix Options and Displays WOFPESBOGE dS tnos bs rab EMEN Vind tabu Ep S 184 SL 85 189 MEK EE 194 eee 1 Specifications Operation Transmit Timing Internal external Non sync compressed mode Full duplex or
63. SECU gt Option Command None 0 The AT ZD DialRstrct command defines dial all command limitations Prompt Only 1 AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 No dial restrictions exist all Lv11 1 The auto redial command is not allowed The A command is not allowed if the previous command was a dial command In both cases the modem reports an ERROR message 2 to the DTE Only Lv12 2 Lv12 has the same functionality as Lv11 In addition only stored phone numbers may be dialed The ATD V 25bis CRN LPDA2 Hex 21 and the front panel Enter Then Dial options are not allowed AT ZI Enter Access Security Group Password ACCESS SECURITY eee em The AT ZI Enter Group PW option lets you enter the password that your modem uses for access security The maximum length of a password is 10 characters but you can use as few as one character AT ZI You can enter AT ZIX CR 3 THE FRONT PANEL You can enter the following alphanumeric characters 0123456789ABCD expect a callback and to enter the access security Description No tones are generated by the answer modem Upon answering a call the local modem sends the caller a dial tone This is a prompt for the caller to enter the access security password The dial tone lasts for the amount of time specified by S Register 45 The caller must enter the access security password in the amount of time specifie
64. Sim Ring Disable D DialRstrct Off A Enable v12 Figure 7 11 ACCESS SECURITY Menu 77 425 3 The password is validated by answer modem or is passed to the network manager for validation Note If the PW Verify command is set to Mngr AT ZV the network management system verifies the received password Although displayed at the modem this selection is not accessible by the front panel or AT ACU 4 If the password if valid the modem attempts a connection If the password is invalid your modem disconnects immediately A callback function is provided to act as a toll saving feature Upon verification of the calling modem s access security password your modem can call a number that is Provided by the calling modem Stored in one of nine memory locations in your modem Provided by the network manager If the calling modem s password if valid your modem disconnects and calls the callback number By using the answer modem s callback function you need only stay on a long distance call long enough for the answer modem to verify your password and read the callback number The answer modem then disconnects and calls you back 7 12 1 GRovP PW ENABLE DISABLE The Group PW option determines if the modem is able to verify a received password when you ve selected the PW Verify Mngr AT ZV and the network management system is unable to perform the verification This
65. TO A DTE You can connect a DTE to your modem with an EIA TIA 232 D interface 25 pin connector cable normally provided by the DTE manufacturer Caution The Modem has an RS 232 EIA 562 electrical interface for connection to external equipment If your DTE does not have an RS 232 interface do not under any circumstances connect the modem to a non RS 232 EIS 562 device We make no guarantee of the equipment s integrity if you do not use compatible interfaces If your DTE does not have an RS 232 EIA 562 interface you will need an external converter cable Note Before connecting the modem to your DTE refer to Chapter 5 for information on V 34 cabling To CONNECT DTE YOUR MODEM 1 Connect an EIA TIA 232 D interface cable between your modem s rear panel DTE connector and your DTE see Figure 3 2 2 Tighten the retaining screws on the connectors that hold the cable in place Note f you are operating the modem at DTE rates greater than 19 2 Kbps the cables you use must be the correct capacitance for the modem to operate as specified See Chapter 5 for instructions on how to determine the correct cables for your application CHAPTER 3 Installation PHONE LEASE DIAL 2 e 91 E m m LEASED TELEPHONE LINE LEASED LINE EIA TIA 232 D JACK INTERFACE CABLE DIAL LINE JACK CABLE DIAL OPTIONAL
66. Table 6 4 COMS Parameters continued Front Panel Description Display Description Measured in milliseconds from 1 to 9999 ms SQ Signal Quality displays the relative quality of the this is the far end echo round trip delay time This value is displayed only when the V 34 V32 bis or V 32 modulation mode is being used Otherwise the displayed value is zero Echo delay displays how far away in time the far end echo is the round trip delay of the physical link layer Measured in decibels from 6 to 72 dBm this is the strength of the echo signal generated between the local modem and the remote modem CO connection This value is displayed only when the V 34 V 32 bis or V 32 modulation mode is being used Otherwise the displayed value is zero Note If the far end echo level is 35 dB below its receive level the Phase Roll EP parameter has no meaning Measured in decibels from 6 to 72 dBm this is the strength of the echo signal generated on the local loop between the local modem and the local CO This value is displayed only when the V 34 V 32 bis or V 32 modulation mode is being used Otherwise the displayed value is zero Measured in Hz 0 0 to 9 4 Hz this is a measure of the echo s frequency offset This value is displayed only when the V 34 V 32 bis or V 32 modulation mode is being used Otherwise the displayed value is zero Phase Roll is the difference in the transmit and receive path s frequenc
67. The modem uses Loopback timing timing signals are passed on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 17 V 24 Circuit 115 Note This selection is not available if you re operating in the SDC mode If you select Loopback with SDC enabled the modem uses Internal timing instead DATA 9600 T D PowerUpin AT amp Y Power Up in Option Set The AT amp Y Power Up In command assigns the option set your modem uses when you power up It s also used when you are resetting the modem memory AT amp D3 AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Old 0 When you turn on the modem it all automatically uses the last saved option set that was selected when it was turned off 1 4 1 4 When you turn on the modem it automatically uses the option set that corresponds to the number selected AT amp Z AT CN Enter Telephone Numbers DATA 9600 T D gt e o o srr The AT amp Z and AT CN Enter Phone commands store a telephone number up to 50 characters in one of the modem s nine telephone book addresses THE AT amp Z OR AT CN COMMAND To store a telephone number in one of the modem s nine telephone book addresses enter the AT amp Z or AT CN command the telephone book address 1 9 a command and the telephone number you want to store For example to store the 1 222 555 4444 in memory location 3 enter AT CN3 12225554444 lt CR gt If you enter the AT amp Z
68. The AT connect message is sent to the DTE after DCD is raised CHAPTER 6 Commands Maximum Rate Max Rate command sets maximum rate at which modems communicate over the analog network Settings will vary depending moouarion on modulation mode you choose but some of the following speeds will be available Option Setting AT oe etting Maximum Modem Modulation Rate bps 13 28 800 26 4 12 26 400 11 24 000 21 63 10 21 600 19 23 9 19200 16 83 8 16 800 14 4 7 14 400 bs 6 12 000 9600 5 9600 7200 4 7200 4800 3 4800 2400 2 2400 1200 1 1200 300 0 300 Note When the V 34 Auto modulation mode is selected the modem negotiates data rates from 300 to 24 000 bps When the V 34 Only modulation mode is selected the modem negotiates data rates from 9600 to 24 000 bps AT NB Buffer Option v AT NB Buffer Option lets you specify whether normal reduced sized buffers are used to store data received from a local DTE Use this option if you DTE to DTE flow control enabled The option reduces amount of data sent to the remote DTE when a flow off condition is received 1 at the local DTE Note This option is available only when Mode Normal AT SM AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Regular 0 Normal capacity buffers are used all Reduced
69. The MODEM 32Fast supports a CCITT V 25 bis ACU for initiating calls from a DTE You can use the V 25 bis ACU with intelligent DTEs that communicate in either sync or async data formats When you enter telephone numbers into modem memory or dial directly from the modem s front panel you may need to add dial modifiers to your telephone number Some applications require dial modifiers to satisfy special dialing requirements For a list of dial modifiers used by the modem when it operates in the V 25 bis ACU mode see Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements described earlier in this chapter 8 10 1 CALL ESTABLISHMENT METHODS Your modem s V 25 ACU supports an addressed mode that uses the commands described in this chapter You can store telephone numbers in memory dial calls from memory and perform other ACU functions through the addressed mode In addition to addressed mode the modem supports manual and direct call establishment methods The direct mode lets you use DTR transitions from the DTE to establish calls The manual mode lets you manually initiate and answer calls with a telephone and then transfer the call to the modem The direct and manual methods of call establishment are described later in this chapter 8 10 2 MODEM CONFIGURATION Ensure that all option settings under the TERMINAL OPT S menu are appropriate for your application See Chapter 7 Front Panel Operation V 25 BIS RESPONSES W
70. This user s manual One AC line cord Modular telephone cable for connecting the modem to the telephone line 3 1 Unpacking Your Modem Rough handling during shipping causes most early modem failures After you unpack yur MODEM 32Fast check it for shipping damage Save the carton s and protective packing material in case you need to store or ship the modem later If you notice any damage to your modem contact the shipper Direct any additional questions about damaged or missing parts to our customer service department 3 2 Choosing a Site Where you place your modem can affect how it operates Follow these guidelines when choosing a site Install your modem in a clean well lighted place that s free from temperature extremes and dust Position your modem so you can easily see the front panel Do not place anything on top of your modem or stack your modem on top of another modem Install your modem to allow at least 6 inches 15 2 cm in front of the modem for front panel access Leave at least 4 inches 10 2 cm in back for cable clearance Place your modem no more than the EIA recommended distance from your DTE and within 6 feet 1 8 m of a grounded AC power outlet Do not place anything within 1 inch 2 5 cm on either side of your modem To prevent overheating do not place the modem on its side 3 3 FCC Registration This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the bottom
71. Uncoded and V 32 bis modulation modes 10 retrains must occur within 10 minutes For all other modulation modes 20 retrains must occur within 10 minutes If you find that the Low Fast setting is not sufficiently sensitive set the AT RT Retrain command to Low BER to make the modem more sensitive to poor signal quality If you find that the modem is too sensitive to poor signal quality set the Retrain option to High BER and change the setting of the L to D option to a less sensitive setting Table 6 5 summarizes the number of retrains that must occur over a specified time for each setting of the AT DI command Table 6 5 L to D Option Settings V 34 V 32 bis V 32 All Other Modulation Modes Modulation Modes Option AT Command of Time in of Time in Setting Setting Retrains Minutes Retrains Minutes Low Fast all High Low Slow Medium High Fast Medium High Slow Low AT DL RTS CTS Delay sors I RTS CTS Delay E The AT DL RIS CTS Delay command sets the interval for the delay time between RTS and CTS These settings only apply when operating in the async direct or sync data modes AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 0 0 There is RTS CTS delay all 15 1 There is a 15 ms minimum delay before the modem sends the CTS signal to the DTE after receiving RTS from the DTE 60 2 There is a 60 ms minimum delay before the modem sends the CTS signal to the DTE after receiving RTS from the
72. addition to this hardware response you can receive a call process indication at your DTE The V25 Resp option chooses the response you receive Option Setting Description V25 bis Modem sends a VAL message as it receives the all dial command and a CNX message once it receives an answer back tone from the remote modem Modem sends VAL message as it receives the dial command and a CNX message followed by the data rate once it switches to data mode In the direct data transfer mode the data rate reflects the modem to modem data rate In the normal reliable and auto reliable data transfer modes the data rate reflects the modem to DTE rate If the Rel Msg option is set to Short or Long the connect message appears in the following form CNX rate RELIABLE Modem sends a VAL message when the modems Switch to data mode V25 rate VAL Only None Modem does not send a message to the DTE CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation 7 7 8 LPDA2 ADDRESS This option lets you select the modem address The default is OxFF allowing the modem to accept as valid any address received in the information field If the modem LPDA2 address is set to a value other than the default valid addresses range from 00x01 to OxFF the address in the information field must match the configured address If the address does not match the command is ignored If the command address is valid the modem saves the address and uses it in the command respon
73. analog loopback test making the line appear busy to incoming calls AT LN Link Telephone Numbers ws The AT LN Link Phone command lets you link telephone numbers that are stored in the modem s telephone book Some remote applications provide more than one telephone number to call if one is busy you can call another If a call attempt to a specified number fails and that number has been linked to another the modem momentarily displays Link Wait and then calls the second linked number Note If you enable the AT LN Link Phone the modem dials linked numbers before redialing see the AT DR section in this chapter CHAPTER 6 AT Commands THE AT LNN M COMMAND You can also link telephone numbers using the AT LN command Enter the AT LN command followed by the memory location of the number you want to link from n a comma and the number that you want to link to m A typical AT LN command entry looks like this AT LN2 4 In this example memory location 2 is linked to memory location 4 To clear the link between memory locations 2 and 4 enter AT LN2 FRONT PANEL See Sectihn 7 13 10 for details on how to use numeric entry 1 Step across the Status Option Sets Dialing menu by pressing b until you see Link Phone 1 2 Press the until the display shows the address number you want to link 3 Press The display shows address that selected addre
74. and describes their functions Table 4 1 Front Panel LEDs Mme _ Transmit Data terminal Flashes when the modem accepts data to be transmitted from the local Receive Data Flashes when the modem passes received data to the local terminal Ring Indicator Off Hook On when an incoming call is ringing Also on when the modem is off hook and connected to the dial line Data Carrier Detect On when the local modem is receiving a carrier signal as defined by the modulation mode currently being used from the remote modem or when the front panel DCD option is set to High Data Terminal Ready On when a DTR signal from an attached terminal is detected RC NC Remote Control Flashes to indicate that the modem is under remote configuration Network Control via front panel or AT ACU 4 4 Front Panel Display Your modem s front panel contains a 16 character alphanumeric LCD display You can access the modem menu tree through this display Using the menu tree and front panel keys you can Configure your modem Store and view telephone numbers Initiate and answer calls View status information e Run ondine tests Enter passwords and network addresses 4 5 Navigating the Front Panel Menu Tree The category at the top of the menu tree is called the Status Option Sets Dialing menu The left most display in this menu is called the Home display It is the place where modem opera
75. be an analog voice grade jack RJ 11 Although an RJ 11 jack is installed we recommend that the telco option AT amp J TELCO OPT S category be set to RJ 45S This optimizes modem performance In a normal telco supplied loop situation the telco options setting should match the jack type installed 3 6 Connecting to an AC Outlet Once you have cabled your modem plug the power cable into the modem and then into an outlet Turn the power switch on the modem s rear panel to the ON position Warning The modem must properly grounded through its electrical plug If you cannot use the safety plug with your electrical outlet consult a licensed electrician to ensure that the modem is properly grounded Unplug the modem from your power outlet before you have it serviced Once the modem is turned on it will perform a self test and display 32FS Fast Ready on the front panel If your modem does not display this message see Chapter 9 Testing Your Modem for a description of simple troubleshooting procedures 4 4 Getting Started This chapter is divided into two parts The first part describes how to operate your modem from the front panel To operate your modem from the front panel you should become familiar with LEDs LCD display Front panel control keys The modem s front panel menu tree shown in Figure 4 3 The second part of this chapter discusses how to configure th
76. call is terminated by any means other than Circuit 116 the modem remains in a disconnected state waiting for ACU command An on to off transition is required to return to the leased line Note The Ext Select option overrides FP 116 ACU restoral if Ext Cntrl option is configured for Pin 14 and the Ext Select option is config ured for a setting other than Off Note Option Setting V 25 Even Odd Mark Space This command is allowed only when you remotely configure another modem via the AT Remote Config command If this command is issued at any other time an ERROR response is returned to the DTE and the setting of the parity strap remains unchanged AT Command Setting 0 Description Sets parity according to V 25 bis specifications The following parity applies Parity is a space for bit sync protocol A zero is added to each 7 bit character in the message filed Parity is odd for character sync protocol A one or zero is added to each 7 bit character making the total number of one bits equal to an odd number Parity is even for async data format A one or zero is added to each 7 bit character making the total number of one bits equal to an even number Parity is even A one or zero is added to each 7 bit character making the total number of one bits equal an odd number Parity is odd A one or zero is added to each 7 bit character making the total number of one bits equal an odd number Par
77. connection An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer amp Reinitialize Memory DATA 9600 T D Use the AT amp F Memory command to reset your modem to the factory default option settings The four factory default option sets are restored and all stored telephone numbers are deleted The AT amp F Command Enter AT amp F lt CR gt The modem front panel displays 326X initial and the terminal displays OK The factory programmed option sets are now in place The Front Panel When you press the modem first asks you Reinit All Mem Be sure you want to reinitialize the modem s memory before you press again The modem displays 326X Initial indicating that the original factory programmed option sets are now in place AT amp G Guard Tone MODULATION OPT S gt eee sme The AT amp G Guard Tone command determines what type of guard tone the modem uses in V 22 bis operation The proper guard tone AT amp G option setting is required by your PTT Leave this option set to Off unless your PTT requires guard tone AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not use a guard tone 550 1 The modem uses a guard tone of 550 Hz 1800 2 The modem uses a guard tone of 1800 Hz AT amp I Display Modem ID The AT amp I Display Modem ID command lets you DATA 9600 T
78. if the modem is operating in Direct or sync modes the CONNECT message speed also reflects the modem to modem speed CONNECT messages are sent to the DTE at the last autobauded speed Table 8 3 provides a listing of word and numeric form result codes Table 8 3 Result Codes Numeric Form Word Form Response Response OK o Numeric Form Word Form Response Response CONNECT 9600 CONNECT 12000 CONNECT 14400 CONNECT 16800 CONNECT 19200 CONNECT 21600 CONNECT 24000 CONNECT 38400 CONNECT 48000 CONNECT 56000 CONNECT 57600 CONNECT 64000 CONNECT 72000 CONNECT 76800 CONNECT 96000 CONNECT 115200 CONNECT 128000 CONNECT RELIABLE CONNECT 600 RELIABLE CONNECT CONNECT 1200 RELIABLE RING CONNECT 2400 RELIABLE NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT 4800 RELIABLE CONNECT 7200 RELIABLE CONNECT 1200 CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE NO DIALTONE CONNECT 12000 RELIABLE BUSY N NO ANSWER CONNECT 14000 RELIABLE CONNECT 16800 RELIABLE PASSWORD PROTECTED CONNECT 19200 RELIABLE INITIATING RC CONNECT 21600 RELIABLE RC NOT AVAILABLE RC FAILED CONNECT 24000 RELIABLE CONNECT 38400 RELIABLE RC DENIED CONNECT 48000 RELIABLE RC ESTABLISHED CONNECT 56000 RELIABLE UNDER RMT CONFIG RC COMPLETE CONNECT 57600 RELIABLE CONNECT 64000
79. in a tail circuit to a high speed leased line modem or to other devices using DTR and DSR When DTR transitions from off to on the modem connects to the telephone line and dials if the Default Dial option is enabled Use the Tail option if you have an intelligent terminal which must dial out and answer calls without continually monitoring for a ringing signal The DTR signal emulates the function of the Talk Data at the Home position key on the modem s front panel An off to on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect to the telephone line If the modem detects an incoming call the call is connected If the modem does not detect an incoming call and you have enabled the AT DA Default Dial command the modem dials the number specified If the AT DA Default Dial command is disabled the modem refers to the AT MM Modulation Mode option in the MODULATION OPT S menu If set to answer the modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line and the DTE turns DTR on it responds to all V 25 bis and all AT commands When the DTE turns DTR off the modem does not respond to dialing and answering AT commands but responds to all other AT commands Also with DTR off the modem ignores all V 25 bis commands The DTR signal must remain on throughout the course of a
80. modem to configure the local modem s option settings Remote access reset configures the modem to e Answer an incoming call e Accept a network management system Accept a remote configuration session initiated by the calling modem Disconnect a call if one is in progress End any test in progress 4 6 1 OPERATION Select remote access reset by pressing Wand b simultaneously for three seconds After three seconds have elapsed the front panel displays the Rmt Access Reset message When you select remote access reset the modem resets itself to settings that allow it to answer a call and be accessed by a network management system or a remote MODEM 32Fast At this time you may dial into and reconfigure the modem All stored phone numbers and all four saved option sets remain unchanged 4 6 2 CASES IN WHICH REMOTE ACCESS IS DISABLED If you have attached the modem to a network management system remote access reset is not supported If you select b for three seconds when the modem is attached to the network manager the Netman Attached message is displayed To invoke the remote access reset set the OverrideMode On option under the NETWK CRTL OPT S In addition if you have protected the modem with a password remote access reset is not supported If you select three seconds the Passwd Protected message appears on the front panel To choose the remote access feature y
81. of option sets 2 Display the individual option s you want to modify using Wy and For example if you want to change the Max Rate setting from 2400 to 7200 display Max Rate 7200 3 Press The display flashes three times and the colon changes to an equal sign The new option is now temporarily saved and the modem displays Max Rate 7200 4 Step across the Status Option Sets Dialing menu by pressing b until you see Save Changes n 5 Use wyrkey to display the option set number where you want the changes saved Then press The modem displays Saving Options 6 After a few seconds the modifications are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory and the modem displays Save Completed AT amp X Clock MODULATION OPT S gt The amp Clock command sets modem timing and applies to sync applications only For most dial applications use internal timing If you change this option during a connection the change takes effect immediately AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Internal 0 Internal Transmitter Timing The all modem uses Internal clocking timing signals are passed on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 15 V 24 Circuit 114 Internal timing is used for most applications External 1 External Transmitter Timing The modem uses External timing timing default signals are passed on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 24 V 24 Circuit 113 Loopback 2 Loopback Transmitter Timing
82. of this response means that something local to the modem is preventing execution of the command This response indicates that dialing is not allowed due to the DTR conditions 0x08 This sense byte is normally sent when the modem has received an invalid command 0x10 0 12 Reserved 0x13 This sense byte is used if the call timeout timer specified in the Call Timeout AT TT option expires 0x14 0x18 Reserved Ox1A This sense byte shows that the modem detected a busy signal The modem immediately returns this response and hangs up If the defeat busy modifier was included in the dial command string the modem does not detect a busy signal Ox1B Reserved Ox1C This sense byte is sent if the modem at the other end of the connection has not answered before the call timeout time expires When the call timeout timer expires the modem continues to detect the ringback signal Ox1D This sense byte is sent if the LPDA2 dial attempt is aborted while the modem is dialing The dial may be aborted in various ways including pressing the T D button or dropping the DTR signal 1 This sense byte is sent only when the dial modifier OxAA is used in a dial string If the five seconds of silence is not detected by the modem this sense byte is returned to the DTE CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 8 16 10 DIAL RESPONSE DATA FIELD When a sense byte other than 0x00 or 0x04 is sent in the response there s no
83. of your modem you ll find a label that contains the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN 0 28 If requested you must provide this information to the telephone company 3 4 Rear Panel Layout When viewing the rear panel of your modem you ll see Modular jacks for making DIAL LINE PHONE and LEASE LINE private line connections One 6 position Dual Inline Package DIP switch Network Control NC ports for connec ng to network management systems NMSs A DTE port for connecting your modem to a PC or data terminal equipment DTE An AC power receptacle to accept an AC line cord An AC power switch When your modem is shipped from the factory all switches on the 6 position DIP switch are in the off up position LEASE DIAL PHONE LINE LINE FA 6 SWITCH FACTORY PRESET OFF UP NC 4 900906 _ Figure 3 1 Rear Panel Layout 3 5 Cabling Your Modem This section describes how to make DTE dial line leased line and telephone connections for the MODEM 32Fast It also describes how to connect the Modem to a network management system Note schemes and modem rear panels shown in Figure 3 2 are generic representations They are intended as guidelines only 3 5 1 CONNECTING
84. operational and all tests must be terminated manually Note The function of S Register 18 is valid only when loopback tests are issued using the AT amp T command You can t use S Register 18 to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel S REGISTER 25 DELAY BEFORE LOOKING FOR DTR Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 5 Range 0 to 255 seconds When Delay S25 AT DT and AT Form Sync Data AT amp M or V25 Form AsynSync the modem goes into sync data mode after it dials asynchronously S Register 25 lets you switch from an async DTE to a sync DTE without hanging up S Register 25 allows this switch by specifying how many seconds the modem waits after connecting before looking for DTR S REGISTER 26 RTS CTS DELAY Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 1 Range 0 to 255 This S Register selects the delay between CTS and RTS while the modem is online It s operational in modes specified by the RTS AT RS and CTS AT CT commands CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces The time is selectable in 1 100 second intervals You can set the delay from 0 to 2 55 seconds S REGISTER 30 DTE INACTIVITY DISCONNECT Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 0 Range 0 to 255 x 10 seconds If the DTE Inactivity S30 AT SI the modem disconnects when DTE activity is not present
85. response data field When a call attempt is successful or an invalid command code has been received the sense byte is sent in the response and a data field is included The format of this data field is as follows Bytes 0 1 Modem type OxYYYY Byte 2 Modem model code OxZZ Byte 3 Always 0 The MODEM 32Fast lets you select the modem type to be returned in the data field You can configure the modem type YYYY for 326x the default setting or 7855 The modem code ZZ reflects the model for the appropriate modem type selected Use the LPDA2 ID option to make the modem type selection For modem type 7855 the model code is always 10 For modem type 326x the model code reflects the number of ports This is always 01 8 17 LPDA2 Disconnect Command command code format is as follows Command Code Format 0x22 The Disconnect command instructs the modem to drop the switched network data connection and go on hook There are no modifiers for this command This command may be issued while the modem is offline or online In either case a valid response is returned to the DTE In leased line operation a Disconnect command while in restoral will disconnect the switched network connection and send the modem back to the leased line If a Disconnect command is received by the modem while on the leased line the command is ignored 8 17 1 DISCONNECT COMMAND SENSE BYTE In the response to the Disconnect command the sense byte can co
86. run this test in either of these modulation modes the modem responds with Test Denied The local modem transmits its pattern to the remote modem and then loops the pattern back to the local modem as shown in Figure 9 4 The modem records data bit and block errors during the test and displays them on the front panel when the test is complete Remote Modem Local Modem Pattern Checker Figure 9 4 Remote Digital Loopback Pattern Test Before starting an RDL Pattern test make sure your modem has established a connection with the remote modem Otherwise it ll display Test Denied when you start the test run an RDL Pattern test Establish a connection with the remote modem 2 Use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 3 Press wr until the modem displays TEST RDL Pat 4 Press The modem displays TEST RDL Pat 5 Press W twice to reach the home display The modem displays TEST data rate T D For example you may see TEST 9600 T D in the status display 6 To end the test use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 7 Press The modem displays Bit Blk where the number of bit errors and block errors is displayed If the modem s transmitter and receiver were unable to synchronize the pattern the modem displays No Sync Achieved If the modem begins the test and
87. search for and set a remote modem s leased line address and the remote MODEM 32Fast has Release 4 0 or earlier software you cannot set the remote modem s serial number from the local unit You must know the serial number to configure it from the local unit or have someone at the remote site manually enter the address Once you have determined the remote modem s serial number using the procedure described in Before Setting or Searching for a Remote Modem s Leased Line Address in Chapter 6 do the following to set the modem s address RMT CONFIG OPT S 4 4 SRCH LLADDR 1 SET RMT LLADDR New Address nnn p RmtNest Modem No Establish a leased line connection with the remote modem at 7200 bps or greater Display SET RMT LL ADDR Press b until modem displays New Address xxx See Section 7 13 10 for details on how to enter the modem s new address Press b until the modem displays Rmt See Section 7 13 10 for details on how to enter the modem s remote serial number Press b until the modem displays Rmt Nest Modem xx If the remote modem is in a nest and itis on a dual modem nest card select if itis Modem on the modem dual nest card or B if it is Modem B on the card Select No if the remote modem is a standalone modem or a single modem nest card Va Figure 7 14 SET RMT LL ADDR Menu
88. terminal equipment DTE established by EIA The pinout is the same as for EIA 232 C and is nearly equivalent to V 24 EOT End of transmission control character in character oriented protocols applied to BISYNC Tells the receiver that he s sent all user data text ETX End of text control character Tells the receiver that he s reached the end of the message text Exclusion Key Telephone Lets calls be answered manually and transferred to the modem using an integral exclusion key telephone Fallback Switching the data system to a lower transmission speed either for reduced traffic during off peak hours or because of telephone system distortion Fall Forward Switching from a lower to a higher data rate Flow Control Controls data transfer between endpoints in a data network Line signals or flow control characters stop and start data flow Four Wire A circuit that contains two pair of wires one pair for each transmission device Full Duplex A signaling circuit that allows simultaneous 2 way transmission and reception Frame A group of bits transmitted serially over a communications channel The basic data transmission unit used with bit oriented protocols Gain The amount by which an amplifier or power increases the amplitude of a signal passing through it Often represented in dB Half Duplex circuit that allows alternating transmit and receive sign
89. the test If the data does not loop back to the local terminal run the test again If it fails again make sure the DTE and modem speeds match 6 To end the test use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test Press The modem displays Test Completed To start this test using an AT command enter the following command AT amp T1 lt CR gt To stop this test enter the following command When the screen displays OK enter AT amp TO CR to end the test The screen displays the OK message indicating that you ve terminated the test Note You can also automatically terminate this test by entering a non zero value in the Test Timer S Register 18 The function of S Register 18 is valid only when you issue loopback tests with an AT amp T command You cannot use S Register 18 to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel When the test terminates the screen displays No Carrier This test will run indefinitely if not programmed to terminate itself through S Register 18 LOCAL ANALOG LOOPBACK PATTERN TEST AT amp TB Using an internal pattern generator to provide data the local analog loopback pattern LAL Pat test examines the local modem s transmit and receive circuitry As shown in Figure 9 2 the modem internally generates a pattern and loops it from the transmitter to the receiver Data bit and block err
90. the same function as the S modifier described previously However this modifier may be placed in any position in the dial string while the S must be on a byte boundary This modifier is an alignment modifier It may be placed anywhere in the dial string to place the command message field on a byte boundary The dial digits following the T up to the next X are to be dialed using tone dialing This represents the dial digit because this digit cannot be packed into four bits This modifier is an alignment modifier It may be placed anywhere in the dial string to place the command message field on a byte boundary Modifiers Value Table 8 9 LPDA2 Dial Modifiers continued LPDA2 Dial Hex OxAA Definition This modifier causes the modem to look for one or more ringbacks followed by five seconds of silence within the delay time specified by the front panel Call Timeout option If the modem detects five seconds of delay silence it continues to dial the remainder of the dial string If the line is busy the modem hangs up and sends a BUSY message to the DTE If the modem does not detect delay silence or a busy signal it hangs up and the screen displays NO ANSWER OxAB OxAC This modifier instructs the modem to return to the command state after dialing without breaking the connection The modem can dial but cannot train and no call progress messages are received This modifier is used when c
91. to High and the phone line is disconnected the modem is in dialog state If the DTR option is set to 108 2 the DTR signal from the DTE must be turned on to enter dialog state The modem responds by turning Circuit 106 CTS on and entering dialog state Once in dialog state the modem accepts V 25 bis commands from the DTE Figure 8 6 illustrates this signaling DTR 108 2 On Step 1 108 2 On DSR 107 Off CTS 106 On DCD 109 Off Step 2 Step 3 MODEM 32Fast CRS Figure 8 6 Dialog State When the modem receives the CIC CRSa or CRNn commands it enters connecting state and performs as instructed If you enter the DIC command the modem disregards an incoming call and stays in dialog state When the modem is in dialog state and the Answer option in the ACU OPT S menu is set to answer automatically the modem answers incoming calls after the number of rings specified Once the modem answers a call it enters connecting state 8 12 3 CONNECTING STATE Once the modem enters connecting state it turns 106 CTS off and does not accept any commands unless the call fails or you disconnect the call If the call fails the modem raises Circuit 106 CTS and enters dialog state Figure 8 7 illustrates the signaling for the connecting state DTR 108 2 On DSR 107 CTS 106 Off DCD 109 Off Executing the Command MODEM 32Fas
92. to Reliable the local modem disconnects If the Mode option is set to Auto Reliable the modems use Normal mode If the Mode option is set to Speed Dependent Auto Reliable and a connection is established at 1200 bps or less Normal mode is used The modems attempt to negotiate MNP error correction LAPM 1 MNP 2 If unsuccessful and the Mode option is set to Auto Rel the modems use normal mode If the Mode option is set to Rel the modems disconnect AT FC Fast Call MODULATION OPT S eee Fast Call E The AT FC Fast Call command reduces the time for selected phases of the connect sequence AT Option Command Setting Setting Off 0 all Lv11 1 Lv12 2 LV13 3 2 3 4L Default Description This option disables the Fast Call feature The 2 15 secured billing delay in the answer modem is eliminated in all modulation modes except Bell 212 and V 34 modulation modes The length of time ABT is sent is reduced by 1 second in all modulation modes Lv12 applies to V 32 V 32 bis V 34 modulation modes only It includes the Lv11 functionality and shortens the training time in the answer and originate modems by approximately 2 seconds Lv13 includes Lv11 and Lv12 functionality and eliminates error correction negotiation saving approximately an additional one half of a second For proper operation be sure to enable this option and ensure that the AT SM Mode AT EC Error Correction and the AT DC
93. transitions govern how the modem answers and disconnects calls If you want the V 25 bis ACU to manipulate the DTR signal set the DTR option to 108 2 All other options in the ACU OPT S menu are set for a typical sync DTE At the beginning of each connection your modem negotiates the highest common data rate 9600 to 24 000 bps with the remote modem Your modem also uses the adaptive rate feature in the V 34 Auto modulation mode This setting ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor OPTION SET 4 SYNC LEASED LINE WITH DIAL RESTORAL No ACU In this set the modem operates primarily on a leased line unless that line fails Should the line fail the modem automatically restores the connection over a single dial line You must install a modem at both ends of the leased line to implement restoral operation Option Set 4 configures the modem for a general restoral application The modem uses the adaptive rate features in the V 34 Auto modulation mode This setting ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates If restoral criteria are met the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the public switched telephone network PSTN over a single dual line At that time the modem attempts to run at 24 Kbps over the dial line and falls back to lower speeds if required After an hour the modem returns to the leased line With Option Set 4 the modem provides network timing Clock Internal Sel
94. type of line is in use When signal is on modem is on a dial line When signal is off modem is on a leased line This signal is used in restoral mode only CHAPTER 10 Operating Specifications Table 10 1 Modem Computer Interface Connections continued Pin EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V 24 Signal Name Definition Receive Signal Element Timing Timing signal extracted from the received carrier Local modem transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data RXD Local Analog Loopback Test Initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem causing it to initiate local analog loopback test Refer to Chapter 9 Testing Your Modem for more information Not used 108 1 108 2 Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 Sent by the DTE this signal connects the modem to the phone line 108 2 Sent by the DTE this signal also connects the modem to the phone line Remote Digital Loopback Test Signal initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem causing it to initiate remote digital loopback test V 54 Loop 2 Ring Indicator RI 111 112 Data Signal Rate Select Indicator Passed from local modem to local terminal On during ringing off between rings and when no ring is received CI passed from modem to terminal indicates signaling rate is set high for data rates greater than 2400 bps Otherwise it s set low is also set low while the modem is disconnected The functi
95. use the software s file transfer method you must do the following 1 Enable the RTS CTS flow control feature if the software package supports it 2 Set the modem to Flow RTS CTS 3 Set Modem Flow Off 4 Proceed to transfer data using the instructions included with the software If the software does not support the RTS CTS flow control feature 1 Set the modem to Flow Off 2 Set Modem Flow Off 3 Proceed to transfer data using the instructions included with the software If the software supports the automatic speed detect feature make sure the modem s Max Rate is set to a value also supported by the software Then set the modem s Speed Conver Off The modem s adaptive rate should be set to off If you are using a communications software package that is discussed in Table 4 5 refer to the following chart It lists the flow control options for the modem and the communications software flow control and rate settings are explained in detail in Chapter 6 Commands MODEM 32FasT FLOW CONTROL CHART Note When you re setting the various flow control options configure the modem to match one of the settings under the column Set Modem Settings to Send Text Files or select an alternative software file transfer method 4 18 Using Automatic Calling Interface to Configure Your Modem Name of Communications Software Package Crosstalk XVI Select This Modem Mode Reliable Set Mo
96. while it operates in SDC mode The command minimizes data transmission delays This feature lets the remote modem begin transmitting sync data to its DTE before an entire frame of data has been received from the local modem This option applies only when the modem is operating in SDC mode AT Option Command Setting Setting Rx Clock 1 2 3 4L Description With this setting the remote modem uses its internal Rx Clock to control the flow of data from the modem to the DTE preventing a loss of synchronization during data transmission This setting allows the remote modem to begin transmitting data before an end of frame has been received from the local modem If the rate of data transmission slows the clock stops temporarily ceasing the flow of data We recommend that the Rx Clock setting be used in most applications Note This setting is operational only when Clock Internal AT amp X With this setting the remote modem continuously monitors and adjusts line traffic to estimate based on time when to transmit data to the DTE The modem calculates a delay time based on variables such as frame size DTE rate DCE rate and data compression transmitting ratio The remote modem waits this time before transmitting data to its DTE Note Due to variable line conditions or varying types of data frame losses could result with this selection The Throughput Delay Minimization feature is disabled With this setting th
97. 00 and re establish the connection 4 When modem and SmartCom are operating at speeds of 14 4 7 2 Kbps you must change Terminal Option DTE setting to match the connection speed This ensures that the modem is able to respond to the AT commands that you ve issued from the escape data mode 5 Do not enable SmartCom III software s Voice feature SmartCom II Version 3 1 Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers CCITT 1200 bps Hayes 2400 bps Direct Connection Set modulation to AUTO Yes Yes CCITT 2400 bps Smartmodem port comm port 32FAST V 32 AT MM1 Bell 110 bps connected to See Flow Control Bell 300 bps Setthe TEST SET Requirements in Bell 1200 bps directory and configure the Section 4 17 for Default Bell connection type to the correct modem flow 1200 bps DIRECT 9600 control settings Create a dial directory with connection type CCITT 9600 OPERATING NOTES 1 To avoid improper operations between the modem and SmartCom II do not use SmartCom II software s default Dial Directory Z to establish a connection to another computer 2 Before selecting the SmartCom II Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 3 Be sure to save the configuration changes in memory location 1 before performing an auto dialing or answering session with the communications so
98. 00 6 The DTE port is configured for 4800 bps 2400 5 The DTE port is configured for 2400 bps CHAPTER 6 AT Commands AT DI Leased to Dial Option RESTORAL OPT S eee In an automatic restoral application originating modem uses setting of its AT DI to D Leased to Dial command setting as a trigger for automatic restoral The L to D option selects a threshold for the number of retrains that occurs over a period of time The originating modem initiates restoral if the number of retrains that occur over the designated time exceeds the threshold set by the L to D option AT DIO LtoD Low Fast This is the most sensitive setting for this option it lets the modem initiate restoral when signal quality deteriorates slightly Leave this option set to Low Fast to determine if it is sensitive enough for your application For 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded and V 32 bis modulation modes retrains must occur within 5 minutes For all other modulation modes 6 retrains must occur within 5 minutes AT DII LtoD 2Low Slow For V 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded and V 32 bis modulation modes 6 retrains must occur within 10 minutes For all other modulation modes 12 retrains must occur within 10 minutes AT DI2 LtoD High Fast For V 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded and V 32 bis modulation modes 3 retrains must occur within 5 minutes For all other modulation modes 6 retrains must occur within 5 minutes AT DI3 D High Slow For V 34 V 32 V 32
99. 011 neglecting zero bit insertion These two bytes signify that the command is an LPDA2 command You should check the message for validity and execute accordingly 16 bit cyclic redundancy check based on the polynomial X16 X12 X5 X1 Address and Control FCS Frame Check Sequence CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 8 15 4 INFORMATION FIELD FORMAT AND COMMAND The command information field contains the following Command Definition H Header 8 bytes Identifier 2 bytes A Modem Address 2 bytes C Command Code 1 byte D Data Field Optional The length of this field is command dependent Note Fields specified as not used are not checked by the modem and may contain any data pattern HEADER H The following is an example of the byte field 0x0510420821841042 This byte field is required to identify the SDLC frame as an LPDA2 command IDENTIFIER I The identifier is two bytes long and structured as follows Byte 0 Must be coded as 1 bit 1 Not used by the modem bit 2 Command flag Must be coded as 0 bits 3 7 Not used by the modem e Byte 1 Not Used MODEM ADDRESS A The default for the Modem Address option is OxFF This lets the modem accept as valid any address received the information field If the Modem Address option is set to a value other than valid range is 0x01 to OxFB the address in the information field must match the configured add
100. 08 ACU the DTR options setting has no effect on modem behavior except for answering or initiating calls see Table 7 1 Table 7 1 DTR Cross Reference DTE Option Setting Yes orm orm OFF ON OFF ON OFF Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation RESTORAL OPT S 4 gt gt 5 Mode Direct 2 3 4L Buffers Regular A EC V 42 A DC Enabled A Break Destruct A Modem Flow On A Delay Off A EC ID Default A Normal Reduced Disabled Expedited Y Y Buf or 38 3 SDC T Codex Buf or S38 1538 x MNP Standard Reliable 4 1 44 _ 0341806 Y Spd AutoRel KEY Option Included ACU OPT S in Option Sets Figure 7 5 EC DC OPT S Menu 7 6 Error Correction and Data Compression OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Options AT BK Break Handling Figure 7 5 illustrates the EC DC OPT S menu AT DB Delay Buffer EC DC OPT S menu options control the parameters and protocol your modem uses to set AT DC Data Compression the error correction or data compression scheme P AT EC Error Correction All EC DC menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 Buffers
101. 1 Reduced sized buffers are used allowing the modem to accumulate less data AT NC Network Compensation TELCO OPT S gt eee Network Comp The Network Compensation option lets you enhance modem performance while it s operating with certain types of network equipment Note This option is available when the V 34 Auto or V 34 Only Modulation modes are selected AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 should be selected when making default most normal connections within a continent Lv11 1 Select Lv11 if the modem is experiencing performance problems when it s connected to line terminating equipment via short loop that has low loop loss with below normal receive signal levels For example when operating behind a low grade PBX Note This selection limits the maximum possible DCE data rate to 21 600 bps Lv12 2 We recommend Lv12 when performance problems are encountered making intercontinental calls NOTE This selection limits the maximum possible DCE data rate to 19 200 bps When operating in an environment where the conditions described for Lv11 and Lv12 exist Lv12 is recommended to enhance performance AT ND View Stored Telephone Numbers DATA 9600 T D gt eee eme p The AT ND View Phone command displays telephone numbers stored in the modem s nine telephone book addresses AT ND COMMAND To view the telephone numbers stored in your modem s memory e
102. 2FAST SDC device uses a line probing feature during the initial training sequence Line probing selects the maximum data rate that the line can support as well as the optimal baud rate and carrier frequency at which to run Due to this the modem may require a longer training sequence while it operates in V 34 modulation modes If you choose to operate your modem in the V 34 modulation mode with the ARS option AT AP disable the modem may not depending on line conditions retrain at the maximum data rate If the line probe feature selects a baud rate that cannot support the maximum data rate the modem will retrain and establish the connection at the maximum data rate allowable by the baud rate that the line probe feature selected Note When external timing is selected configure the modem so that the minimum rate is equal to the maximum rate AT Option Command Setting Setting Description On 1 The modem continuously monitors the all telephone line s signal quality and negotiates the highest possible rate within one of the following modulation modes V 34 V 32 bis V 32 or V 22 bis You must enable the AT RT Retrain command if you plan to use the adaptive rate setting Close rear panel Switch 1 down so that the modem can inform the terminal of rate changes see Table 7 3 Rear Panel Switches in Chapter 7 Front Panel Operation The modem does not use the adaptive rate feature Off 0 AT AS Answer in Restoral
103. 3 Autobaud Reature aste nente nennen eines 144 Autodialing Data seiner etta cote 6 Automatic Calling Interface sese 43 Automatic Calling Duteryf3Ces 140 Backspace 149 Bandwidth on demand ettet 52 IE D gsm 44 Bit Version 2 DA oaa eiecit ep pcr eva 37 Blind didling INI 57 78 Buffer 95 B ffer DELAY T 80 BUSY Lectio ien the 55 front panels eee 21 Buttons front panel how to 19 Cable DTE TENTE RES 47 e 48 testing MW PI 175 13 pO 47 Call progress Signals 57 108 Call type setting automatically 78 CAM DAGK E 130 phone MUM tardes 110 Callback Feature erect trennen 108 Calls pO M 45 RENIN 45 Capacitan e 47 Carriage return SEII e e e e do E e ees 148 Carnet Loss ei t E RP Rainet duse 150 Certification Compliance 7 Character Length utei erm tenere 122 CTV QUI 89 140 89 141 Clearance 4 0 00000
104. 3 Press B twice to get to the Home display Press to connect the modem to the line 4 The modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone 5 To disconnect from the line press If the DTR option is set to 108 2 you can disconnect by turning the DTR signal from the DTE from on to off 8 14 2 MANUAL DIALING To configure your modem for manual dialing use the following procedure 1 In the MODULATION menu set Mod option to Originate 2 In the TERMINAL OPT S menu set the option to 108 2 or High 3 In the ACU OPT s menu set the Default Dial option to Off To dial a call manually follow this procedure 1 If the DTR option is set to 108 2 raise the DTR signal at the DTE 2 Dial the call using the telephone connected to the same dial line as the modem 3 Press W twice to get to the Home display Press to connect the modem to the line 4 The modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone 5 To disconnect from the line press If the DTR option is set to 108 2 you can disconnect by turning the DTR signal from the DTE from on to off 8 15 LPDA2 Command Set LPDA2 Link Problem Determination Aid is the communications protocol between IBM host software and transmission devices for exchanging diagnostic and control information LPDA2 commands provide a means for an attached DTE to command the modem to dial a telephone number and report back if the call is succe
105. 5MB AT AA4 Answer Ring 4 AT amp LO Line Dial AT AA5 Answer Ring 5 amp 1 Line 2W Lease AT APO Adaptive Rate Off AT amp L2 Line 4W Lease AT AP1 Adaptive Rate On AT amp MO AT Form Async AT ASO Ans Rest LL Fail AT amp M1 AT Form Sync Data AT AS1 Ans Rest Always AT amp M2 AT Form DTR Dial AT AYO Auto Type CCITT AT amp M3 AT Form Man Dial AT AY1 Auto Type Codex amp Pulse Cycle 40 AT BDO Blind Dial 2 AT amp P1 Pulse Cycle 33 AT BD1 Blind Dial 4 AT amp P2 Pulse Cycle 38 AT BD2 Blind Dial S6 AT amp RO CTS AsyncSync AT BKO Break Destruct AT amp R1 CTS High AT BK1 Break Expedited AT amp SO DSR High AT BK2 Break Standard AT amp S1 DSR Normal AT CAO Mode Orig AT amp TO TEST End Test AT CA1 Mode Answer AT amp T1 TEST LAL AT CA2 Mode External AT amp T3 TEST LDL AT CA3 Mode Auto A in AT amp T4 Accept RDL On AT CDO DCD Loss Dis Off AT amp T5 Accept RDL Off AT CD1 DCD Loss Dis 3 s AT amp T6 TEST RDL AT CD2 DCD Loss Dis 7 s AT amp T7 TEST RDL Pat AT CD3 DCD Loss Dis S10 AT amp T8 TEST LAL Pat AT CMO Con Msg DTE Rate AT amp VO Long Form Status AT CM1 Con Msg DCE Rate AT amp V1 Short Form Status AT CN1 9 Enter Phone 1 9 AT amp WO AT amp W1 Save Changes 1 phone no AT amp W2 Save Changes 2 AT CTO CTS High AT amp W3 Save Changes 3 AT CT1 CTS Normal AT amp W4 Save Changes 4 AT CT2 CTS ACU On AT amp XO Clock Internal AT CT3 CTS AsyncSync AT amp X1 Clock External
106. ANSMIT LEVEL The LL TX option displays the modem s leased line transmit level Option Setting Description Oto 15 Modem is set to transmit at a level in the 0 to 15 dBm range 7 10 Dialing Options Figure 7 9 illustrates the DIALING OPT S menu DIALING OPT S menu options control parameters used to dial phone numbers All DIALING menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 TELCO OPT S 4 Dial Tone Pulse DIALING OPT S 4 FP SECURITY OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ATP ATT AT PT Dial Type AT amp P Pulse Cycle AT BD Blind Dial AT DD Dial Wait Interval AT DP Pause Delay AT TL Tone Length AT TT Call Timeout When entering telephone numbers into modem memory or dialing directly from the modem s front panel you may need to add dial modifiers to your telephone numbers Some applications such as V 25 bis ACU and LPDA2 require dial modifiers to satisfy special dialing requirements See the Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements LPDA2 ACU and V 25 bis ACU sections in Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces for details Tone Length 72 Sill Blind Dial 2 Pulse Cycle 40 gi Y 33 V 387 _ Option Included Country Specific Option Sets Option Figure 7 9 DIALING OPT S Menu CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Ope
107. AT command It follows the structure of the front panel menu tree Each main menu is designed to address a specific modem function For example all options involved with error correction and data compression are found in the EC DC OPT S Error Correction Data Compression menu Note For an in depth discussion how to use the front panel keys and how to navigate the front panel menu tree see Section 4 5 This chapter includes descriptions of Asubmenu of the front panel menu structure that illustrates option locations This submenu appears whenever a new branch of the main menu is described See Figure 6 1 in Chapter 6 for the complete menu structure and an explanation of symbols and abbreviations A list of the menu s front panel options if any that have AT equivalent control terminal commands Descriptions of the menu s front panel options that do not have AT equivalent commands For an explanation of how to enter and use AT commands see Section 8 3 For a cross reference list of AT commands with front panel options see Chapter 11 Command Cross Referencing Data 9600 T D er 1dg modem status 4 et 0Hz 4 Enter key in this node is T D 23dbm 0 lay Oms cho ho 20 isplay Modem ID Roll 1 0 SNR 3598 EP 0 gt Power Up In Old ATDS amp 7 ALN Dial From 1 Enter Phone 1 v n n 9 TEST OPT S
108. AT AUTO CALL UNIT The modem supports an AT Auto Call Unit which provides the enhanced AT command set The standard and extended AT commands give you access to most of the features and functions available in your MODEM 32Fast For descriptions of specific AT commands see Chapter 6 AT Commands and Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 4 18 2 V 25 15 AUTO CALL UNIT Your modem supports the CCITT V 25 bis Auto Call Unit Interface for initiating calls from an attached DTE for sync and async communication For additional information about V 25 bis commands see Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 4 18 3 SYNC DIALING FROM AN IBM 400 OPTION SET 3 The modem operates as a sync originate modem with the IBM AS 400 Set the modem to Option Set 3 No reconfiguration from factory default Option Set 3 is needed The AS 400 supports switched operation with call origination via a V 25 bis compliant call establishment driver Setting the modem to Option 3 lets it be driven by APPC APPN the bit sync protocol supported by the IBM AS 400 Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces describes the frame format of bit sync protocols Refer to this chapter for more details on the V 25 bis protocol In an AS 400 to AS 400 mainframe to mainframe environment configure your AS 400 according to the following primary and secondary configuration instructions Note For clarity the instructions are presente
109. AT amp C3 DCD Remote ATL2 Volume Medium AT amp C4 DCD Wink ATL3 Volume Loud AT amp DO DTR High ATMO Speaker Off AT amp D1 DTR Escape ATM1 Speaker Dialing AT amp D2 DTR Disc ATM2 Speaker On AT amp D3 DTR Reset 4 DTR Tail ATOO Return Online AT amp D5 DTR 108 1 ATO1 TEST Retrain AT amp D6 DTR 108 2 ATP Dial Pulse AT amp F Reinit Memory ATS S Regxxx nnn AT amp GO Guard Tone Off ATT Dial Tone AT amp G1 Guard Tone 550 ATQO RsltCode Enable AT amp G2 Guard 1800 ATQ1 RsltCode Disable AT amp IO Modem ID 1 Software No ATQ2 RsltCode Orig AT amp I1 Modem ID 1 Factory Code ATVO RsltForm2Numeric AT amp l2 Modem ID 1 Country Code ATV1 RsltForm Verbose AT amp IS Modem ID 1 Product Code ATXO Call Progress 0 AT amp IA Modem ID 1 Network Control Address ATX1 Call Progress 1 AT amp I5 Modem ID 1 Device Serial Number ATX2 Call Progress 2 AT amp JO AT amp J2 Telco RJ11C Call Progress 3 AT amp J2 Telco RJ45S ATX4 Call Progress 4 AT amp J3 Telco RJ16C CHAPTER 11 Command Cross Reference Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued AT V 25 bis AT V 25 bis Command Front Panel Option Command Command Front Panel Option Command AT amp J4 Telco RJ4
110. AorO DorL Display Modem ID This display lets you determine your device s current software revision To display the software revision level 1 Step across the Status Option Sets Dialing Menu by pressing until you reach the Operating Status Display A typical Operating Status display is DTE 19 2 RELIABL 2 Press W until you Display Modem ID 3 Press The modem displays SWPart XXXXXXXX 4 The rightmost two digits indicate the software revision level Alternately you can enter AT amp 10 from the control terminal The terminal displays the 8 digit software part number software revision number is indicated by rightmost two digits CQMS Parameter Status Pressing then from Status Summary Line displays CQMS Parameter Status Pressing scrolls you through the CQMS Parameter Status displays see Table 6 4 for definitions that apply CQMS Status information is important in order to make proper operating decisions Dial modem data traffic typically travels across a mix of facilities provided by local and long distance carriers This fact has significant implications on how you can troubleshoot apparent line problems The entry point into the carrier network is the switched dial line sent from the local carrier Standard lines are typically used for voice and telephone traffic While voice grade lines can be used for data traffic it s better to contract for data
111. C1 Ext Cntrl Pin 20 AT MM10 Mod V 34 Auto AT OC2 Ext Cntrl Pin 14 AT MM11 ModzV 34 Only AT OPO Ext Select Off AT MNO Min Rate 300 AT OP1 Ext Select 1H 2L AT MN1 Min Rate 1200 AT OP2 Ext Select 1H 3L AT MN2 Min Rate 2400 AT OP3 Ext Select 1H 4L AT MN3 Min Rate 4800 AT OP4 Ext Select 2H 1L AT MN4 Min Rate 7200 AT OP5 Ext Select 2H 3L AT MN5 Min Rate 9600 AT OP6 Ext Select 2H 4L AT MN6 Min Rate 12 0 AT OP7 Ext Select 3H 1L AT MN7 Min Rate 14 4 AT OP8 Ext Select 3H 2L AT MN8 Min Rate 16 8 AT OP9 Ext Select 3H 4L AT MN9 Min Rate 19 2 AT OP10 Ext Select 4H 1L AT MN10 Min Rate 21 6 AT OP11 Ext Select 4H 2L AT MN11 Min Rate 24 0 AT OP12 Ext Select 4H 3L AT MN12 Min Rate 26 8 AT OSO Overspeed 1 AT MRO DSR Normal AT OS1 Overspeed 2 5 Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued AT V 25 bis AT V 25 bis Command Front Panel Option Command Command Front Panel Option Command AT PEO Password Disable 5 1 Mode Normal AT PE1 Mode Reliable_ AT PF Set Protection AT Mi ode Spd AutoRe ATEN Unk Proto AE SUN AT SR1 RemRTE DCDzV 13 Dial PUISE AT STO Display long form status 2 Dial Auto AT ST1 Display short form status AT PWx y Change Password AT TDO TpDlyMin Off
112. D is on when the modem is disconnected so that terminals requiring this signal can use the ACU During dialing DCD goes off until both local and remote modems train and are ready to pass data DCD is on in data mode DCD drops on a disconnect momentarily Remote 3 This setting applies to simulated half duplex applications and works only if the remote modem also supports RTS DCD signaling When the remote DTE turns RTS on DCD is forced on at the local modem The local modem can receive data only during this period Once the remote DTE drops RTS DCD at the local modem follows The Rem RTS DCD option lets you choose the type of RTS DCD signaling For the Remote setting to work properly set the remote modem s AT RS RTS command to AT amp RS2 Remote Also make certain that the Direct data transfer mode is in use and that neither the V 21 nor the Bell 103 modulation mode is in use If the direct data transfer mode is not in use or the V 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode is in use DCD behaves as if DCD Normal Wink 4 DCD is always on however it will drop after disconnect and remain low momentarily AT amp D The AT amp D DTR command determines how the modem interprets the DTR P 1 signal The local DTE uses DTR Pin 20 to signal the modem AT Command Option Setting Setting Description High 1 4L 0 The modem ignores DTR from the DTE The modem reads DTR as always high Use this setting if the DTE does not provide or if you pl
113. DE to match the software speed if greater than 38 4 Kbps OPERATING NOTES 1 Be sure all modem changes are made before you execute the software package s Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature 2 Before you select the Crosstalk 4 Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 3 The Crosstalk automatic speed detect feature operates properly when you have configured the modem for Mode Auto V32 and Speed Conver Off or Mode Direct 4 When placing an auto reliable call to a remote computer configured for no error correction the caller must send a carriage return to cancel the software package s remote command feature CHAPTER 4 Getting Started Mirror 111 Version 3 7 Speed Range for Communications Software Package 75 115 2 Kbps Default 2400 bps OPERATING NOTES Select Software s Modem Type For all Hayes compatible modems select L and then D Make These Software Changes Run Setup Script Change speed to 115 2 Kbps or lower See the Call Progress result Add the following 11 12 14 22 Do not enable speed adjustment Make These Modem Changes 1 See Flow Control Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings 2 Set modem s DTE rate AT DE to match the software speed if greater than 38 4 Kbps 1 Before you select the Mirror Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 Modem Modem Dials Answers 2 Mirror III soft
114. DTE 90 3 There is a 90 ms minimum delay before the modem sends the CTS signal to the DTE after receiving RTS from the DTE 526 4 RTS CTS delay is determined by the value of S Register 26 AT DP Pause Delay AT DP Pause Delay command forces modem to pause when modifiers are encountered in a dial string or on the command line The modifiers are as follows e ek eK AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 3 0 Pause delay is 3 seconds 6 1 Pause delay is 6 seconds 9 2 Pause delay is 9 seconds 12 3 Pause delay is 12 seconds 58 4 Pause delay is determined by S Register 8 See S Registers in Section 8 9 AT DR Auto Redial Data 9600 T D gt eee Auto Redial gt The AT DR Auto Redial command determines how many times the modem redials a failed call Redial Wait If you enable the AT LN Link Phone command the modem dials all of the linked numbers before redialing AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not redial an all unsuccessful call 1 15 1 15 The modem redials an unsuccessful call times AT DS ATDS Dial a Stored Telephone Number See the ATDS command description CHAPTER 6 Commands AT DT DTR Delay TERMINAL OPT S m The AT DT DTR Delay command determines the amount of time that the modem waits after connecting to the dial line before examining the DTR signal
115. Display continued Table 6 1 Operating Status Messages AT Message Description Option Command Data lt rate gt The modem is transmitting at lt rate gt bps Setting Setting Description Data lt rate gt The modem is in dial restoral mode and 1 Short Form The AT ST1 and AT amp V transmitting at lt rate gt bps commands select the short form Data lt rate gt The modem is holding the dial line while it status snapshot display The short tests the leased line and transmitting at form display provides a summary of lt rate gt bps AT command settings and S Register Dialing The modem is dialing a telephone values for a detailed discussion of number vus n m ps 8 9 The modem is not connected to the suffixes and settings of each non telephone linie action AT command are shown LAL lt rate gt The modem is a local analog loopback S Register values are displayed in the test at lt rate gt bps following format LAL Training The modem is executing a training S010 024 sequence for a local analog loopback This means that S Register 10 is set test to decimal value 24 Test lt rate gt The modem is running test at THE FRONT PANEL lt rate gt bps Your front panel gives some or all of the following 2 analog information Operating Status DTE DCE Rate Status Error Correction Data Compression Ada ie wey and Transmit and Receive Throughput and L
116. Flow Control Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings Set modem s DTE rate to match the communications package baud rate if greater than 38 4 Kbps Before selecting the ProComm Plus Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 4 16 General Notes These notes provide additional operating information for the communications software packages referenced in Table 4 5 3 1 When the modem is configured for factory default Option Set 1 the modem attempts to establish one of the following connections LAPM e If the LAPM connection is unsuccessful the modem then attempts to establish an MNP connection e If the previous two connections are unsuccessful the modem attempts a Normal mode connection to the remote modem Since there is a delay before the modems establish a Normal mode connection all data that is sent to the modem s attached computer terminal before the modem establishes a connection is lost 2 When the modem is configured to Option Set 1 factory default and the communications software package executes an auto dialing and answering operation the modem automatically adjusts its baud rate to the communications software baud rate and parity selection This rate remains constant during the established connection Note that the modem s Autobaud feature does not operate at speeds higher than 38 4 Kbps Refer to Section 8 6 for a description of the A
117. ION OPT S Line Modulation Auto Type Low Speed Max Rate Min Rate Fast Call Adaptive Rate Mode Clock Retrain Longspace PSTN Guard Tone Se RESTORAL 5 Restore LtoD DtoL Hold Dialine Ans Rest EC DC OPT S Mode Buffers EC DC Break Modem Flow Delay EC ID ACU OPT S ACU Select AT Form V 25 Form NoACU Form Default Dial Answer Async Echo Char Length V25 Char Sync Idle V25 Resp Parity AT Msg RsltCode RsltForm Con Msg Rel Msg LPDA2 Addr LPDA2 ID LPDA2 Det Call Progress APPENDIX Options and Displays Worksheet TERMINAL OPT S DTE Rate Flow TpDlyMin Speed Conver DTR RTS CTS Rts Cts Delay DCD RemRTS DCD DCD Loss Dis DSR Overspeed DTR Delay DTE Ct 140 DTE Ct 141 DTE Pin 25 Ext Select Ext Cntrl Inactivity TELCO OPT S Telco DL TX Level LL TX Level Line Compen Speaker Volume Netwrk Comp DIALING OPT S Pause Delay Dial Wait Dial Call Timeout Blind Dial Pulse Cycle Tone Length du SECURITY Password Enable Disable ACCESS SECURITY PW Verify Callback Rem Num Group PW Tone 11 Sim Ring Dial Rstrct NETWK CNTL OPT S Override Mode NC Address NC Port Rate Pass Thru RMT CONFIG OPT S RmtAcc Enab
118. ITT V 42 bis Access Security Tone Duration 151 e e I 140 r i pm 140 IG OQU COT ceca rr et nere rennes 10 Disp M 120 V25 e 151 Adaptive rate t rnine Or 76 used in SQE 25 Adaptive Rate System eerte titre n eee eines 11 Address cecinere 155 Answer mode Setting 79 Answering AUTOMATIC e eer Ent 140 MANUAL 146 Answering calls on dial line while connected to leased line 77 AS 400 s n dialing LONA 43 ASCII EBCDIC conversion 186 Async calls to central site configuration 22 E S 55 ATACU EN 140 Auto Galll U Tit 43 AT commands MQ 140 how modem interprets them euenire 141 how they correspond to front panel PONG MM 52 180 Wein teTolV To nTo o DRM REDE 10 TON COMMIS ALIGN qa bier pe Lent 145 AT commands cete tert t rn ter e 51 Auto Redial oct three tm ees 84 Auto call unit 25 m i destin 43 didi e 44 por BIS e 4
119. Note When operating with peer to peer or alternate destination restoral the Hold Dialine option should be set the same in both modems involved with restoral In peer to peer restoral two leased line modems are involved in restoral In alternate destination restoral the remote leased line modem and a local dial modem are involved in restoral Figures 6 2 and 6 3 illustrate examples of peer to peer and alternate destination restoral respectively MODEM 32Fast MODEM 32Fast Device A Device B Figure 6 2 Peer to Peer Restoral MODEM 32Fast MODEM 32Fast Device A Device B MODEM 32Fast Device C Figure 6 2 Alternate destination Restoral AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off all 0 The Hold Dialine option is disabled A dial modem configured for restoral disconnects from the dial line normally A leased line modem configured for restoral disconnects from the dial line as soon as it connects to the leased line 1 1 A dial modem configured for restoral holds the line for 1 minute A leased line modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 1 minute while testing the leased line 2 2 A dial modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 2 minutes A leased line modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 2 minutes while testing the leased line 3 min 3 A dial modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 3
120. Off and you initiate an LAL test other modems that call your modem receive ringback without an answer If you set LAL Busy Out to On and you initiate an LAL test your modem appears to be busy to other calling modems Note LAL Busy Out option should not be confused with the Busy Out Setting of the TEST option in the TEST OPT S menu The modem does not let you enable the Busy Out option and then perform an LAL test Rx Local Modem Remote Modem Figure 9 1 Local Analog Loopback Test If your terminal supports Circuit 141 you can use Circuit 141 signaling to initiate this test To do this enable the DTE Ct 141 AT LA in your modem s TERMINAL OPT S menu The DTE can then initiate an LAL test by turning Circuit 141 from off to on To start a local analog loopback test from the front panel 1 Use the front panel key to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 2 Press until the modem displays TEST LAL 3 Press The modem displays TEST LAL 4 Press W twice to reach the home display The modem briefly displays LAL Training T D and then displays LAL data rate T D For example you may see LAL 9600 T D Note If the analog circuitry is faulty the modem displays Bad LAL T D 5 At the local terminal you re now ready to send data Note If the data loops back to the local terminal without errors the modem passes
121. PT S menu Confirm this set ng with the person at the remote site If you plan to use restoral make sure that the answer modem is set for auto answering Note Unless Ans Rest Always AT AS under the RESTORAL OPT S menu the modem does not answer an incoming call if it s in data mode This stops the modem from answering a wrong number 3 To use automatic restoral set L to D option AT DI under the orginating modem s RESTORAL OPT S menu 4 Set the DTR AT amp D under the TERMINAL OPT S menu to satisfy your application The DTR signal controls the dial line in restoral operation The DTR signal from the DTE must be on or set properly in the modem for dialing and answering to take place The various settings for the modem s DTR option are described in Chapter 6 in the AT amp D section Also see the Interpreting the DTR Option Setting section following these procedures It summarizes the relationship of DTR signal behavior to Restore and DTR option settings Make sure that the Line option AT amp L under the MODULATION OPT S menu is set in both the local and remote modems for connection to either a two or four wire leased line To dial during restoral set the Default Dial option AT DA under the ACU OPT S menu to dial from the address in which you plan to store the remote modem s telephone number Enter a phone number in the address selected by the Default Dial option
122. R Control Some TELCO OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described AT CD DCD Loss D t 9 in Chapter 6 remaining TELCO OPT S AT DL RTS CTS Delay options which you can select from the front panel are described immediately following this list AT FL Flow Control 2 OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS AT LA DTE Circuit 141 Circuit 141 Local Analog Loopback ATM Speaker AT LD DTE Circuit 140 Circuit 140 Remote ATL Volume Digital Loopback AT amp Telco ST LE cm AT amp LC Line Compensation AT OP Select Sets External Option Set AT NC Network Compensation Select AT OC External Control AT OS Overspeed AT RS RTS Control AT SC Speed Conversion AT SI DTE Inactivity AT SR Remote RST DCD AT TD Throughput Minimization Delay TERMINAL OPT S 4 TELCO 5 Telco RJ11C LLTX Level 0 Speaker Dialing D Volume Medium D 5455 On Loud in Y Security Soft RJ4MB gt 2 15 Netwrk Comp Off D oiv 4 DIALING OPT S _ Option Included _ Country Specific in Option Sets Option Figure 7 8 TELCO OPT S Menu gg 7 9 1 DiAr LINE TRANSMIT LEVEL DL TX option displays the modem s dial line transmit level Option Setting Description Oto 15 Modem to set to transmit at a level in the 0 to 15 dBm range 7 9 2 LEASED LINE TR
123. R option in the modem is set to 108 2 Esc Discon Reset or High the DTR signal is on and either the front panel Talk Data key at the Home position is pressed or control of the dial is switched to the modem with an exclusion key telephone ACU Select AT AT Form DTR Dial and the DTR signal transitions from off to on AT DB Buffer Delay EC DC OPT S eee The AT DB Delay command lets you configure the modem for a disconnect delay to provide time for clearing buffers S Register 38 determines how long the modem processes buffered data when a disconnect is initiated The range for S Register 38 is between 0 and 255 The disconnect buffer delay feature applies when data is transmitted from DTE to DCE or from DCE to DTE When this feature is enabled depending on which disconnect type you have selected the modem delays to clear its TX or RX buffer The TX buffer delay applies to the following dis connect types DTR ATH LPDA2 The following commands apply to the termination of connections restored on the dial line DTR ATH and 116 The RX buffer delay applies to the following disconnect types error correction link disconnects PSTN cleardowns and Longspace When a delay is in progress talk data as well as disconnect in the opposite direction causes an immediate disconnect CHAPTER 6 Commands Note When modem is configured for Mode Direct there is no buffering of data This option doe
124. S PROVIDING THE CALLBACK NUMBER You must specify the callback number along with the password In the answer mode 1 Verify the PW Verify Intern AT ZV1 ACCESS SECURITY category 2 Set the Callback option AT ZC ACCESS SECURITY category to either Remote AT ACIO or RMT Ind AT ZC See the AT ZC description in Chapter 6 3 Enter the access group security password using the Enter Group PW option AT ZI ACCESS SECURITY category Refer to the AT ZI description in Chapter 6 for details on how to enter an access group security password 4 Set the modem to answer incoming calls The modem will answer the call based on how the Answer option AT AA is set ACU OPT S category After setting the answer modem as indicated in steps 1 4 above next you ll dial the answer modem and provide the access security password When dialing the answer modem you enter a dial string telling the modem how to complete a call A typical callback dial string appears as follows 5552345 1111 5556789 0 H 555 2345 is the answer modem s telephone number The dial modifier ensures that the answer modem has picked up before the password is transmitted The password 1111 is transmitted followed by the code This alerts the answer modem that the password is complete but the dial string is not yet finished 555 6789 is the number that the answer modem calls once the password is verified The 0 code tells the answer modem that the entry is
125. Settings Call Establishment Method DTR Option Setting Addressed Direct Manual DTR 108 2 or DTR High DTR 108 1 Tail DTR 108 2 or DTR High Throughout the following sections all sample commands are shown in uppercase letters Call Requested Number This command instructs the modem to dial the number that follows it Use this command to dial directly from the keyboard of the DTE A typical CRNn command might look like this CRN1 555 123 The telephone number can contain hyphens or spaces the modem ignores them You may enter the dial modifiers described in the previous section to accommodate special dialing requirements If the number entered exceeds 50 digits the modem responds with INV However you may enter commands in either uppercase or lowercase letters V 25 BIS COMMANDS The V 25 bis command set lets you dial calls answer incoming calls and perform other important ACU Call Request with Address This command instructs the modem to dial a number from a specific address in modem memory To dial the number stored in address 5 enter CRS5 You can dial a phone number from any of the modem s memory addresses 1 9 with the CRS command functions from your DTE Table 8 6 describes each command Disregard Incoming Call This command instructs the modem to disregard an incoming call If you ve set the modem for auto answer through the Answer option in the ACU OPT S menu the DIC command
126. TELEPHONE LINE AC p POWER OUTLET CORD Figure 3 2 Modem Cabling 3 5 2 CONNECTING THE MODEM A DIAL LINE 3 5 2 ATTACHING A FERRITE CABLE FOR DIAL LINE The modem can operate over 2 wire dial lines via CONNECTION telephone cables included with your modem Use Two ferrite cables are included in the accessory kit the following procedures to connect your modem for the MODEM 32Fast The cables that contain to a dial line ferrites are for connecting the modem to a dial line for either 6 or 8 conductor connec tions You must attach the cable end that con tains the ferrite to your modem see Figure 3 3 1 At the rear panel of your modem connect the end of the cable with the ferrite to the DIAL LINE jack see Figure 3 2 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a dial line wall jack 3 You may also connect a telephone to the PHONE jack on the modem s rear panel FERRITE DIAL LINE CABLE TO WALL Figure 3 3 Attaching Ferrite Cable to Your Modem 3 5 4 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO A LEASED LINE The Modem can operate over 2 or 4 wire leased lines Follow these steps to connect your modem to a leased line 1 At the rear panel of the modem connect one end of the modular cable to the LEASE LINE or private line jack See Figure 3 2 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a leased line wall jack 3 5 5 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO A PBX When you install your modem in a PBX environment the interface to the PBX should
127. TR CTS signals to operate flow control The terminal uses DTR and the modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full An on to off transition signals the transmitting device to stop sending data an off to on transition signals that data can flow This setting overrides the CTS option setting when the modem is in Normal or Reliable mode If you plan to use DTR CTS flow control set the AT D DTR under the TERMINAL OPT S menu command to high In applications operating in 32FAST sync data compression mode DTR CTS flow control functions the same as async applications with the following exception Flow control is unidirectional from the local modem to the DTE through the CTS signal The modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full The DTR signal has no impact on flow control in sync applications CHAPTER 6 Commands RTS CTS 3 In async applications the local modem and DTE use RTS CTS signals to operate flow control The terminal uses RTS to signal when its buffers are full while the modem uses CTS to signal An on to off transition signals the transmitting device to stop sending data an off to on transition signals that data can flow This setting over rides the AT amp R or AT CT CTS com mand when the modem is in data mode In applications operating in sync data compression mode RTS CTS flow control functions the same as async application with the following exception Flow control is unidirectional fro
128. Trasnmit Level simulated half duplex CCITT V 13 or proprietary signaling on a 2 wire dial leased and 4 wire leased line Sync compressed mode Full duplex HDLC SDLC on 2 wire dial leased or 4 wire leased lines Modes 34 V 32 bis QAM at 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 QAM with trellis encoding at 9600 bps without trellis encoding at 9600 bps PSK at 4800 bps V 22 bis QAM at 2400 bps PSK at 1200 bps V 22 PSK at 1200 bps Bell 212 PSK at 1200 bps V 21 PSK at 300 bps Bell 103 FSK at 300 bps Data Format Asynchronous 8 9 10 or 11 bits serial binary Synchronous Serial binary Protocol Sync and async Speed Compressed mode transmission 128 0 115 2 96 0 76 8 72 0 64 0 57 6 56 0 48 0 38 4 24 0 21 6 19 2 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 4 8 and 2 4 Kbps 1200 and 300 bps also supported in asynchronous only 2 5 Non compressed mode 28 0 24 0 21 5 19 2 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 4 8 2 4 1 2 Kbps 0 01 Sync 42 5 Async 300 bps also supported in asynchronous only 32 596 FCC programmable 0 dBm maximum 12 dBm minimum dB FCC permissible 9 dBm maximum 0 1 dB 2 wire leased line 0 dBm maximum 15 dBm minimum dB 4 wire leased line 0 dBm maximum 15 dBm minimum dB Diagnostics LAL LALTP RDLPT DMPT LDL BO RETRN DTE CBL DIA Autodialing Data Format AT async 7 bit ASCII with 1 parity bit 1 star
129. a modem s password protection Lets you enter old password Lets you configure new password Lets you verify new password Lets you verify group password Lets you set network control address Lets you set remote modem s leased line address Lets you enter remote modem s serial number CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation The keystrokes required to set the numeric entry for the options listed above are as follows 1 Step across the desired front panel menu by pressing b until the option you want to change is displayed 2 Press You are now ready to key in the numeric entry 3 Press Wy until the desired digit or character appears in the left most position of the display Example 1 4 Press b The display shifts one position to the left and the second character position is displayed 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have completed keying in the numeric entry If you make a mistake and you wish to reenter a number or character ress This will place the cursor at the beginning of the line You may now P 7 ginning y re enter the number or character 6 After you have input the correct numbers or characters press to save your selection 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 8 Introduction Your MODEM 32Fast supports these auto call units ACUs 1 AT ACU for async applications 2 V 25 bis ACU for sync applications 3 LPDA2 ACU for sync applica
130. actions is to clear the modem s memory This procedure is described ATSPW Entering and Changing a Password in Chapter 6 Once you reinitialize modem memory all settings are lost and you must reconfigure all of the modem s option settings and reenter all stored phone numbers Set Protection Change Password Figure 7 10 FP SECURITY Menu When you receive your modem password is set to four zeros 0000 and the password protection feature is disabled UNLOCKING YOUR MODEM If you know your password see Chapter 6 for details on the AT PN command If you forget your password and need to unlock the modem you can regain access to all modem functions by following the procedure in this section Caution When you unlock the modem using this procedure all option settings and stored telephone numbers are deleted from the modem s memory Before using the modem you ll need to reconfigure all option settings in the modem and reenter all stored phone numbers 1 Close Switch 4 on the modem s rear panel set it to the down position See Table 7 3 for details 2 In the Status Option Sets Dialing menu press b until the modem displays Reinit Memory When you press the modem responds with Reinit 11 Mem 3 Press again The modem displays 326x initial 4 You have now reset the modem to its factory default option settings and deleted all entries from the electronic tel
131. age return The R modifier causes your modem to originate the call in answer mode and is used to dial an originate only modem Immediately after the dial command is processed an answer back tone is generated and the modem attempts to complete the connection for the length of time specified by the Call Timeout option Disconnect Must be the last modifier in the dial string Must be preceded by a semicolon If the H or h modifier is not preceded by a semicolon the modem ignores it You can enter the H or h modifier through the front panel AT ACU V 25 bis ACU LPDA2 or network manager space Presentation period characters dash parentheses Do not act as modifiers They are presentation characters used to make telephone numbers easier to read the modem ignores them DTMF Tone Serve as special tones for telephone systems that use DTMF tone dialing Used for V 25 bis and LPDA2 ACU CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces Table 8 3 Result Codes continued 8 5Result Codes The responses sent by the AT ACU are known as result codes The result codes may be sent in word for RsltForm Verbose or ATV 1 numeric form RsltForm Numeric or ATVO or disabled completely RsltCode Disable ATQ1 When you select numeric form responses your modem issues a number code only The speed is displayed in a CONNECT message is the DTE to modem speed If the Speed Conversion option is set to Off AT SCO or
132. al Modem Figure 9 3 Remote Digital Loopback Test If your terminal supports Circuit 140 you can use Circuit 140 signaling to initiate this test To do this simply enable the DTE Ct 140 option in the TERMINAL OPT S menu The DTE can then initiate an RDL test by turning Circuit 140 from off to on Before starting an RDL test make sure your modem has established a connection with the remote modem Otherwise your modem will display Test Denied when you attempt the test To run an RDL test 1 Establish a connection with the remote modem 2 Use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 3 Press wp until the modem displays TEST RDL 4 Press The modem displays TEST RDL 5 Press twice to reach the home display The modem displays TEST data rate T D For example you may see TEST 9600 T D in the status display Note If the data loops back to the remote terminal without errors the modem passes the test If the data does not loop back to the remote terminal run the test again If it fails again check to make certain that the DTE and modem speeds match 6 To end the test use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 7 Press Q The modem displays Test Completed Note modem begins the test and it s operating in the MNP or LAPM Reliable mode it attempts to restore the Reliable
133. al modem disconnects if it cannot establish an error corrected link Enable the terminal flow control when operating in reliable mode If the modem negotiates a connection in the V 31 or Bell 103 modulation mode it terminates the call If operating with SDC enabled in both the local and remote modems the local modem will connect with the remote modem and attempt to establish an error corrected link In SDC mode the setting of Data Compression AT DC and Error Correction AT EC options are ignored A connection is attempted using V 42 bis data compression and LAPM error correction The local modem established a sync corrected link During Reliable data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled Enable the terminal flow control when operating in reliable mode If the modem negotiates a connection in the V 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode it terminates the call Auto Rel 3 Auto Reliable Once the local modem connects with the remote 1 2 3 4L modem it attempts to establish an error corrected link During Auto Reliable data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds The modem reverts to Normal mode if it cannot establish an error corrected link In SCD mode with the Auto Rel selection the modem reverts to Direct mode if it cannot establish an error corrected link Enable terminal flow control when operating in the Auto Reliable mode If the local
134. alents which are described in Chapter 6 For proper modem operation read the following sections They explain how the restoral options operate in conjunction with each other OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS AT AS Answer in Restoral AT DI Leased to Dial AT HD Hold Dial Line AT LE Dial to Leased Automatic Disconnect AT RE Restoral leased line failure is one of the most disruptive occurrences in a data communications network When installed as a leased line modem the MODEM 32Fast can use its dial line capability to restore service when leased line problems occur If the leased line fails or if signal quality deteriorates the modem can redirect data traffic through the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN over a single dial line 7 5 1 When you install your modem for restoral operation use the following indications to determine whether it s operating over a dial or leased line RESTORAL INDICATIONS RI OH LED If the modem is connected to the dial line off hook the RI OH LED on the modem front panel is on Status Message If the modem is passing data on the dial line the data rate on the status message line of the Status Menu in the front panel display is followed by R For example if the modem is operating on the dial line at 9600 bps the status message line reads Data 9600 R T D Circuit 117 Pin 16 During restoral the modem turns Circuit 117 Pin 16 on the DTE interface fr
135. alling an electronic service that permits the user to transmit numbers using tones once a connection has been established For LPDA2 protocol the semicolon is applicable only when it s immediately followed by the h modifier This modifier causes the modem to disconnect from the dial line This must be the last modifier in the dial string and must also be preceded by a semicolon If the H or h modifier is not preceded by a semicolon it s ignored by the modem The H or h modifier can be entered through the front panel AT ACU V 25 bis ACU LPDA2 or network manager These modifiers are special tones used for some DTMS telephone systems Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved lt Reserved 8 16 9 DIAL COMMAND SENSE BYTES If the dial command is successful and the modems connect a response with a sense byte of 0x00 command successful is displayed to the DTE The sense byte message is displayed when the modems are ready to pass data This response follows the DCD AT amp C option selection which specifies if Connect messages are sent to the DTE before DCD is raised or after DCD is raised If the dial command is unsuccessful a response is sent to the DTE with the sense byte specifying the reason The sense byte can contain the following error codes Sense Byte Error Codes Definition OxOC The modem is busy and cannot execute a valid dial command Usually use
136. als but not both simultaneously HDLC High evel data link control CCITT specified bit oriented data link control protocol Any related data link control specified by a series of bits rather than by control characters Hexadecimal Base 16 number system with digits ranging from 0 to Interface A shared connection or boundary between two devices or systems The point logical or physical at which two devices or systems are linked LAPM Link Access Protocol for Modems A CCIT THike layer protocol for modems Leased Line A dedicated telephone line circuit that permanently connects two or more locations Used solely by one customer who leases the line LED Light Emitting Diode Loopback 1 Any of several ways to feed received signal back from some point in the data link to the receiver at the site where the data originated Commonly used to test various data link portions to isolate faulty equipment or data lines 2 Feeding back data from some point in a data path to the transmitting source for testing 3 A diagnostic procedure that sends a test message back to the originator and compares the message with the original transmission Loopback testing can occur within a locally attached device or can be conducted remotely over a communications circuit LPDA2 This feature lets you use the modem in an IBM dial and leased line restoral applications that use LPDA2 Dial and Disconne
137. amp T command You cannot use S Register 18 to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel When the test terminates the screen displays OK This test will run indefinitely if not preprogrammed to terminate itself through S Register 18 Busy Out The TEST option Busy Out setting lets your modem appear busy to incoming calls This option is useful when you perform maintenance and repairs on the modem Note You should only use this setting for the Telco RJ4MB setting under the TELCO OPT S menu that s used with a make busy data jack Do not use the Busy Out setting without the RJ4MB service installed Important Before you enable the Busy Out feature set the following AT LT DTE Pin 25 option to Busy AT LTO amp TELCO OPT S Telco option command to RJAMB The 6 position DIP switch 2 on the modem s rear panel to the Off up position To busy out your modem 1 Use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu untl the modem displays TEST End Test 2 Press W until the modem displays TEST Busy Out 3 Press The modem displays TEST Busy Out 4 Press twice to get to the home display Busyout T D is shown in the status display The modem appears busy to all incoming calls 5 Terminate the Busy Out condi on by using the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Tes
138. an to use DTR CTS flow control with the error correction feature Escape 1 When ACU Select AT and AT Form Async AT amp M the modem enters the AT escape modem when an on to off DTR transition is detected while the modem is in data or test mode Discon 2 The modem hangs up and enters command mode when an on to off DTR transition is detected while the modem is in data test or escape mode If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer Reset 3 This setting is similar to Discon except that an on to off DTR transition also causes the modem to reinitialize its memory the equivalent of executing the ATZ command If DTR is low the modem auto answers The option set to which the modem resets is determined by AT amp Y Power Up In option If the AT amp Y Power Up In command is set for 1 2 3 or 4 the designated option set is loaded If Old is selected the current option set is reloaded BA _ CHAPTER 6 AT Commands AT amp D continued AT Command Tail 4 2 108 1 5 108 2 6 Description If DTR is dropped during a test such as RDL LAL LDL RDL Pattern etc the modem disconnects from the line and resets memory to the selected option set Note A reset can change the value of the AT amp D DTR command setting from Reset to another setting This setting is similar to 108 1 except that the modem auto answers an incoming call even if DTR is off Use the Tail option if you plan to use the modem
139. and followed by the telephone number and a carriage return For example ATD5551234 lt CR gt The Front Panel See Section 7 13 10 for details on how to use numeric entry CHAPTER 6 Commands ATDS 05 DIALING STORED TELEPHONE NUMBER The ATDS and AT DS Dial From commands dial a number stored in one of the modem s nine telephone book addresses DATA 9600 T D gt eee Note Enter a telephone number into your modem s telephone book before you attempt to use this option See AT amp Z AT CN Enter Phone Numbers for more information on entering phone numbers Option Setting AT Command Seiting 1 9 1 9 Option Setting AT Command Setting The ATDS or AT DS Command To dial a stored telephone number using AT commands enter ATDS or AT DS followed by the telephone book address number and a carriage return lt CR gt If you enter the ATDS or AT DS command without a number following it the modem dials the number stored in address 1 Note The ATDS and AT DS commands can also be entered in the format ATDS n or AT DS n The Front Panel To use the front panel to dial a telephone number stored in the modem s telephone book 1 Step across the Status Option Sets Dialing menu by pressing gt until you see Dial from n 2 Press the wp to select the telephone book address for the number you want to dial and press The modem dials telephone number stored in th
140. and set Table 8 1 gives examples of several common types of AT command strings and how they re interpreted by the AT ACU 8 4 Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements telephone numbers Some applications like the V 25 bis ACU require dial modifiers to satisfy When you enter telephone numbers into modem special dialing requirements Table 8 2 lists the dial memory or dial directly from the modem s front modifiers the modem uses when it operates in the panel you may need to add dial modifiers to your V 25 bis ACU and AT ACU applications Dial Modifiers Function Dial Wait Table 8 2 Dial Modifiers Description Instructs the modem to stop and wait for a dial tone If the modem doesn t detect a dial tone after a specified period it aborts the call Country specific in the U S default is two seconds Pause Delay When the modem encounters any of these modifiers in a dial string or on the command line it pauses The default is three seconds It can be extended with the Pause Delay command You can use the command modifier as a command outside of the dial string Pulse tone setting is modified to force pulse dial If no pulse dial modifier is inserted in the number stream the modem dials according to the pulse tone setting or the Dial option in the front panel DIALING OPT S menu These modifiers can also be used as a command outside of the dial string Pulse tone setting is modified to force tone
141. anges to the remote modem s configuration are saved This setting is not displayed unless you are already in a remote configuration session The modem aborts a remote configuration session with the connected modem Changes made to the remote modem s configuration are not saved This setting is not displayed unless you are already ina remote configuration session Terminate 0 Abort 1 Initiating Remote Configuration Session with a Dial Modem THE AT RC COMMAND To use the AT RC command to initiate a remote configuration session with a dial modem 1 Establish a dial line connection with the remote modem at 7200 bps or greater 2 Enter AT RC2 lt CR gt 3 Your terminal displays INITIATING RC When the remote configuration session 15 established your terminal displays RC ESTABLISHED If unsuccessful the terminal displays RC FAILED or RC DENIED THE FRONT PANEL To initiate a remote configuration session with a dial modem use your front panel to 1 Establish a dial line connection with the remote modem at 7200 bps or greater 2 Press move to home position on front panel menu tree 3 Press wr until the RMT CONFIG OPT S menu appears 4 Press gt to display Init Rmt Cnfg 5 Press The modem displays Initiating RC If successful the modem displays RC Established If unsuccessful the modem displays RC Failed or RC Denied Failure to establ
142. answer back tone V 25 rate The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message followed by the DTE to modem data rate once the modems switch to data mode 8 10 6 RESULT CODE RESPONSES When using V 25 bis the modem indicates a valid connection when it switches to data mode by turning DSR EIA TIA 232 D Pin 6 V 24 Circuit 107 and DCD EIA TIA 232 D Pin 8 V 24 Circuit 109 from off to on In addition to this hardware response you may want to receive call progress responses at the DTE The modem uses VAL valid and CNX connect message to indicate a successful connection You enable the result code responses through the V25 Resp option in the ACU OPT S menu in the front panel display The following settings for the V25 Resp option apply None The modem does not send any CONNECT messages to the DTE VAL only The modem sends a VAL message when the modems switch to data mode V 25 bis modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message once the remote modem receives an answer back tone V 25 rate The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message followed by the DTE to modem data rate once the modems switch to data mode 8 10 7 RELIABLE CONNECTION RESPONSE If you re using MNP or LAPM you may want a response sent to your DTE which indicates when a reliable link was negotiated with the remote modem To receive the
143. ating a reliable connection lt rate gt in Table 6 1 refers to range of DCE data rates that the modem supports The following data rates may be displayed 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 96000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 300 The modem is transmitting at a specified data rate using trellis code modulation modem is transmitting at 9600 bps without using a trellis coded modulation Ihe modem is transmitting at 300 bps using a frequency shift keyed FSK modulation mode DTE Rate Status Summary Pressing the Operating Status display brings you to the DTE Rate Status line The DTE rate represents the speed at which the local modem and DTE are communicating The following definitions apply DTE Rate Display DTE to Modem Rate bps Ext 115 2 96 0 76 8 72 0 64 0 57 6 56 0 48 0 38 4 24 0 21 6 19 2 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 4 8 2 4 1 2 3 When Clock External Ext displays indicating the modem is accepting clock from the DTE Note Ext displays when the modem is configured for sync operation direct sync mode or SDC mode 115 200 96 000 76 800 72 000 64 000 57 600 56 000 48 000 38 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9 600 7 200 4 800 2 400 1 200 300 The DTE Status IDs are explained below Error Correction Status RELIABL SYNREL DIRECT NORMAL COMMAND FAILREL ATTEMPT Description The mode
144. ation mode is a Motorola Codex proprietary modulation scheme that lets data transmit at 9600 to 24 000 bps The mode also supports DTE rates of 21 600 24 000 57 600 64 000 72 000 76 800 96 000 and 115 200 bps Control Characters In data communications any additional transmitted characters that control or facilitate data transmission between data terminals CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check A type of BCC error checking mechanism for link level data transmissions Crossover Cable Special DTE DCE interface cable that reassigns signals from specific pins This allows normal data transfer between two DTEs or two DCEs at the same site CTS Clear To Send The signal passed from the local modem to the local terminal when the data port is ready to transmit data Usually occurs in response to Request to Send RTS Data Compression Sync See Synchronous Data Compression dB Decibel A unit used to express relative difference in power between acoustic or electric signals equal to ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the two power levels An increase of 3 dB is equal to doubling the power while a decrease of 3 dB is equal to cutting the power by half dBm A measure of power in communications the decibel referenced to one milliwatt into a 600 ohm load 0 dBm 1 milliwatt DCD Data Carrier Detect Also known as the Received Line Signal Detector RLSD This signal is passed from the local DTE
145. ations using LPDA2 Dial and Disconnect commands The LPDA2 option allows NetView and other IBM applications like POS outbound dialing applications to control dialing In dial applications the LPDA2 feature eliminates the need for additional ports and equipment that supported external 801 auto dialing equipment in IBM environments In leased line operation while connected on the dial line the modem if configured for LPDA2 monitors for LPDA2 commands in the data stream If the local modem detects an LPDA2 command it aborts the frame that s being processed This prevents the remote DTE from processing the command frame as valid data 2 11 Remote Configuration Using the front panel a network management system or AT ACU of the local modem you can configure a remote modem With remote configuration you can also read the remote modem s status snapshots and receive a summary of its configuration on either your front panel or your async terminal The modem gives you error correction and data compression in accordance with the V 42 and V 42 bis CCITT recommendation With V 42 the modems automatically negotiate to determine whether to use Microcom Networking Protocol MNP Level 4 or Link Access Procedure for Modems for error correction Depending on the error correction scheme negotiated the modem uses MNP Level 5 or a modified version of V 42 bis data compression 2 12 Secrity The MODEM 32 Fast provides acce
146. ber on a forbidden list if a call to that number fails The modem cannot dial a number that is on the forbidden list until the power to the modem is turned off and then on again A typical list of forbidden numbers might look like this LSF 8005551212 In this case a call or calls to the number described failed Consequently the modem placed the number on the forbidden list If the modem currently has no numbers on the forbidden list it responds with LSF If the RLF command is issued when password protection is enabled and the modem is locked the modem responds with invalid message INV Also if your PTT does not require forbidden numbers and you issue the RLF command the modem responds with the invalid message INV Request List of Delayed numbers This command instructs the modem to send the DTE a list of delayed numbers The PTT may require the modem to place a number on a delayed call list if a call to that number fails The modem cannot dial a number that is on the delayed call list until the prescribed time the xxx designation expires or until power to the modem is turned off and then on again A typical list of delayed numbers might look like this RLD LSD 8005551212 45 In this case a call or calls to the number described failed Consequently the modem placed the number on the delayed list The modem cannot call this number for 45 minutes or until the modem power is turned off and then on again If the mod
147. blind dials After processing all of the characters in the dial string including dial modifiers the modem starts the AT TT Call Timeout command timer and looks for a busy signal ringback and data carrier If the modem detects a busy signal before the time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command expires it hangs up and displays BUSY The length of time between finishing dialing and displaying the BUSY message is the amount of time the modem takes to detect the busy signal If data carrier is not detected before the time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command expires the modem hangs up and displays NO CARRIER The length of time between finishing dialing and displaying the NO CARRIER message is the amount of time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command If data carrier is detected the modem displays a speed specific connect message If error correction is enabled and 1 and AT XC2 Rel Msg Short or Long commands are selected the modem also displays the suffix RELIABLE Or RELIABLE xxx DC yyy Call Progress 4 The modem goes off hook and looks for dial tone If it detects a dial tone it dials If not it hangs up and displays NO DIALTONE After processing all of the characters in the dial string including dial modifiers the modem looks for a busy signal ringback and data carrier If the modem detects a busy signal before the time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout com
148. bps 2 Change baud to Requirements in 9600 bps or lower Section 4 17 for 3 Set output parameter to No the correct modem flow control settings 2 Save memory location 1 OPERATING NOTEs 1 Before selecting BitCom Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 2 Save all modem configuration changes you have made for various application requirements in Option Set 1 Otherwise all configuration changes you have made will be lost when you select the Bit Com disconnect feature SmartCom Ill Version 1 2A Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 110 115200 Kbps Hayes modems Change transmission speed 1 Set Max Rate 19 2Kbps Yes Yes Default 9600 bps to match the Max Rate or lower AT MX setting of the modem Disable Adaptive Rate AT APO See Flow control Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings Save Option Set 1 AT amp W OPERATING NOTES 1 Before selecting SmartCom III Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 2 Be sure to save MODEM 32Fast configuration changes in modem memory location 1 before performing an auto dialing or answering session with the software 3 SmartCom III does not support a MODEM 32Fast baud rate of 12 Kbps If your modem is operating at that rate you must disconnect it set the modem s Max Rate 96
149. call has been attempted n times The AT RD command always causes your modem to redial the last number dialed So if an initial call fails and the telephone number is linked to another number your modem redials the linked telephone number 8 9 S Registers S Registers contain values that determine and reflect how the modem operates and executes commands You can read and change S Register values using the commands described in this section These values include timing options counters ASCII characters and command options See Chapter 12 ASCII EBCDIC Hexadecimal Equivalents for details The first part of this section describes the AT commands used to change and display S Register values The second part of this section provides a detailed description of each S Register used by the modem Descriptions include If the value is stored in nonvolatile memory If the value is status only e The default setting of the value e The valid range for the value Any S Register that s not stored in nonvolatile memory is reset to its default value when you Power up your modem Load a new Option Set Reinitialize memory CHANGE S REGISTER VALUE ATSN X Settings n Specifies S Register x Specifies value of S Register Format ATSn x CR Settings n Specifies S Register This command lets you change the value of an S Register that s stored in volatile memory The n is the S Register you re changing and x is th
150. ce you have finished entering all three digits of the remote modem s address press The modem display Initiating RC CHAPTER 6 Commands If successful the modem displays RC Established If unsuccessful the modem displays RC Failed or RC Denied Failure to establish a remote configuration session can be caused by the following e The remote modem s Rmt Acc option is set to Disabled AT RAO e The remote modem is running a test Terminating a Remote Configuration Session When you terminate a remote configuration session changes made to the remote modem s configuration are automatically saved THE AT RC COMMAND To use the AT RC command to terminate a session Enter AT RCO CR 2 Your terminal displays RC COMPLETE OK 3 You now in escape mode To return online enter lt gt The remote configuration session is terminated and the remote modem saves changes made to it during the session THE FRONT PANEL To use your front panel to terminate a session 1 Display Rm Cnfg Established 2 Press until the modem displays Rmt Cnfg Terminate 3 Press The modem displays RC Complete Aborting a Remote Configuration Session When you abort a remote configuration session changes made to the remote modem s configuration are not saved THE AT RC COMMAND To use the AT RC command to abort a session 1 Enter AT RC1 lt CR gt 2 Your terminal display
151. cept RDL commands control whether the local modem can be placed in a remote digital loopback test by a remote modem AT Option Command Setting Setting Description On 4 The local modem can be put into a all remote digital loopback test Off 5 The modem cannot be put into a remote digital loopback test AT amp V AT ST Modem Status Display TEST OPT S b Accept RDL gt amp AT ST Modem Status commands let you view via your control terminal modem status information in either long or short form using the AT ST and AT amp V commands AT Option Command Setting Setting Description DTE DCE 19 2 0 Long Form The AT STO and AT amp V EC commands select the long form status DC snapshot display This display Tx kb 0 consists of several screens and Rx kb 0 provides a summary of Operating DCD RTS CTS Status DTE DCE Rate Status Error DSR DTR correction Data Compression Status AOP DLP ALP EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V 24 Signal DR 0 TI 0 O D Status Disconnect Reasons display Display Modem Id the modem s software revision CQMS Display Modem ID and CQMS Parameter Status Also the long form snapshot summarizes the settings of all front panel options and their corresponding AT commands only the suffix of the AT command is given the AT is omitted non configuration action AT commands and the setting of each S Register CHAPTER 6 Commands AT amp V AT ST Modem Status
152. chronous Data Com pression Testing earlier in this section for testing considerations This test is not valid in the Bell 103 or V 21 modulation modes If you attempt to run this test in either of these modes the modem responds with Note Test Denied As shown in Figure 9 5 each modem transmits a pattern to the other modem You can start the Data Mode Pattern test at the local and remote modems simultaneously Pattern Checker Local Modem Remote Modem Pattern Checker Figure 9 5 Data Mode Pattern Test Before starting a Data Modem Pattern test make sure your modem has established a connection with the remote modem Otherwise it ll display Test Denied when you start the test To run a Data Mode Pattern test 1 Use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 2 Press wp until the modem displays TEST Pattern 3 Press Q The modem displays TEST Pattern 4 Press W twice to reach the home display The modem displays TEST data rate T D For example the modem may display TEST 9600 T D 5 end test use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 6 Press The modem displays Bit Blk where the number of bit errors and block errors is displayed If the test was initiated on only one of the modems or the modem s transmitter and receiver were unable to synchronize th
153. commands From a DTE or network management system The following sections explain how to initiate tests using the modem s front panel and AT ACU Important You cannot run the tests described in this section simultaneously Because each test interrupts data flow in your network notify equipment users at both the local and remote sites before you start The MODEM 32Fast runs the following types of tests Loopback Busy Out e Retrain Loopback tests let your modem send data through a part of the communications system and then loop return it back If there are errors in the returning data there may be a problem in the part of the system you re testing You can start a remote digital loopback RDL or a local analog loopback LAL test from your terminal if it supports Circuits 140 and 141 respectively For instructions refer to your terminal user manual The procedure for performing each of the following loopback tests is described in this section Local Analog Loopback LAL Local Analog Loopback Pattern LAL Pat Remote Digital Loopback RDL Remote Digital Loopback Pattern RDL Pat Data Mode Pattern Local Digital Loopback LDL Busy Out e Retrain SYNC DATA COMPRESSION TESTING When you perform diagnostic tests while the modem is operating in SDC mode note the following All tests mentioned in the System Testing section above are supported while the mode
154. complete The 0 followed immediately by a semicolon and a capital H H instructs the originating modem to hang up upon completing the call Note Ifthe originating modem is not placed hook the answer modem will not be able to call back Refer to the Note in Section 7 12 4 for more information To dial the answer modem follow these steps 1 Enter the answer modem s telephone number into the calling modem 2 Once your modem has dialed the answer modem s number you must instruct it to wait for the answer modem to answer the call To do this use the dial modifier or if your modem does not support the dial modifier use the pause K dial modifier The dial modifier instructs your modem to wait for five seconds of silence after hearing the ringback tone This ensures that the answer modem has picked up the call 3 Enter the access security password 4 To delineate the password from the callback number enter the code This alerts the answer modem that the password is complete but the dial string is not yet finished 5 Enter the callback number 6 Include the code 0 in the string telling the answer modem that password entry is complete Note The password will not be accepted and the call will be disconnected if the 0 code is not at the end of the dial string CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation Note f your modem is using its AT ACU and you follow the 0 with H a semicolon followed imme
155. ct commands Modem A modulator demodulator that lets digital data travel over analog transmission facilities Modulation Systematic changing of an analog signal s properties amplitude frequency phase to encode and convey digital information MNP Microcom Networking Protocol An async communications protocol that provides error correction Multiplexor 1 Any multiport device that lets two or more users share a common physical transmission channel Employed in pairs one at each end of the channel Each device performs both multiplexing of the multiple user inputs and demultiplexing of the channel back into separate user data streams 2 A device that lets two or more analog data signals travel over a single telephone line simultaneously Off Hook Describes when a telephone or modem connects to the dial line and presents electrical characteristics Similar to when a telephone handset is removed from its cradle Parity Bit An error checking mechanism for async transmission additional nondata bit added to a group of bits indicating whether the number of ones in the group is odd or even PBX Private branch exchange A telephone switching system located on a customer s premises Phase Jitter A phase deviation in a transmitted analog signal from its timing signal Often caused by alternating current components in a telecommunications network It s continuous long term and nea
156. ct in the specified time after the modem leaves data mode and starts to retrain Values of S10 other than the ones specified above disable the DCE Disconnect feature S REGISTER 11 DTMF TONE DURATION Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 72 Range 50 to 255 country specific S Register 11 defines the duration spacing of tones in ms in Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF dialing This register has no meaning unless the Tone Length option under the Dialing OPT S is set to 511 S REGISTER 12 EscAPE CODE GUARD TIME Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Setting 50 1 second Range 0 to 255 This S Register sets the interval that must be present on either side of the escape code in order for the modem to recognize the escape command and enter command mode This prevents the characters from inadvertently putting the modem in command mode if they re contained in data The value of S Register 12 is mul plied by 0 02 to determine the actual number of seconds For example the actual value of the factory default 50 is one second If S Register 12 15 set to 0 the speed at which you enter the escape sequence is not a factor S REGISTER 18 TEsT TIMER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 0 Range 0 to 255 seconds This S Register determines the duration in seconds of loopback tests With S Register 18 set to 0 the timer is not
157. ction rate match when the connection is established Note Some communications software packages support the automatic speed detect feature which automatically matches the modem s baud rate with the software package s baud rate 7 Refer to the software s instructions for the correct procedure for transferring files using the communications software package s supported protocols 8 Some of the file transfer protocols offered by various communications packages may not operate properly when the DTE rate is configured above 38 4 Kbps Serial cards using the 16550AN UART for example are capable of handling these higher rates but some others are not If higher rates are not working try a lower rate 9 Some communications software packages wait for the ring messages to be received before the modem answers incoming calls The modem must be set to the software s baud rate before the software recognizes the ring message When the modem is configured for autobaud its DTE rate can still be set via the front panel or by issuing an AT command 4 17 Flow Control Requirements Flow control prevents buffer overflow in the event that line disturbances cause frequent re transmissions For instructions on setting up flow control see ATSFL for the DTE 5 for the modem in Chapter 6 AT Commands If you re using a communications software package that is not discussed in Table 4 5 and you want to
158. d LPDA2 Dial Hex Modifiers Value OxE9 Definition This represents the dial digit because this digit cannot be packed into four bits This parameter causes the modem to go on hook for 0 7 seconds and then off hook again This is called a flash hook and is usually used to signal the phone system to return a dial tone When the modem is back off hook again it waits for dial tone for up to three seconds before proceeding with the next modifier If the modem detects a dial tone before the three seconds are up it continues to execute the dial command This modifier instructs the modem to pause for the length of time defined in S Register 8 before continuing to dial The modem attempts to connect at the rate and associated modulation mode specified by the Min Rate AT MN option It affects the speed of only the call attempt associated with the command that contains the modifier The modem returns to its original speed setting when the call attempt or the connection ends whichever occurs last OxE4 The two bytes immediately following the U contain the call timeout value in seconds The timeout period is specified by the digits 0 through 9 packed two digits per byte Only the three right most digits of the two bytes contain the timeout value The first digit of the first byte is ignored If a call timeout is not specified in the command or if the value specified is O the modem uses the default call
159. d line by line CTRLINSDLC LIND RSRCNAME ROLE CNN EXCHID MODEM AUTODIAL DIALCMD DUPLEX CRTCTLAPPC CTLD LINKTYPE e SWITCHED APPN SWTLINLST RMTNETID EXCHID CNNNBR ROLE e STNADR CRTDEVAPPC DEVD e RMTLOCNAME LCLLOCNAME LIND LINO12P RSRCNAME LINO12 ROLE PRI CNN SWTPP EXCHID 05600001 MODEM V54 AUTODIAL YES DIALCMD V25BIS DUPLEX FULL Name of the line description being used Communications line being used Primary SDLC Must match control unit description of remote system Switched point to point Must match control unit description of remote system Use 54 diagnostics Use automatic calling features Use V 54 bis dial commands Select full duplex RTS always on CTLD SYSTEMICTL LINKTYPE SDLC SWITCHED YES APPN NO SWTLINLST LINO12P RMTNETID NONE EXCHID 05600002 CNNNBR 5551212 ROLE SEC STNADR 01 Name of the control unit description being used SDLC is being used Switched line being used NO for APPC Name of switched line s being used NONE for APPC Must match line description of remote system Telephone number of remote system Must match line description of remote system Must match line and control unit description of remote system DEVD SYSTEM1DEV RMTLOCNAME SYSTEM2 LCLLOCNAME SYSTEM 1 RMTNETID NONE CTL SYSTEM1CTL APPN NO Name of device description being created
160. d by S Register 46 This setting is intended for manual dialing only After validating the password the modem generates an acknowledg ment tone before hanging up This indicates to the caller that the access security password is valid and that the modem should expect to receive a callback Upon hearing the tone the caller should hang up immediately This setting is intended for callback only Upon answering a call the local modem generates both the prompt and acknowledgment tone at the appropriate times This setting is intended for manual dialing only AT ZR Remote Number Required ACCESS SECURITY gt Rmt The AT ZR Rmt Num command specifies whether a remote callback number is required when using the AT ZC Callback option This option is applicable if the Callback option is set to Remote or Rmt Ind only AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off all 0 A remote callback number is not required If the calling modem does not provide a callback number the modem attempts to establish a connection without hanging up or calling back On 1 A remote callback number is required The modem does not attempt to make a connection a callback if no callback number is provided AT ZS Simulated Ringback ACCESS SECURITY eee The AT ZS Sim Ring command determines if the answer modem sends a ringback tone to the calling modem prior to sending an answer back tone I
161. d line 0 dBm maximum 15 dBm minimum Dial mode is country specific It s set using Telco option in the TELCO OPT S menu Leased line mode is also country specific It s set using the LL TX option in the TELCO OPT S menu There s a 0 dBm maximum TRANSMITTER TIMING e Internal or external 32FAST SDC 10 6 Interfaces EIA TIA 232 D MODEM TO COMPUTER The modem s digital interface conforms to the 232 D standard and CCITT V 24 CCITT V 28 and ISO 2110 You should connect the modem to a data terminal that has a compatible digital interface see Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Modem Computer Interface Connections Pin EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V 24 Signal Name Definition Not used Transmitted Data TXD Digital data transmitted from the local terminal to the remote modem Received Data RXD Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the remote modem Request to Send RTS Sent from local terminal to local modem to ready it for data transmission Clear to Send CTS Passes from the local modem to the local terminal when the data port is clear to transmit data Occurs in response to Request to Send Data Set Ready DSR Indicates the local modem is ready to transmit and receive data Signal Ground Common signal Provides a common ground reference point for interface circuitry Data Carrier Detect DCD Passed from the local modem
162. d originate modems Your modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V 34 Auto modulation mode This setting ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor OPTION SET 3 SYNC DIAL ONLY With Option Set 3 the modem provides network timing Clock Internal Select a data rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE using the DTE Rate AT DE option In this option your local and remote modems are configured for sync data compression operation The modems default to Fast Call Lv13 and use LAPM error correction with a modified V 42 bis data compression For proper operation be sure to enable Option Set 3 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that the Mode AT SM option is set the same in both the answer and originate modems With Option Set 3 your modem originates calls with its V 25 bis ACU The DTR option is set to 108 1 so that an off to on DTR Transition instructs the modem to connect to the telephone line If the modem detects an incoming call the call is connected If the modem does not detect an incoming call and you have enabled the Default Dial AT DA command the modem dials the number specified If the Default Dial AT DA command is disabled the modem refers to the Modulation Mode option AT MM If set to answer the modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer DTR
163. d the Password function set protection to lock the modem see AT PF AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Enable 1 AT PE1 enables password Disable 0 AT PEO disables password When you set protection you must use a password before you can access the protected functions Otherwise you do not need to enter a password to access any modem funct on Refer to the AT PW command for details on creating and changing a password Set Protection FP SECURITY gt e The AT PF Set Protection command lets you set protection and lock the modem Refer to the AT PN command for details on entering a password AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Set AT PF Use the AT PF command to lock Protection your modem THE FRONT PANEL After you have enabled the password function explained in the AT PE command description you must set protection To set protection 1 Display Set Protection 2 Press The modem responds with Password Protected The modem is now locked so it s necessary to enter your password to access locked functions If you try to access locked functions the modem responds with Password Locked AT PN Unlock Password Protection FP SECURITY gt e To unlock a password protected modem and gain access to all modem functions use the AT PNxxxx command xxxx represents the password which must be entered with the command You can also use the front
164. d this setting for most applications CHAPTER 6 Commands AT SC Speed Conversion TERMINAL OPT S gt Speed Conver b The AT SC Speed Conver command determines whether the modem uses the speed conversion feature Note This option does not apply when the modem is in the Direct or sync data transfer mode AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem adjusts its speed to match the speed of the negotiated data link On 1 DTE to modem speed remains constant regardless of the negotiated data link speed The exception is Direct data mode In this case DTE to modem speed must always match the modem to modem speed AT SI DTE Inactivity TERMINAL OPT S AT SI Inactivity command lets you select the length of the time the modem waits before disconnecting when no data is being transferred Note This option does not apply when the modem is set for the sync data transfer mode AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off AT SI The Off option disables the inactivity all timer 3min AT SI1 The modem will disconnect if 3 minutes elapse without data transfer to or from the DTE 10min ATSI2 The modem will disconnect if 10 minutes elapse without data transfer to or from the DTE 20min ATSIS The modem will disconnect if 20 minutes elapse without data transfer to or from the DTE 30min ATSI4 The modem will disconnect if 30 minutes elapse wit
165. de in this chapter Data characters may be either 8 bit EBCDIC or 7 bit ASCII with a parity bit You select the character set through the V25 Char character set option Parity is selected through the Parity option The Parity and V25 Char options are in the ACU OPT S menu of the front panel display 8 12 V 25 bis Control Signaling Addressed Mode The V 25 bis ACU uses V 24 circuits 108 2 DTR Pin 20 106 CTS Pin 5 107 DSR Pin 6 109 DCD Pin 8 and 126 RI Pin 22 to signal various states of call establishment The following sections describe this signaling in detail This description assumes that the RTS CTS DSR and DCD options in the TERMINAL OPT S menu of the front panel display are set to Normal 8 12 1 IDLE CONDITION Idle condition applies only if the DTR option in the modem is set to 108 2 When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line and the DTE has 108 2 DTR off the devices are idle If the modem detects an incoming call it signals the DTE on Circuit 125 RI Pin 22 To answer an incoming call the DTE must raise 108 2 DTR and enter dialog state Figure 8 5 illustrates the status of the pertinent signals for the idle state when no incoming calls are detected DTR 108 2 Off DSR 107 Off CTS 106 Off DCD 109 Off No Incoming Calls MODEM 32Fast Figure 8 5 Idle State 8 12 2 DIALOG STATE If the modem s DTR option is set
166. dem Settings to Send Text Files Modem Flow Optional Flow XON XOFF Speed Conver On Alternative Software File Transfer Method X Modem Protocol Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver On X Modem 1K Protocol Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver On Y Modem G Protocol Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver On Z Modem Protocol Not supported by software communications package Crosstalk 4 ProComm Plus Mirror III SmartCom II SmartCom III RELAY Gold Reliable Reliable Modem Flow Optional Flow XON XOFF Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow XON XOFF Speed Conver Off Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver Off Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver Off Modem Flow Off Flow RTS CTS Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver Off Modem Flow Off Flow RTS CTS Speed Conver On Not supported by software communications package Dyna Mite ProComm SmarTerm 320 SmarTerm 200 PC TALK 4 BitCom Reliable Modem Flow Optional Flow XON XOFF Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Off Speed Conver On Not supported by software communications package Not supported by software communications package Not supported by software communications package S
167. dem enters data mode On 2 The speaker is always on Security 3 The speaker goes on when dialing is completed and goes off when the modem enters data mode Off 0 speaker is always off Retrain 1 lets you return to data mode and initiate retrain with the remote modem Refer to Chapter 9 Testing Your Modem or the AT amp T option description within this chapter for a description of how to initiate a retrain AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 0 Return to data mode Retrain 1 Lets you initiate a retrain with the remote modem ATP ATT AT PT Dial Type sers The ATP ATT and AT PT Dial commands determine how the modem dials telephone numbers in tone pulse or auto tone pulse The modem refers to this option setting if it does not encounter any T or P modifiers in the telephone number AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Tone ATT The modem uses tone DTMF dialing AT PTO unless otherwise specified by the T or P dial modifiers in a telephone number Pulse ATP The modem uses pulse dialing unless AT PT1 otherwise specified by the T or P dial modifiers in a telephone number Auto AT PT2 The auto call unit attempts to tone dial when initiating a call If tone dialing is not possible pulse dialing is used For this feature to work correctly the first character in a dial string must be a digit and not a dial modifier A T or P in the dial stri
168. dial If no pulse dial modifier is inserted in the number stream the modem dials according to the pulse tone setting or the Dial option in the front panel DIALING OPT S menu These modifiers can also be used as a command outside of the dial string Flash Instructs the modem to flash hook a control signal used by many PBXs to enable special dialing features such as transferring a call call forwarding etc Return to command state after dialing Completes this process without breaking the connection Modem can dial but cannot train No call progress messages are received This modifier is used when calling an electronic service that permits the user to transmit numbers using tones once a connection has been established For LPDA2 ACU the semicolon is applicable only when it s immediately followed by the h modifier Quiet Answer Modem looks for one or more ringbacks followed by five seconds of silence within the delay time specified by the front panel Call Timeout option If the modem detects five seconds of delay silence it continues to dial the remainder of the dial string If the line is busy the modem hangs up and sends a BUSY message to the DTE If the modem doesn t detect delay silence or a busy signal it hangs up and the screen displays NO ANSWER This modifier enhances the use of the LPDA2 command set in the security scheme Reverse Must be the last character in the dial string before a carri
169. diately by a capital H the semicolon causes the originating modem to enter the command state and the capital H causes the modem to hang up upon completing the call If you are using the V 25 bis ACU an NMS or the front panel you must enter both the semicolon and capital H together H to disconnect the call In both instances note that the originating modem must be placed on hook in order to be called back For any dial modifiers used in the callback number you must use the equivalencies provided in Table 7 2 7 19 4 USING THE CALLBACK FEATURE WITH AN ORIGINATE ONLY MODEM If your modem can only originate calls and you want to calla MODEM 32Fast that is using the callback feature your callback number must contain 55 dial modifier the equivalent of the R modifier at the end When the answer modem dials the callback number it encounters the 55 dial modifier The 55 dial modifier instructs the answer modem to train as an answer modem when it calls you back rather than as an originating modem Therefore your modem is called back by the answer modem and can train with it because the callback appears to be coming from an answer modem A typical callback dial string sent from an originating modem appears as follows 555 2345 1111 555 6789 5 0 H With the exception of the 55 dial modifier this string is identical to the one in the previous section Note f your modem is using its AT ACU and you
170. difications are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory and the modem displays Save Completed 4 Do not turn off modem power until the Save Completed message appears 4 11 Option Set Defaults Table 4 5 summarizes the option set defaults for the modem In SDC operation the following options are critical for getting the best performance from the network Fast Call AT FC DTE Rate AT DE Flow AT FL TpDlyMin AT TD Carefully note the following descriptions Fast CALL Both modems must be configured the same in order to connect If one of the modems does not support the Fast Call option change the default setting to Off CHAPTER 4 Getting Started DTE RATE For better link utilization and throughput higher values than the default may be appropriate stoppage without disrupting data select a different option setting In this situation we recommend that the default values not be used Options not listed in the table are also configured to their factory defaults When you turn the modem off and then on again the modem defaults to Option Set 1 FLOW TPDLYMIN The default values assume your DTE is capable of accepting nondisruptive clock stoppage For DTE equipment that cannot handle Rx Tx clock Table 4 4 Option Set Summary Option Option Set 1 Option Set 2 Option Set 3 Option Set 4 MOD OPTIONS Line Dial Dial Dial 2W Lease Mod V 34 Auto V
171. dth on demand operation Refer to your nodal equipment s documentation for instructions on configuring for this application Select Option Set 3 for a bandwidth on demand application All operational information described in the preceding section applies to this application 4 15 Communications Software Packages You must use communications software packages to operate your modem Check with your system administrator to determine which package your computer terminal uses For communications software packages configuration instructions see the individual package for details For proper modem operation you must modify certain options and option settings in the communications software packages and in the modem See Table 4 6 for details on proper settings and operating considerations 56 Kbps Figure 4 8 Bandwidth on Demand Option Set 3 5 5 9 CHAPTER 4 Getting Started 4 15 1 ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE PACKAGES OPTION SET 1 The modem works with multiple async communications software packages with minimal configuration Async communications software packages let you perform most modem operations through a computer See the specific communications software package instructions for information on configuring your terminal For a list of communications software packages and information on how each package operates with the m
172. e Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 75 19 2 Kbps Hayes compatible 1 Change baud rate to Set DTR to Disc AT amp D2 Yes NA Default 2400 bps 19 2 Kbps or lower Enable long space disc 2 Change linefeed special ATY1 handling to send Set PSTN to Off 3 Assign Soft Keys with AT MD modem commands See Flow Control Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings OPERATING NOTES 1 Refer to Section 4 16 2 SmarTerm does not support the Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature To place a call use the standard Hayes dial command PC Talk Version 1 36 Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 300 9600 bps Change baud rate to 1 Enter ATS 1 if auto answer Yes Yes Default 1200 bps 9 6 Kbps or lower is required 2 See Flow Control Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings OPERATING NOTE Before selecting the PC Talk Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 CHAPTER 4 Getting Started BitCom Version 2 6A Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 150 9600 bps 1 Disable echo 1 See Flow Control Yes Yes Default 300
173. e This type of interface may connect to a network managed product 11 Command Cross Reference In many cases you can set the same options and perform the same actions from modem s front panel as you can using AT and V 25 bis command sets from your terminal Because you may find it useful to know how the front panel and the command sets interrelate we ve included Table 11 1 It shows equivalent commands in all three Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table AT V 25 bis Command Front Panel Option Command ATA methods of settiong options The three methods are interdependent so if you change an option setting using one method the change is reflected in the other methods too Only the functions with counterparts are referenced in Table 11 1 S Registers that correspond to AT commands and front panel options are found in Table 11 2 Table 11 1 Command Cross Reference Table continued AT V 25 bis Command Front Panel Option Command ATYO Longspace Off ATDn Enter Then Dial ATY1 Longspace On ATDSn Dial From Stored n 1 9 ATZO ATZ1 SELECT OPTION 1 ATDS n Dial From Stored n n 1 9 ATZ2 SELECT OPTION 2 ATEO Async Echo Off ATZ3 SELECT OPTION 3 ATE1 Async Echo On ATZ4 SELECT OPTION 4 ATHO Talk Data Same as pressing AT amp CO DCD High ATH1 TEST Busy Out AT amp C1 DCD Normal amp 2 DCD ACU On ATLO ATL1 Volume Soft
174. e escape code character The default setting 43 translates into the ASCII character Values greater than 127 disable the escape function S REGISTER 3 CARRIAGE RETURN CHARACTER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Set ng 13 Range 0 to 127 This S Register determines the decimal value of the carriage return character The default setting 13 translates into the ASCII CR carriage return character S REGISTER 4 LINE FEED CHARACTER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Setting 10 Range 0 to 127 This S Register determines the decimal value of the line feed character The default setting 10 translates into the ASCII lt LF gt line feed character S REGISTER 5 BACKSPACE CHARACTER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Set ng 8 Range 0 to 127 This S Register determines the decimal value of the backspace character The default setting 08 translates into the ASCII BS backspace character Values greater than 32 except 127 disable the backspace function CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces S REGISTER 6 WAIT FOR DIAL TONE Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 2 Range to 255 seconds If the modem is set for Call Progress option settings 0 1 or 3 0 ATX1 ATX3 and blind dial is selected it doesn t look for dial tone Instead the modem goes off hook and waits for the numbe
175. e 16 8 AT DR14 Auto Redial 14 AT DE12 DTE Rate 19 2 AT DR15 Auto Redial 15 AT DE13 DTE Rate 21 6 AT DSn Dial From Stored n n 1 9 AT DE14 DTE Rate 24 0 AT DS n Dial From Stored n n 1 9 AT DE15 DTE Rate 38 4 AT DTO DTR Delay S25 AT DE16 DTE Rate 57 6 AT DT1 DTR Delay 10 sec AT DE17 DTE Rate 64 0 AT DT2 DTR Delay 15 sec AT DE18 DTE Rate 72 0 AT ECO EC V 42 AT DE19 DTE Rate 76 8 1 AT DE20 DTE Rate 96 0 AT EC2 EC MNP AT DE21 DTE Rate 115 2 AT FCO Fast Call Off AT DE22 DTE Rate Auto AT FC1 Fast Call Lv11 AT DE25 DTE Rate 26 8 AT FC2 Fast Call Lv12 AT DE26 DTE Rate 28 8 AT FC3 Fast Call Lv13 AT DE28 DTE Rate 128 0 AT amp FLO Flow Off AT DIO L to D Low Fast AT amp FL1 Flow XON XOFF AT DI1 L to D Low Slow AT amp FL2 Flow DTR CTS 012 L to D High Fast AT amp FL3 Flow RTS CTS AT DI3 L to D High Slow AT amp FL4 Flow XON XOFF AT DLO RTS CTS Delay 0 AT amp FL5 Flow XON XOFF PT AT DL1 RTS CTS Delay 15 AT HDO Hold DL Line Off AT DL2 RTS CTS Delay 60 AT HD1 Hold DL Line 1min AT DL3 RTS CTS Delay 90 AT HD2 Hold DL Line 2min AT DL4 RTS CTS Delay S26 AT HD3 Hold DL Line 3min AT DPO Pause Delay 3 AT HD4 Hold DL Line 4min AT DP1 Pause Delay 6 AT HD5 Hold DL Line 5min AT DP2 Pause Delay 9 AT LAO DTE Ct 141 Off AT DP3 Pause Delay 12 AT LA1 DTE Ct 141 On AT DP4 Pause Delay S8 AT LCO Line Compen Off AT DRO Auto Redial Off AT LC1 Line Compen On
176. e ACU Selection option is set to Off Note enable SDC Select ACU Select None Then make sure you choose the sync data format Sync described below Also make sure that you select one of the reliable data transfer modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable using the Mode AT SM option Option Setting Description Async Async data is passed in data mode 1 4D Sync Sync data is passed in data mode 2 3 4L 7 7 4 The Char Length option applies to async data applications that use the direct data transfer mode no error correction The modem ignores this option if you use the normal reliable or auto reliable data transfer modes The AT and V 25 bis auto call units ACUs use 10 bit characters only The 10 bit character format does not affect the character length selection Do not change this option unless your application requires it If you must change this option select the setting that corresponds to the number of bits that your DTE uses to code each character start bit data bits parity bit and stop bit Note The autobauding feature works only with 10 bit characters Option Setting Description 8 Modem is compatible with 8 bit characters 9 Modem is compatible with 9 bit characters 10 Modem is compatible with 10 bit characters all 11 Modem is compatible with 11 bit characters 7 7 5 V 25 BIS CHARACTER SELECTION The V25 Char option determines
177. e and return to the leased line after a specified period AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Manual 0 Pressing the Talk Data key at the 1 2 3 Home position returns the modem to the leased line 15 min 1 The modem returns to the leased line after 15 minutes 30 min 2 The modem returns to the leased line after 30 minutes 1 hour 3 The modem returns to the leased line 4 after 1 hour 2 hours 4 The modem returns to the leased line after 2 hours 4 hours 5 The modem returns to the leased line after 4 hours If you set this option to Manual an alternate method of disconnection must be used For all other settings the modem automatically disconnects and returns to the leased line after the selected time expires Set both modems to the same setting for the D to L option Note f Hold Dialine is set to anything but Off the modem holds the dial line for the specified time period AT LL Local Analog Loopback Test Busy Out TEST OPT S LAL Busy Out gt The AT LL LAL Busy Out command determines whether the modem appears busy to incoming calls during a local analog loopback test Note Set the AT amp J TELCO Telco option to RJAMB before enabling this option AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not busy out the line all during a local analog loopback test allowing incoming calls to ring On 1 The modem connects to the line during a local
178. e designated telephone book address ATE ATE Echo command lets the modem echo all commands it receives from an async DTE ACU OPT S gt eee AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not echo async commands to the DTE On 1 The modem echoes async all commands to the DTE ATH Busy Out Test The ATH command lets you initiate a Busy Out test AT TEST OPT S eee Option Command Setting Setting Description Busy Out 1 Makes the modem appear busy to incoming calls To configure the modem to use the Busy Out feature refer to the AT LT DTE Pin 25 option description in this chapter End Test 0 If Busy Out is enabled ATHO will disconnect the busy out condition Also if the modem is in escape mode the modem has transitioned to command state from the data state online or test the ATHO command disconnects the modem ATL Speaker Volume TELCO OPT S gt ATL Volume option sets speaker volume in the modem AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Medium 2 Medium all Loud 3 Loud Soft 0 1 Soft ATM Speaker Control TELCO OPT S eee The Speaker option controls operation of the modem s speaker AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Dialing 1 The speaker comes on while dialing all and training but stays off when the mo
179. e modem for a specific application including Preparing the modem for operation Defining and configuring the modem s preprogrammed option sets Three quich reference charts list option set defaults for the modem Sample Synchronous Data Compression SDC applications Graphic examples are provided for each application along with the appropriate option set selection Special operating notes for each application are discussed This section contains important notes you should be aware of before you install or configure your modem How to configure the modem for use with async communications software packages and an IBM AS 400 Remember if you have a PC you must find out what hardware and communications software packages you have on the PC before you select the option set for async calls This chapter also briefly introduces the AT and V 25 bis Auto Call Units ACU 4 1 Before You Begin Before attaching the modem to a network contact your system administrator and get the following information The protocol you need for your calls async or sync The software support you need to log into the network For example a specific communications package or interface board Whether you need to change the duration of the modem s Request to Send Clear to Send RTS CTS delay By default the modem waits 10 milliseconds before responding with its CTS signal after receiving an RTS signal fr
180. e number of minutes that number will remain on the list LSD 8005554901 45 In this example the number 8005554901 is on the delayed call list and cannot be called for 45 minutes Call Failure Indication Forbidden Call The number is on the forbidden number list The modem cannot dial the number as instructed The PTT may require the modem to place a number on a forbidden list until you turn power to the modem off and then on again Call Failure Indication Number Not Stored You used the CRSa command to dial from a modem memory address that did not have a number stored in it List of Stored Numbers When you issue the RLN command and the modem has numbers stored in memory the modem precedes each number with LSN as shown LSN1 1 234 555 8910 LSN2 1 222 555 4444 LSN3 1 333 555 5555 In the example above the modem had phone numbers stored in addresses 1 through 3 Call Failure Indication No Tone The remote modem didn t detect an answer back tone or ring tone When a call was sent to the remote modem after a pause the remote modem failed to respond with an answer back tone The local modem will wait the amount of time specified by the Call Timeout option and then hang up VALid The modem responds to CIC DIC and PRNa n commands with the VAL response whenever it can carry out the command The modem also uses the VAL response during call progress reporting which is described in Call Progress Resp
181. e pattern the modem displays No Sync Achieved Note the modem begins the test and it s operating in the MNP or LAPM Reliable mode the modem attempts to restore the Reliable mode after the test CHAPTER 9 Testing Your Modem Loca DIGITAL LOOPBACK AT amp T3 Using remote DTE data the local digital loopback test checks the telephone lines and the remote modem s circuitry This test loops data received from the remote modem back to the remote modem The modem ignores local DTE data during the local digital loopback test Important If your modem is operating in SDC mode see Synchronous Data Com pression Testing earlier in this section for testing considerations Note For maximum reliability run the RDL LDL and RDL Pat tests at a data rate of 19 2 Kbps or lower This test is not valid in the Bell 103 or V 21 modulation modes If you attempt to run this test in either of these modulation modes the modem responds with Test Denied Occasionally a MODEM 32Fast is used with a remote modem that doesn t include the digital loopback feature To run a local digital loopback test from the remote modem in this application put the local modem into a local digital loopback test see Figure 9 6 During this test the local modem loops incoming data back to the remote modem as if the remote modem had initiated a remote digital loopback test see Figure 9 3 Note This tests applies only when the L
182. e remote modem waits until it has received an entire frame of data before beginning to transmit the data to its DTE RxD 2 Off 0 AT TL Tone Length DIALING OPT S Tone Length gt The AT TL Tone Length command determines the DTMF tone s time duration This command is operational only when tone dialing is selected using dial modifiers or the ATT command AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 72 0 Tone length is 72 ms 11 1 Tone length is determined by S Register 11 AT TT Call Timeout AT TT Call Timeout command determines how long the modem waits from the time it completes dialing to the time it detects answer back tone from the remote modem If the modem does not receive answer back tone from the remote modem within a specified time the modem disconnects The setting of this option also affects the R dial modifier See Section 8 4 for a description of dial modifiers AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 30 0 The modem waits 30 seconds for a call to succeed 45 1 The modem waits 45 seconds for a call to succeed 60 2 The modem waits 60 seconds for a call to succeed 90 3 The modem waits 90 seconds for a call to succeed 180 4 The modem waits 180 seconds for a call to succeed S7 5 The modem waits the amount of time specified by S Register 7 for a call to succeed AT XC Error Correction Reliable Messages
183. e theoretical limit and retry the steps listed in this section If the same cable length is required use a low capacitance cable If the modem is installed at a host site perform the following steps 1 Set the Mode option AT SM EC DC OPT S category to Reliable Reliable mode ensures data is transmitted during this test Note Do notinitiate loop tests while performing the diagnostic procedures in this section 2 Follow steps 1 3 in the rpevious section to verify the cable at the remote site 3 Once the cable at the remote site 15 verified initiate a dial connection with the host site 4 If there are no errors in data transmission the cable at the host site is most likely appropriate for your application 5 If the transmitted and received messages are different the cable at the host site is most likely incorrect for the application Verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table 5 1 Reduce the cable length or capacitance of the cable to the theoretical limit and retry steps 1 3 in the previous section If the same cable length is required use a low capacitance cable Note These tests should be done prior to a Local Analog Loopback LAL or Remote Digital Loopback RDL test when troubleshooting 6 AT Commands This chapter gives you an alphabetic list of the AT commands that you can execute from the control terminal and modem s front panel AT commands and options are described in the foll
184. e value The x must be a number within the specified range for that S Register Though n is a number greater than or equal to 0 not all S Registers are used by the modem If you try to change the value of an unused S Register the modem displays OK but no change occurs CHANGE S REGISTER VALUE AT X Settings x Specifies value of selected S Register Format AT x CR This command lets you change the value of an S Register stored in nonvolatile memory The selected S Register is the last S Register that was accessed using an S Register command or selected using the ATSn command The x must be a number within the specified range for that S Register On power up S Register 0 15 the selected S Register If you try to change the value of an unused S Register the modem displays OK DISPLAY S REGISTER VALUE ATSn Settings n Specifies S Register Format ATSn CR This command displays the value of the S Register specified by n as stored in volatile memory If a appears in the command string anywhere other than immediately following the S Register number the ATSn Command displays the value of the last S Register selected If you try to read value of an unused S Register the modem displays OK DISPLAY S REGISTER VALUE Settings Selected S Register Format AT lt CR gt This command displays the contents of the selected S Register as stored in volatile memory The selected S Reg
185. ect a data rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE using the DTE Rate AT DE option In this option set your local and remote modems are configured for sync data compression operation The modems default to Fast Call Lv13 and use LAPM error correction with modified V 42 bis data compression For proper operation be sure to enable Option Set 4 in both the local and remote modems and make sure that the Mode AT SM option is set the same in both the answer and originate modems 4 10 How to Configure an Option Set To configure the modem for the desired option set do the following 1 Install the modem 2 If the modem has been installed previously reinitialize it to the factory default See Preparing for Operation in Section 4 7 3 Identify the option set that most closely suits your application The modem defaults to Option Set 1 4 Display Select Options the modem front panel 4 Press the modem displays Select Options X where X represents Option Set 1 2 3 or 4 5 Press Oto select the desired option set The modem displays Select Options X To change or save an option or an option set do the following l Step across the Status Option Sets Dialing menu by pressing you see Save 2 Use Wrkey to display the option set number where you want the changes saved and then press The modem displays Saving Options 3 After a few seconds the mo
186. efficiency If your application operates in a windowed protocol environment set the window sizes to greater than to improve performance Windowing refers to the number of outside packets sent before an acknowledgment is required To improve your network s performance adjust frame sizes The optimum frame size for most applications is between 128 and 1024 bytes However we recommend you experiment with window frame sizes for maximum performance If link utilization is low raise the DTE rate Low link utilization typically implies that the DTE equipment is the bottleneck in data transmission 4 14 V 34 SDC Application Examples This section gives you graphic examples of several commonly used configurations It lists the pre programmed SDC option sets appropriate for a specific application Each example discusses configuration options network timing issues and or additional operating notes Important When you select an option set for any of the applications discussed below refer to Section 4 13 before you begin to configure the modem That section contains operation notes on several option selections that are critical to ensure optimal SDC network operations 4 14 1 SINGLE CHANNEL POINT TO POINT DIGITAL LINK RESTORAL VIA NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A B SwITCH When used as a dial backup device for a digital network the modem provides economical dial backup or disaster recovery at sync speeds matchi
187. el control of your modem If your modem is under remote configuration control by another MODEM 32Fast and you have disabled your modem s AT ACU using Switch 5 on your modem s rear panel see Table 7 3 Rear Panel Switches later in this chapter the controlling modem will still have full AT ACU control of your modem Your modem to modem speed must be 7200 bps or greater for a remote configuration session to occur Make certain that your MODULATION OPT S menu Mod Max Rate and Min Rate options are set to accommodate at least 7200 bps Higher modem to modem speed does not improve your remote configuration channel speed Caution When your MODEM 32Fast is being controlled by another MODEM 32Fast and you enter AT escape sequence at your control terminal your terminal displays CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation UNDER RTM CONFIG and you enter the AT command mode Once in AT command mode you will not be able to issue AT commands or return from the AT command mode to other terminal displays until the remote configuration session is over Note We recommend that you not enter the AT escape sequence while your modem is under remote configuration control 7 13 6 SETTING A REMOTE MODEM S LEASED LINE ADDRESS The SET RMT LL ADDR menu Figure 7 14 is intended for use with remote configuration on leased lines Using the SET RMT LL ADDR option you can select the remote modem s address Note f you attempt to
188. em currently has no numbers on the delayed list it responds with Request Listed Numbers This command instructs the modem to list the numbers stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory We recommend that you proofread stored telephone numbers after you ve entered them into modem memory The modem lists the addresses along with corresponding phone numbers If an address is empty it s not listed A typical list might look like this Enter RLN LSN1 1 234 555 8910 LSN2 1 222 555 4444 LSN3 1 333 555 5555 LSN5 1 555 555 7777 LSN6 1 666 555 8888 LSN7 1 777 555 9999 In this example all of the address have numbers stored in them except address 4 which is empty If all the addresses are empty the modem responds with the LSN message If the RLN command is entered password protection is enabled and the modem is locked The modem responds with the INV message 8 10 4 CALL FAILURE RESPONSES When you attempt a connection with the CRNn and CRSa commands the modem sends a call failure response to the DTE if the call is unsuccess ful Table 8 7 V 25 bis Responses Response Definition Connection The local modem has negotiated a link with the remote modem INcoming Call The modem sends the INC response to the DTE whenever it detects an incoming call INValid The modem sends the INV response whenever you enter a command incorrectly or a command that the modem cannot execute For example if you issue the CIC Co
189. ephone book Password protection is disabled and the password is set to 0000 FP SECURITY 4 PW Verify Dis T ACCESS SECURITY Mngr Intern Intern 9 Remote 4 Rmt Ind RMT CONFIG OPT S 5 If you plan to use the password protection feature again open Switch 4 on the modem s rear panel set it to the up position 7 12 Access Security Options Figure 7 11 illustrates the ACCESS SECURITY menu Access Security is used with answer modems Any calling station with Dual Tone Multi Frequency dialing can use the modem s Access Security feature ACCESS SECURITY menu options let your modem screen incoming calls using a password function The ACCESS SECURITY OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS AT ZC Callback Feature AT ZD Dial Restriction AT ZI Entering Group Password AT ZP Tone AT ZR Remote Number Required AT ZS Simulated Ringback AT ZV Password Verification The access security feature works as follows l Your modem receives a call 2 The calling modem must provide a DTMF password before the modems attempt a connection gt p gt Callback Off D Rmt Num Rqrd Off Enter Group PW Group PW Disable D d On Enable Prompt Only Ack Only Prompt Ack AT ZS gt azo
190. equired before and after the escape sequence is sent If any data is sent within the guard time the escape sequence isn t detected The default guard time is one second The guard time specified by S Register 12 also specifies the maximum time between the three consecutive escape characters If more than the allowable time elapses between escape characters the escape sequence is ignored Setting S Register 12 to zero disables the guard time so the rate at which you enter the escape sequence isn t a factor When the modem detects a valid escape sequence it responds with OK Do not send commands until the OK response has been received The command that s sent before the OK response is received may not be interpreted correctly To disable escape command detection set S Register 12 to a value greater than 127 When you use error correction and if you escape from the data state to the command state the modem buffers any data received from the remote site When you return online to data state the modem sends buffered data to the DTE 8 8 Non Configuration AT Commands Most AT commands cross reference a front panel option Some however are considered ac on commands and are intended for immediate modem action Action AT commands let you perform a number of the important day to day modem functions including Re executing your last command Answering an incoming call Dialing a telephone number
191. er MOUS 105 DCD 79 DCD sgnal COMODE 60 Default Dial f at re eee ett rer rre 80 Delay a 150 85 84 RTS CTS 151 5 5 84 throughput minimizing 107 Delay 80 Dial backup 83 146 Dial hme COMME CINE 14 Dialmodil 142 Dial restoral configuring from front 116 li n 87 102 Dial 16 Leased 90 Dial tone WAUN TOK 149 E 81 type SCLC 63 Dialers 44 Dialing MLCT all M M 44 from stored oett rene 55 SV ING sss 43 CONE OF PUSE EEEE 56 Diane oei 54 ie esses ads ties 126 Dina Mite Version 40L 35 Disconnect Buffer Delay 151 DISCOMMECE ioa pensis eet rtr sna 92 DSR signal 65 Can O oeii 89 140 DTE Crol 2555
192. ering asynchronous and synchronous dialing and leased line with dial restoral Your modem includes four sets of options stored in nonvolatile memory If none of the four option sets Is appropriate to your application you can customize any option set to suit your needs then save the customized option set in nonvolatile memory The modem includes a line probing feature that optimizes performance on every connection by automatically choosing the optimum bandwidth and carrier frequency 2 3 Extended DTE Rates The device supports extended asynchronous DTE rates of 115 2 96 76 8 72 64 57 6 24 and 21 6 Kbps and extended synchronous DTE rates of 24 21 6 19 2 and 16 8 Kbps The extended data rates are compatible with many popular PC communication software packages Figure 2 1 MODEM 32Fast CHAPTER 2 Introduction 2 4 Synchronous Data Compression SDC With the Synchronous Data Compression SDC feature the modem Transmits synchronous HDLC SDLC like analog data at speeds of 72 Kbps or greater over standard dial up or analog leased lines Achieves async throughput at speeds up to 115 2 Kbps over standard dialup and analog leased lines Combines an Adaptive Rate System with Adaptive Packetization to optimize throughput over all line conditions and data types Uses the CCITT V 42 bis error correcting protocol along with a modified version of the CCITT V 42 bis data compression algorithm for error
193. essage ACU OPT S gt eee Ip The AT CM command lets you select whether you want to display the current DTE or DCE rate after the connect message See AT DE DTE Rate command on page 82 for possible DTE DCE rates AT Option Command Setting Setting Description DTE Rate CMO Selecting DTE Rate results in the default current DTE rate being displayed on your terminal after the connect message Selecting DCE Rate results in the current DCE rate being displayed on your terminal after the connect message DCE Rate CM1 AT CN amp 7 Entering Telephone Numbers See the ATCZZ command description AT CT AT amp R CTS See the command description AT DA Default Dialing ACU OPT S gt eee Default Dial AT DA Default Dialing command controls the Default Dial feature When the Default Dial option is enabled the modem dials the telephone number in the specified address if one of the following conditions occurs This option also determines the telephone number dialed during restoral AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The default dial feature is disabled 1 2 3 40 1 9 1 9 The modem direct dials the telephone 4L number stored in the memory address 2 3 selected memory addresses 1 9 Default when one of the following conditions occurs The option in the modem is set to 108 1 or Tail and the DTE turns the signal from off to on The DT
194. et DATA 9600 T D gt eee Select Options gt The ATX Selecting Options command chooses which of the four option sets the modem uses These option sets reside in nonvolatile memory When you use Select Options or the ATZ com mand the new option set takes effect immediately For a description of each option set s intended application see Option Sets in Chapter 4 AT Option Command Setting Setting Modem Uses 1 0 1 Option Set 1 2 2 Option Set 2 3 3 Option Set 3 4 4 Option Set 4 Note The modem disconnects from the line when the ATZ command is entered Also any test in progress is immediately terminated Since any AT command that follows the ATZ command is ignored by the modem make sure that the command is the last one entered in an AT command string Use the AT amp Y command to select which option set the modem uses to power up AT amp Commands The following sections describe industry standard AT commands that begin with AT amp AT amp C DCD Control AT amp C DCD command determines how modem sets the DCD signal The modem signals DTE with DCD on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 8 V 24 eee b AT Option Command Setting Setting Description High 0 DCD is always on 1 Normal 1 DCD is off during dialing and also while the modem is training with the remote modem DCD is on in data mode When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line DCD is off ACU On 2 DC
195. etermine the operating rate For a detailed description of the autobaud feature see Autobaud Feature in Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces Note The Autobaud feature is not supported in sync operating modes When configured for sync operation and if you select Auto the DTE will be driven at the previous DTE rate selected the factory default is 9600 bps 128 28 The DTE port is configured for 128 000 bps 115 2 21 The DTE port is configured for 115 200 bps 96 20 The DTE port is configured for 96 000 bps 76 8 19 The DTE port is configured for 76 800 bps 72 18 The DTE port is configured for 72 000 bps 64 17 port is configured for 64 000 bps 57 6 16 The DTE port is configured for 57 600 bps 56 The DTE port is configured for 56 000 bps 2 3 4L U S Can Only 48 The DTE port is configured for 48 000 bps 2 3 4L All Other Countries 38 4 15 The DTE port is configured for 38 400 bps 28 8 26 The DTE port is configured for 28 800 bps 26 4 25 The DTE port is configured for 26 400 bps 24 14 The DTE port is configured for 24 000 bps 2 3 4L 21 6 13 The DTE port is configured for 21 600 bps 19 2 12 The DTE port is configured for 19 200 bps 16 8 11 The DTE port is configured for 16 800 bps 14 4 10 The DTE port is configured for 14 400 bps 12 9 The DTE port is configured for 12 000 bps 9600 8 The DTE port is configured for 9600 bps 7200 7 The DTE port is configured for 7200 bps 48
196. f the diagnostic tests described in the following sections make sure that The 232 D cable is firmly connected to the modem and to your DTE Don t forget to tighten the retaining screws on the connectors at both ends of the cable All phone line connections at the wall jack and at the modem are secure The modem s AC power outlet is operating e The modem is configured for your application Refer to Chapter 3 Installation for information about making modem DTE and phone line connections Also refer to Chapter 4 Start Up and Chapter 7 Front Panel Operation for information about modem configuration 9 3 Automatic Self Test Whenever you power up the modem it automatically runs a self test that checks for and identifies any faults STARTING THE AUTOMATIC SELF TEST To start a modem self test 1 At the modem s rear panel turn on the power switch If the power switch is on turn the power off and then on again 2 Take a look at the front panel LCD display and see which of the messages in Table 9 1 appears after this message SELF TEST Table 9 1 Self Test Messages Self Test Message Description 3260 3265 Initial If this is the first time you re powering up your modem this message appears in the display after the message SELF TEST The 3260 3265 Initial message tells you that the modem is set to operate using factory default values If this isn t the fi
197. ff 0 Callback is disabled all Intern 1 9 1 9 The answer modem performs the callback using the phone number stored in the specified location Even if the calling modem provides a callback number the local modem uses the internally stored number The answer modem performs the callback using a number provided by the remote user If the calling modem does not provide a callback number and the password is valid the modem attempts a connection without hanging up or calling back The network management system Remote 10 Manager Only accessible performs the callback by using a using a phone number stored in its database network that is associated with the received management identification code This selection is System not accessible from the front panel or AT ACU and is displayed only when selected by the network management system CHAPTER 6 Commands Rmt Ind 12 answer modem performs the callback using the phone number stored at the specified phone number index provided by the remote users 1 9 If the remote device does not provide a callback index the modem attempts to establish a connection without hanging up or calling back if AT ZRO Rmt Num Rard Off is set AT ZP Select Tones with Access Security ACCESS SECURITY gt eee The AT ZP Tone command controls type of tones used by your modem that alert the caller to AT ZD Dial Restricted password ACCE ECURITY CCESS
198. free compressed data transmission Supports industry standard Auto Calling Interfaces including Extended AT V 25 bis dialing and the NetView LPDA 2 dialing commands This gives you maximum flexibility and interoperability with a broad set of DTE and router nodal equipment Offers dial and leased line network management for continuous network operations visibility and critical link control The MODEM 32Fast is the ideal alternative to costly digital services Whether your application requires dedicated bandwidth bandwidth on demand sync dial up or dial backup the modem provides optimum throughput for all HDLC SDLClike environments such as X 25 Systems Networking Architecture SNA Statistical Multiplexor and Router networks 2 5 Network Management Integral Network Management is standard The modem is supported by proprietary 9110 and 9800 network management systems Your network manager can configure monitor and control the operation of both the local and remote Modems In addition as a dial modem a network managed modem supports incoming calls from non network managed modems Under network management modems are polled continuously by the network manager to collect management information and perform a continuous status check Network management traffic including alarms commands events and polling are transported to remote modems using an in band channel that does not disrupt user data traffic a
199. from the DTE If the DTR signal is low the modem disconnects This feature is used when the AT Form option is set to SyncData or the V25 Form option is set to AsynSync The delay time period lets you switch an async terminal to a sync terminal AT Option Command Setting Setting Description S25 0 The modem waits the amount of time all specified by S Register 25 before examining DTR 10 sec 1 The modem waits 10 seconds before examining DTR 15 sec 2 The modem waits 15 seconds before examining DTR AT EC Error Correction EC DC OPT S gt eee command determines which error correction protocol is used Note This option does not apply when the MODEM 32Fast is configured for sync data compression operation If both the local and remote SDC modems are configured for SDC operation only LAPM error correction with V 42 bis data compression is used No other setting is available AT Option Command Setting Setting V 42 0 Description The modems negotiate the use of LAPM or MNP error using LAPM If unsuccessful they attempt to negotiate using MNP If still unsuccessful and the Mode option is set to Auto Reliable or Speed Dependent Auto Reliable the modems use normal mode If the Mode option is set to Reliable the modems disconnect The modems attempt to negotiate LAPM error correction In async applications if a connection is unsuccessful and the Mode option is set
200. ftware package 4 Do not enable SmartCom II software s Voice feature Sidekick Voice Only Version 1 56A Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make These Modem Modem Software Package Modem Type Software Changes Make These Modem Changes Dials Answers 300 bps Hayes compatible None Required None Required Yes NA Default 300 bps OPERATING NOTE For proper operation set the modem to its factory defaults before autodialing with SideKick See Section CHAPTER 4 Getting Started RELAY Gold Version 4 Speed Range for Select Software s Modem Type Communications Software Package 50 57 Kbps Default 1200 Kbps Select S for all Hayes or Hayes compatible Smartmodems OPERATING NOTES Make These Software Changes Select Directory of Computers to TYPE TTY or VT100 Change speed to 57 Kbps or lower Clear ASCII Transfer Set Flow Control XON KOFF Y Set Protocol N Send LF with CR Y Modem Modem Make These Modem Changes Dials 1 See Flow Control Yes Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings Enable modem s speed conversion if the communications package speed is greater than or equal to 38 4 Kbps If package speed 57 6 Kbps set modem s DTE rate to 57 6 Kbps AT DE16 3 Save Option Set 1 AT amp W 1 Before selecting the RELAY Gold Auto Dial and Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 Answers Yes
201. g With Option Set 3 the modem gives you network timing Clock Internal e Specify the speed at which the modem communicates with the DTE using the DTE rate AT DE option if you wish to use a value other than the default Consult the DTE Rate Option description in Chapter 6 To 56 64 Kbps MODEM V 34 SDC With Option Set 3 your modem originates calls with its V 25 bis ACU The DTR option is set to 108 1 so that an off to on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect to the telephone line If the modem detects an incoming call the call is connected If the modem does not detect an incoming call and you have enabled the Default Dial AT DA command the modem dials the number specified If the Default Dial AT DA command is disabled the modem refers to the Modulation Mode option AT MM If set to answer the modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer If you want the V 25 bis ACU to manipulate the DTR signal set the option to 108 2 other options in the ACU OPT S menu are set for a typical sync DTE For proper operation be sure to select SDC Option Set 3 in both the local and remote modems and make sure that the Mode AT SM option is set the same in both the answer and originate modems Your modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V
202. g sequences that have occurred between the local and remote device for each single line connection The modem may retrain due to a user initiated transmission signal for noise and other distortions The modem does not measure non linear and transient impairments This information is retrain request using the Test option a user continuously updated to reflect current line initiated retrain request using the Max Rate and conditions for both local and remote devices Min Rate options and a modem initiated retrain request due to poor signal quality With a retrain the modem attempts to relearn the channel or Note The CQMS values are estimates of line fallback in data rate by enabling ARS if necessary parameters and expected performance A retrain is counted if it is initiated locally or They re to be used for planning only remotely both the local and remote modems They re not intended to be warranties of retrain counters are incremented product performance If your modem is not Note The retrain counter for automatic currently connected to another modem the restoral operation is a separate undisplayed CQMS values that are displayed are of the counter The restoral retrain counter is a last call moving window based on the settings of the Leased to Dial option CHAPTER 6 Commands Table 6 4 CQMS Parameters continued Front Panel Display Echo Delay Far Echo Lvl Nr Echo Lvl Phase Roll Eqlzr SNR
203. guration session with the connected modem any status information you display and any configuration changes you perform via your front panel affect the remote modem only Your front panel displays the remote modem s front panel information not your own However you can still use your AT ACU to read status information and configure your modem When MODEM 32Fast is under remote configuration control by another modem its front panel RC NC LED blinks and its front panel displays UNDER RC T D Note Each modem s front panel LEDs reflect only its own operational status In other words you cannot view the LED status of a remotely connected modem The following features and functions are restricted for a MODEM 32Fast under remote configuration control Dialing Testing Initiating a remote configuration session Searching for and setting a remote modem s leased line address Changes made to the remote modem s configuration using the remote configuration function do not take effect until you terminate the session If you abort the session or if the modems disconnect during the session changes made to the remote modem s configuration are not saved If your modem is under remote configuration control by another MODEM 32Fast and you have disabled your front panel using Switch 3 on your modem 5 rear panel see Table 7 3 Rear Panel Switches later in this chapter the controlling modem still has full front pan
204. he modem ignores all parity bits it receives However all message field characters in modem responses have parity bits Parity is selected through the Parity option The Parity and V25 Char options are in the ACU OPT S menu of the front panel display Terminal o 3 Legend SYN Synchronization Character STX Start of Text ETB End of Block Intermediate Response ETX End of Text Last Response LSN1 555 4231 ETB LSN2 555 3030 ETB LSN3 555 4011 ETX Figure 8 4 Using the RLM Command in a Character Oriented Frame Format 8 11 3 SYNC CHARACTER ORIENTED FRAME FORMAT The sync character oriented frame is illustrated in Figure 8 4 All commands and indications are preceded with at least two synchronizing SYN characters followed by one start of text STX character All commands from the DTE must be followed by an end of text ETX character The modem uses an end of block ETB character for intermediate responses to a command and an ETX character for the final response to a command If the modem receives a block check character BCC it s ignored The modem doesn t use BCC characters in its responses If the modem receives either a framing or parity error it ignores the command and sends no indication to the DTE If a command is entered incorrectly or the modem cannot execute the command entered the modem responds with the Invalid response described in V 25 bis Responses in the Addressed Mo
205. he Modem toa Dial Emi suere er eorr ree eh o ep pepe 13 3 5 3 Attaching a Ferrite Cable for etd eb ener tede pressus Lek baiuli 13 3 5 4 Connecting tbe Modem to Leased Line aessa asana 14 3 9 0 Connecting the 14 14 E 15 4l Before Yo RR 15 AD 15 425 16 AA Front Panel 17 45 JNawugaung the Front Panel Menu TEG aee th go 17 d0 Remote ACCESS Reset eesosa E E REEE REES 19 9 IELO o 19 4 0 2 Casesin Which Remote Access Besetas 20 Gonhgunne for Your Applicator eR he posta teo aeta 20 TOME IA C M 20 49 re ender 2 10 MN 22 4 11 Option Set
206. hen using the V 25 bis ACU the modem responds to the DTE with messages Table 8 7 describes the responses and conditions under which they appear for information on the TERMINAL menu You must set the V25Form option in the ACU OPT S menu to either Bitsync or Charsync for sync DTEs or Async for async DTEs The DTR option setting depends on the call establishment method you plan to use Table 8 5 describes these settings 8 10 3 ADDRESSED MODE To use the addressed mode you must set the front panel display s DTR option to Esc Disc High or 108 2 With the DTR option is set to High the modem is always ready to execute V 25 bis commands On to off DTR transitions from the DTE do not disconnect the modem from the line If the DTR option is set to 108 2 the DTE must turn Table 8 6 V 25 bis Commands Command Description Connect Incoming Call This command instructs the modem to connect to an incoming call When you enter this command the modem answers an incoming call immediately If you do not answer an incoming call with this command the modem acts according to the Answer option in the ACU OPT S menu of the modem front panel display If you enter the CIC command and there is no incoming call the modem responds with the INV INValid response DTR from off to on before the modem can execute V 25 bis commands On to off DTR transitions disconnect the modem from the telephone line Table 8 5 DTR Option
207. hich are described in Chapter 6 OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Longspace AT amp G Guard Tone AT amp L Line Type AT amp X Clock AT AP Adaptive Rate Auto AT CA Answer Originate Mode AT FC Fast Call AT LS Low Speed AT MD PSTN Signaling AT MM Modulation Mode AT MN Minimum Rate AT MX Maximum Rate AT RT Retrain CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation MODULATION OPT S 4 4 gt Restore Off 1 2 3 4d LtoD Low Fast A P FP 108 1 High Fast FP 116 High Slow FP Auto 4L FP 108 ACU FP 116 ACU RESTORAL OPT S 4 EC DC 5 D to L Manual 1 2 3 4d 15 1 min bd Always 4 Hold Dialine Off A Ans Rest LL Fail A 30 min 2 min 1 hour 3 min 2 hour 4 min 4 hour 5 min 4L SDC Figure 7 4 RESTORAL OPT S Menu 7 5 Restoral Options Figure 7 4 illustrates the RESTORAL OPT S menu RESTORAL OPT S menu options control initiation ming and connection parameters that your modem uses to communicate over a dial line when leased line problems occur The modem can be used in V 22 bis at 2400 or 1200 bps or V 34 at 28 000 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 or 9600 bps modulation modes as both a leased line modem with dial restoral capability or a dial line modem configured for restoral RESTORAL OPT S menu options listed below have AT command equiv
208. hout data transfer to or from the DTE 530 815 The inactivity timeout is controlled by the value set in S Register 30 AT SL Error Correction ID ED DC OPT S eee The AT SL ID command lets you set the identification number that modems exchange when they attempt to establish an MNP link AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Default 0 The modem identifies itself with a generic MNP identification number Use this setting unless you re certain that the remote modem s is a Codex modem Codex 1 The modem identifies itself with a special MNP identification number assigned to Codex modems only This lets one Codex modem recognize another during an MNP link negotiation AT SM Data Transfer Mode mons AT SM Mode command sets the MODEM 32Fast s data transfer mode for async or sync applications The setting you choose governs the modem 5 use of error correction Note To enable the MODEM 32Fast one of the reliable data transfer modes Mode Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Dependent Auto Reliable must be selected These modes are described in this section Caution A characteristic of error correcting modems is that they negotiate error correction type and level after the physical connection with a remote modem has been established Upon initial connection to a non error correcting modem the originating error correcting modem attempts to negotiate an error c
209. ial modifier The Pause Delay option AT DP must be set to S8 AT DP4 in order to use the S Register setting This S Register also determines the time duration of eo the pause delay for the character when it s used in an AT command string The modem pauses for the specified time before continuing to process the command string With any one of the dial modifiers if S Register 8 is set to 0 or 1 the pause delay defaults to two seconds S REGISTER 10 CARRIER Loss HANG DELAY Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Set ng 15 Range 1 to 255 S Register 10 determines the length of time in 100 millisecond increments that data carrier must be lost before the modem hangs up Note This applies to V 22 bis 212 V 21 and B103 operation only To use S Register 10 s setting the front panel DCD Loss Dis option AT CD must be set to S10 Also if S Register 10 is set to 255 your modem will not hang up because of a carrier loss Setting the AT CD to 510 enables the DCE disconnect feature for V 32 V 32 bis and V Fast modulation modes For these modes S Register 10 determines the length of time in seconds that it takes the modem to disconnect when the remote modem goes on hook without sending a longspace or PSTN cleardown In Normal or Direct modes 510 must be set between 1 9 seconds For Reliable mode 510 must be set between 1 8 seconds These selections result in Disconne
210. iately and deletes all data from its buffers Note Destructive breaks reinitialize data compression tables for MNP 5 and 42 bis CHAPTER 6 AT Commands Expedited 1 The modem uses nondestructive and expedited break handling It passes the break to the remote site immediately without deleting data from its buffers The modem uses standard break handling It passes the break to the remote site in sequence with any transmit data from its buffers Standard 2 AT CA Answer Originate Mode MODULATION OPT S gt The Mode command determines whether the modem operates as an answer or originating modem Use this option in manual answer manual dial leased line restoral or leased line applications where one modem is set to originate and the other to answer If you change this option during a connection it does not take effect until the next call All option settings are overridden when dialing or answering an incoming call Note With a leased line connection the change takes effect immediately AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Originate 0 Originate The modem operates as an 1 3 originating modem in a manual answer dial application Answer 1 Answer The modem operates as an 2 4 answer modem in a manual answer dial application External The signal from the DTE on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 11 determines whether the modem is in answer or originate mode If the signal is off the m
211. in 25 when a test is in progress AT MD PSTN Signaling AT MD public switched telephone PSTN command determines how m your modem handles disconnect signaling when operating in the V 34 V 32 bis or V 32 modulation mode Je AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 Your modem disconnects without signaling the remote modem On 1 Your modem signals the remote modem to disconnect by sending PSTN cleardown all The following two charts summarize how the settings for the AT MD PSTN and Longspace commands interact to affect the behavior of your modem For V 34 V 32 bis and V 32 Modulation Modes AT MD PSTN On Off ATY Longspace On The modem signals the remote modem to The modem disconnects when it receives space disconnect PSTN and disconnects when it that exceeds 1 6 seconds in duration When receives space that exceeds 1 6 seconds in terminating a call the modem sends continuous duration The modem responds to AT MD space for 4 seconds The modem does respond PSTN signal from the remote modem to the AT MD PSTN signal from the remote mode Off The modem signals the remote modem to The modem disconnects without signaling the disconnect PSTN The modem does not remote modem and without sending continuous disconnect when it receives space that exceeds space for 4 seconds The modem does not
212. in AT amp M AT Form Chapter 6 The remaining ACU OPT S options which you can select only from the front panel are AT AA Manual Auto Answering described immediately following this list AT DA Default Dial Address AT MS AT Messages AT RP Parity AT XC Error Correction Reliable Messages CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation 7 7 1 ACU SELECTION The ACU Select option determines which Auto Call Unit ACU the modem uses Note To enable the MODEM 32FastC choose one of the ACU settings described below select a bit sync data format and select one of the reliable data transfer modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable using the Mode AT SM option Option Setting Description AT The AT auto call unit is used 1 To enable the MODEM 32Fast Select AT ACU Then make sure you select a proper data format using the AT Form AT amp M command The valid selections for sync data formats are Sync Data DTR Dial or Man Dial Refer to Chapter 6 for more details on the AT amp M option V25b The V 25 bis auto call unit is used 3 enable SDC Select V25b Then make sure you select a proper data format using the V 25 Form command discussed in the next section The valid selections for V 25 bis data formats are AsynSync or Bitsync LPDA The LPDA 2 auto call unit is used After selecting LPDA LPDA transmits data synchronously you can enable SDC by selecting one of the reliable data transfer
213. indicate poor quality on the local loop Signs of this are consistent V 32 bis calls which main data carrying signal The phase jitter cannot maintain 14 4 Kbps speeds Persistent parameter measures the analog signal s phase signal to noise ratios above a baseline change from the main data carrying signal s established at the time of installation are referenced phase The shift phase is often indications of poor line quality caused by alternating current components Carrier modulation with another signal during A sudden shift from generally good local calls to transmission causes the change of phase or frequency Range 0 45 degrees with 0 meaning generally poor local calls can indicate that the there 1s no phase ier local TELCO has moved the local loop and the quality of the new loop is inferior Frq Offset Measured in Hz frequency offset is a measure of the incoming signal s deviation from normal carrier Consistently poor connections to one frequency This condition is caused by two data carrier systems that are out of tune with each other Frequency offset is also called frequency shift All operating modes cancel any frequency destination can indicate poor quality at the remote local loop Signs of this are consistent V 32bis calls which cannot maintain 14 4 Kbps offset on the line For example if the line detects speeds an offset of 1 Hz all received signals are adjusted by 1 Hz In all n important th
214. ine option is set to Dial Local Modem Remote Modem Figure 9 6 Local Digital Loopback Test Before starting an LDL test make sure your modem is connected to another modem Otherwise the modem displays Test Denied when you Start the test To run an LDL test 1 Establish a connection with the remote modem 2 Use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 3 Press wr until the modem displays TEST LDL 4 Press The modem displays TEST LDL 5 Press W twice to reach the home display The modem displays TEST data rate T D 6 end the test use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 7 Press The modem displays Test Completed Note The modem performs this test in the normal mode If the modem begins the test when it s operating in either the MNP Reliable or LAPM Reliable mode the modem attempts to restore the Reliable mode after the test To start this test using command enter following command AT amp T3 lt CR gt To stop this test enter 0 lt gt screen displays the message indicating that you ve terminated the test Note You can also automatically terminate this test by entering a non zero value in the Test Timer S Register 18 The function of S Register 18 is valid only when you issue loopback tests with an AT
215. ink iis Dial Wait The modem is waiting before dialing a Utilization Status EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V 24 number 2 Signal Status and CQMS Parameter Status Link Wait A call attempt failed and the modem is waiting before failing the linked telephone Operating Status Messages number Wait attempt failed and the modem is Operating Status messages display modem s waiting the specified interval before opera ng status redialing Callbk Wait The modem is waiting to call back Note The modem automatically displays one of another modem the operating status messages in Table 6 1 Ranging The modem is connected tothe if a front panel key is not pressed within five 2120 da E minutes The R indicates a restoral connection indicates hold of the dial line You can also view Operating Status Retraining messages by pressing y until you reach the Home position Training The modem is training The remote modem has requested a retraining sequence Synchronizing A handshake has failed The modem is pausing before attempting to resynchronize by retraining Tone Detect Disc Wait Disc Rx Wait Disc Tx Wait Off Hook WAIT rate The modem is waiting for access security tones from the remote modem The modem is disconnecting The modem is performing a receive buffer delay The modem is performing a transmit buffer delay The modem is off hook The modem is negoti
216. intain synchronism SYN fills time in the absence of any data or control character Synchronous Data accepted or provided with an accompanying time signal Synchronous Data Compression SDC Synchronous Data Compression SDC is an algorithm that lets the modem run at a DTE rate higher than the DCE rate The modem receives data frames at the originating end compresses and then transmits them at the slower DCE rate The modem then decompresses the data at the receiving end The compression algorithm is derived from the V 42 bis data compression algorithm SDC only applies when sync data is framed in an HDLC SDLCHike format Tail Circuit A point to point second tier circuit directly connected back to back to the remote modem of the first tier circuit You can make this connection by using a DCE DTE crossover cable Training A technique that adjusts modems to current telephone line conditions The transmitting modem sends a special training sequence to the receiving modem which makes necessary adjustments for line conditions Transmission Rate Bits per second passing over a telephone line or other communications circuitry Two Wire A circuit that consists of one pair of wires V 22 bis See CCITT V 22 bis V 24 See CCITT 24 V 25 bis See CCITT V 25 bis V 32 See CCITT V 32 V 32 bis See CCITT V 32 bis V 34 See CCITT V 34 V 42 See CCITT V 42 V 42 bis See CC
217. is test enter the following command AT amp TO CR The screen displays the bit errors followed by the OK message This indicates that you ve terminated the test If the modem s transmitter and receiver were unable to synchronize the pattern the screen displays No Sync Achieved Note You can also automatically terminate this test by entering a non zero value in the Test Timer S Register 18 The function of S Register 18 is valid only when you issue loopback tests with an AT amp T command You cannot use S Register 18 to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel When the test terminates the screen displays lt of errors OK This test will run indefinitely if not programmed to terminate itself through S Register 18 REMOTE DIGITAL LOOPBACK TEST amp Using local DTE data the remote digital loopback RDL test examines the local and remote modems transmit and receive circuitry and the telephone line The modem ignores remote DTE data during the RDL test Important For maximum reliability run the RDL LDL and RDL Pat tests at a data rate of 19 2 Kbps or lower This test is not valid in the Bell 103 or V 21 modulation modes If you attempt to run this test in either of these modulation modes the modem responds with Test Denied As shown in Figure 9 3 this test loops data from local terminal through the system Remote Modem Loc
218. ish a remote configuration session can be caused by the following e The remote modem s AT RA Rmt Acc command is set to Disabled The remote modem is running a test You ve already established a remote configuration session with the remote modem via a different means For example you ve already established a remote configuration session using your AT ACU and you re now trying to use your front panel to do the same thing Initiating a Remote Configuration Session with a Leased Line Modem The leased line remote configuration function makes use of the SET RMT LL ADDR and SRCH RMT LL ADDR menus Before beginning a remote configuration session with a leased line modem you must know the remote modem s address If you have not yet assigned an address to the remote modem or if you cannot find its address see Sections 7 13 6 and 7 13 7 To initiate a remote configuration session with a leased line modem 1 Establish a leased line connection with the remote modem at 7200 bps or greater 2 Press YW to move to the Home position on the front panel menu tree 3 Press wr until the RMT CONFIG OPT S menu appears 4 Press b to display Init Rmt Cnfg 5 Press The modem displays Rmt Address 000 The leftmost 0 is blinking Enter the remote modem s address Using A select the first digit of the leased line modem s address Press to move the cursor to the next digit Use wy again to select the second digit On
219. ister is the last S Register that was accessed using an S Register command or selected using the ATSn command The x must be a number within the S Register s specified range On power up S Register 0 is the selected S Register Note f you try to read the contents of an unused S Register the modem displays S REGISTER 0 RING COUNT ANSWER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 0 Range 0 to 255 This S Register specifies the ring on which the modem automatically answers an incoming call When set to 0 automatic answering is disabled and calls must be answered manually This register has no meaning unless the Answer option under the ACU OPT S is set to Using 50 S REGISTER 1 RiNG COUNT Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only Yes Default Setting 0 Range 0 to 255 This S Register counts the number of rings in an incoming telephone call If your modem is configured to answer using the AT AA command or setting the Answer option to 50 when the contents of S Register 1 equals the contents of S Register 0 the modem answers the call If no ring is received after a country specific time typically eight to 10 seconds the counter is reset to 0 S REGISTER 2 ESCAPE CODE CHARACTER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Set ng 43 Range 0 to 255 The S Register determines the decimal value of th
220. it s operating in the MNP or LAPM Reliable mode it attempts to restore the Reliable mode after the test Note To start this test using an AT command enter the following command AT amp T7 lt CR gt To stop this test enter the following command AT amp TO CR The screen displays the OK message indicating that you ve terminated the test If the modem s transmitter and receiver were unable to synchronize the pattern the screen displays No Sync Achieved Note You also automatically terminate this test by entering a non zero value in the Test Timer S Register 18 The function of S Register 18 is valid only when you issue loopback tests with an AT amp T command You cannot use S Register 18 to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel When the test terminates the screen displays No Carrier This test will run indefinitely if not prepro grammed to terminate itself through S Register 18 DATA MODE PATTERN TEST Using internally generated test patterns to provide data the Data Mode Pattern test separately examines the inbound and outbound halves of the transmission path The modem records data bit and block errors during the test and displays them on the front panel when the test is completed Testing may begin with or without a DTE The modem ignores DTE data during a Data Modem Pattern test Important If your modem is operating in SDC mode see Syn
221. ith the modem Refer to your DTE user s documentation for instructions on changing the data encoding format 4 13 2 CONFIGURATION You can configure your modem for SDC in one of two Ways Select one of the three predefined option sets 2 3 or 4 Leased Use the configuration options Select one of the reliable data transfer modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable Choose an Auto Call Unit ACU AT V 25 bis LPDA or None using the ACU Select option ACU OPT s category Select a bit synchronous data format depending on the type of the ACU you have chosen Refer to Chapters 6 and 7 for additional information about each of the above options Also refer to the sample SDC applications in Section 4 14 Refer to Table 4 4in this chapter for a complete listing of option set defaults 4 13 3 OPTIMIZING NETWORK PERFORMANCE The MODEM 32Fast gives you front panel displays of RX TX throughput and link utilization The values displayed indicate how efficiently the modem uses the link Higher values indicate better link use lower values indicate less efficient link use These values are affected by the attached DTE and protocol characteristics specifically the frame size window size and selected DTE rate Refer to Chapter 7 for a description of how to use the RX TX Throughput and Link Utilization displays We recommend that you experiment with the following items to maximize link
222. ity is a Mark A one is added to each 7 bit character Parity is a Space A zero is added to each 7 bit character no parity AT RS RTS Control TERMINAL OPT S p The AT RS RTS command determines how modem interprets the RTS signal The DTE signals the modem with the RTS on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 4 V 24 Circuit 105 AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Normal 0 The DTE controls data transmission 2 3 4 with RTS High 1 1 The modem sets RTS high Use this setting if the DTE does not provide RTS If you re using Normal or Reliable data transfer mode and RTS CTS flow control this setting is overridden and RTS behaves as if RTS Normal Remote 2 This setting applies to simulated half duplex applications and works only if the remote modem also supports RTS DCD signaling For this application to work properly the DCD option at the remote site must be set to Remote Coordinate your setting with the remote site When the local DTE turns RTS on it forces DCD on at the remote modem The remote modem can only receive data during this period Once the local DTE drops RTS DCD at the remote modem follows The RemRST DCD option lets you choose the type of RTS DCD signaling Note This setting functions as described only when the modem is in the Direct data transfer modem and not using the V 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode If the modem is using V 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode or no
223. l the modem answers it When the DTR signal from the DTE is switched from on to off the modem disconnects from the line 8 13 2 DIRECT DIALING When the DTE turns its DTR signal from off to on and there is no incoming call the modem connects to the line If the Default Dial option is enabled or there is no phone number stored in the selected address the modem connects to the line and negotiates a modulation mode based on the setting of the Mod option If the DTR signal from the DTE is switched from off to on the mode disconnects from the line If you set the DTR option to Tail the modem operates the same as if you ve selected 108 1 The only difference is that the modem automatically answers incoming calls regardless of the DTR signal status 8 14 Manual Answering and Dialing You may choose to dial and answer calls manually Here s how 8 14 1 MANUAL ANSWERING To configure your modem for manual answering use the following procedure 1 In the MODULATION menu set the Mode option to Answer 2 In the TERMINAL OPT S menu set the option to 108 2 or High 3 In the ACU OPT S menu set the Answer option to Manual 4 In the ACU OPT S menu set the Default Dial option to Off To answer a call manually use the following procedure 1 the option is set 108 2 raise the signal at the DTE 2 Answer the call using the telephone connected to the same dial line as the modem
224. la below illustrates how to calculate the per foot capacitance CHAPTER 5 V 34 Cabling Maximum Cable Capacitance pF _ Maximum Cable Capacitance pF Total Cable Length in Feet per foot For example assume you need a 30 foot cable You intend to operate your modem at 64 Kbps After looking at Table 5 1 you determine that the maximum capacitance for the cable is 900 pF According to the formula above divide 900 pF by 30 feet The result is 30 pF per foot 900 pF 30 ft 30 pF ft This gives you the maximum per foot capacitance 30 pF for a 30 foot cable operating at 64 Kbps We recommend that you use our cables to attach your modem s to DTE s Use Table 5 2 to help you select the appropriate cable s for your application Table 5 2 gives you examples of specific cable wire length versus DTE rates for your modem 5 3 DTE Cable Diagnostics This section will help you determine if there is a problem with the DTE cable you ve selected Perform the following steps before you install If you continue to experience problems with data transmission after choosing a cable and running the diagnostics within this section the problem may be with your DTE or modem Refer to the appropriate DTE documentation and Chapter 9 Tes ng Your Modem If your modem is not installed at a host site perform the following steps 1 Enable the AT ACU if not already enabled with async echo on re initializing the modem will a
225. lative humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Interface DTE RS 232C D CCITT V 24 V 28 for speeds up to 19 2 Kbps EIA TIA 562 for speeds above 19 2 Kbps up to 64 Kbps Dial line 8 pin RJ 45 modular Leased line 8 pin RJ 45 modular Phone 6 pin RJ 11 modular Connectors 1 DB25 female 3 RJ 45 2 6 pin DIN Power 90 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 14 watts Size 2 7 H x 6 7 W x 9 6 D 6 9 x 17 x 24 4 cm Weight 3 1 Ib 1 4 kg See Chapter 10 for operating specifications CHAPTER 1 Specifications MODEM32Fatt O 2 Introduction The MODEM 32Fast gives you reliable data communication over 2 or 4 wire leased lines Leased lines also referred to as private lines provide a dedicated connection over telephone lines You can operate your modem by Using front panel keys Using AT commands or commands from an async communications software package on a PC Using 25 bis commands from a synchronous communications software package Using various types of Automatic Calling Interfaces ACUs such as V 25 or LPDA2 Figure 2 1 illustrates the MODEM 32Fast 2 1 Front Panel Operation You can configure operate and test your modem with the front panel keys and LCD display To make the front panel easy to use front panel menus are organized by function 2 2 Option Sets Programmed option sets make it easy to use your modem in common applications including asynchronous and synchronous answ
226. le Disable Glossary ACU Automatic Calling Unit or Auto Call Unit Internal or external to the DCE the ACU is actually a command set interface directly between the attached DTE and the modem that uses the normal DTE DCE interface The ACU lets you control and configure the modem with a DTE Analog Signal In data communications the continuously varying signal such as the human voice that telephone lines transmit To transmit on these lines a computer or teminal s digital output must be converted to an analog signal ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A method of coding digital signals using seven bits or eight bits with parity to generate 96 different characters Asynchronous Data without an accompanying time signal Timing is derived from the async data with character boundaries defined by start and stop bits Auto Answer Automatic answering The modem responds to an incoming call over a dial line and establishes contact with a remote modem Baud The rate at which discrete signal elements are transmitted In async transmission the baud rate equals the bit rate In most sync transmissions the baud rate is some integer submultiple of the bit rate For example in V 22 bis QAM modulation four bits are sent in each baud If the baud rate is 600 V 22 bis transmits at 2400 600 x 4 bits per seconds bps Baudot Code A method of coding digital signals using five bit
227. lso enable the AT ACU with async echo set to on Ensure that speed and parity of the modem and the DTE are identical 2 Send data to the modem from the DTE Note Do not substitute test equipment for the DTE as the DTE s receivers drivers are an integral element in this test Table 5 2 DB25 Low Capacitance Cable Up to Description Up to p Up to Up to Up to Product Code 19 2 Kbps ft 64 0 Kbps ft 96 0 Kbps ft 115 2 Kbps ft Male 25 Male 25 straight through Code TC Male 25 Female 25 straight through Code TC Male 25 Female 25 crossover Code TC Note 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 All of our cables have a conductor capacitance of 11 pF ft and a shield capacitance of 20 pF ft for a total capacitance of 31 pF ft For example operating at a speed of 19 2 Kbps a 50 ft length of cable multiplied by a total capacitance of 31 pF ft yields a maximum allowable cable capacitance of 1550 pF which is acceptable in accordance with Table 5 1 gg 3 If echoed data from modem as received by the DTE matches the transmitted message send the status screen AT ST lt CR gt command 4 If there are no errors in either of the previous tests the cable you selected is appropriate for your application 5 Ifthe transmitted and received messages are different character or framing errors verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table 5 1 Reduce the cable length or capacitance of the cable to th
228. lt CR gt The messages described above are displayed in addition to the OK that is sent when AT command processing is complete Note If this command is the last or only command in a command line an additional OK message follows the above responses ATO LEAVE COMMAND MODE Settings 0 Leave command mode and return online 1 Leave command mode return online and initiate a retrain Format ATOn CR This command can be used only when the modem is in the online escape mode or after a semicolon dial modifier in a dial string The user may leave escape modem and return to data mode by type ATP or ATOO If you want a retrain while returning to data mode you must use ATOI If you use this command while the modem is disconnected from the phone line it responds with NO CARRIER If you issue this command while the modem is in a remote configuration session it responds with ERROR CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces Note If you issue the ATO command after semicolon dial modifier return to command state after dialing the modem trains as an originate modem AT RD REDIAL LAST NUMBER Settings 0 1 Redial last number one time n The maximum number of redials allowed Format AT RDn lt CR gt Settings 0 1 Redial last number one time Using the AT RD command you may redial a failed call n times Your modem redials call until a successful connection is made or until the
229. ly application option set 3 4 7 Bandwidth on demand option set 3 4 8 Note the modem is within a network with a Note BER tests will not operate in an SDC network management system NMS installed check with your system administrator He or she may choose to configure the MODEM 32Fast devices from the NMS If you re not familiar with the modem s front panel refer to Section 4 5 4 13 SDC Pre Operation Notes This section contains important information you need to be aware of BEFORE you use your modem in SDC operating mode Read through this information completely BEFORE you install the modem 4 13 1 OPERATION REQUIREMENTS Caution The modem has an RS 232 EIA 562 electrical interface for connection to external equipment If your DTE does not have an RS 232 interface do NOT under any circumstances connect the modem to non RS 232 EIA 562 device If you make this connection you may seriously damage the modem We make no guarantee of the equipment s integrity if you do not use compatible interfaces If your DTE does not have RS 232 EIA 562 interface you will need an external converter cable MODEM 32Fast modems require framed HDLC SDLCHike data environment because the data is not framed An NRZ data encoding method is supported by the modem If your DTE is configured for the NRZI data encoding method you will have to reconfigure it to the NRZ data encoding method so that it will operate w
230. ly uses a two dimensional scheme V 34 also operates using adaptive intelligence which allows the modem modulation to automatically and intelligently adapt to differences in the telephone line It is the adaptive intelligence that allows V 34 to operate at the higher rates CCITT V 42 Used with full duplex async data transmission V 42 is a CCITT adopted standard that specifies two methods of error correction for modems MNP 4 and LAPM CCITT V 42 bis Used with full duplex async data transmission V 42 bis is a high performance data compression algorithm based on the Lempel Ziv Data Compression algorithm This compression technique is not compatible with MNP 5 or other MNP levels The theoretical limit of V 42 bis is 4 1 compression The actual compression throughput that s achieved with any algorithm including V 42 bis is data file dependent Using V 42 bis the modem continuously monitors user data compressibility If user data is not compressible the V 42 bis algorithm detects this condition and automatically turns data compression off so the data link rate is never less than the modem modulation rate Character A group of bits used to represent one digit letter or symbol often in 7 or 8 bit groups Character Oriented Describes a communications protocol that carries control information encoded in fields of one or more characters Compare with Bit Oriented CodexFAST CodexFAST or 326XFAST modul
231. m displays Rmt Nest Modem xx 8 If the remote modem is in a nest and it s on a dual modem nest card select if itis Modem A on the dual modem nest card or B if it 1s Modem B on the dual modem nest card Select No if the remote modem is a standalone modem or a single modem nest card A failed search for a remote modem s address can be caused by the following The remote modem s Rmt Acc option is set to Disabled The remote modem is running a test 7 13 8 SETTING OR SEARCHING FOR A MODEM S LEASED LINE ADDRESS Before you can use the SET RMT LL ADR and SRCH RMT LL ADDR functions you must know the remote modem s serial number AMODEM 32Fast s serial number can be located three ways 1 Use the front panel Status display 2 Read the serial number label on the underside of the modem 3 Use the AT STO command AT STO COMMAND At the remote modem enter AT STO CR FRONT PANEL At the remote modem display the Status Option Sets Dialing menu Scroll through the status information until you see Display Modem ID Press Use to scroll through the ID numbers until you see Serial On dual modem nest cards the serial number will have an A or B For example the modem will display Serial Serial Serial number Figure 7 16 Locating Modem Serial Number Table 7 3 Rear Panel Switches Switch Number Setti
232. m is in SDC mode When you initiate the following on line tests Remote Digital Loopback RDL Remote Digital Loopback Pattern RDL Pat Data Mode Pattern Local Digital Loopback LAL during an SDC connection the modem falls back to Direct mode Mode Direct AT SM in order to run the test If you set the modem for internal timing Clock Internal AT amp X the DTE clock will be changed to match the DCE rate If you set the modem for external timing Clock External AT amp X the clock rate provided may not match the DCE rate and the test will not function Set Clock Internal temporarily to complete testing and then reset to External To accurately test the integrity of the sync data path while the modem runs loopback tests set it for one of the async buffered modes Mode Normal Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable LOCAL ANALOG LOOPBACK TESTS AT amp T1 The local analog loopback LAL test is an off line test that conforms to the CCITT V 54 specification The test examines the local modem s transmit and receive circuitry by looping local DTE data from the modem 5 transmitter to its receiver see Figure 9 1 If the local modem is connected to a remote modem during an LAL test initiating the LAL test causes the local modem to disconnect During the LAL test you can make your modem appear busy or not busy to calling modems through the LAL Busy Out option If you set LAL Busy Out to
233. m is configured for any one of the AT RE option settings and if the remote modem is a MODEM 32Fast and is not in data mode it answers the call Otherwise it answers the call based upon the Ans Rest option s setting under the RESTORAL OPT S menu When the modem is configured for any one of the AT RE option settings except 108 ACU or 116 ACU and call fails the originating modem disconnects from the dial line and returns to the leased line unless the Auto Redial or Link Phone option is enabled If the Link Phone option is enabled the modem calls the number specified If the Auto Redial option is enabled the modem redials until the call 15 successful or the redials are exhausted If both 12 13 14 the Link Phone f and Auto Redial options are enabled the modem links first and then redials If the modem is configured for 108 ACU or 116 ACU it disconnects from the dial line and remains in the disconnected state until another ACU command is received The Retrain option AT RT under the MODULATION OPT S menu which controls the modem s auto retrain function is set to High BER in Option Set 4 You must enable the Retrain option in the local and remote modems to implement automatic restoral Restore FP Auto Note We recommend that you enable the Retrain option in most applications Setting the Retrain option in both modems to Low BER instructs the modem to retrain when it detects a low bit error rate
234. m is online and operating in an async error correcting data transfer mode The modem is online and operating in a sync error correcting data transfer mode SDC Mode The modem is online and operating in the direct data transfer mode The mode is online and operating in the normal data transfer mode The modem is in command mode and does not have a connection Reliable negotiation failed The modem is attempting to establish a reliable connection CHAPTER 6 Commands Error Correction Data Compression Rates Pressing Wy from the DTE Status display brings you to the Error Correction and Data Compression Status display The following definitions apply EC Message Description LM The modems are connected and using LAPM error correction M1 M4 The modems are connected and using MNP error correction level 1 2 3 or 4 NONE No error correction is being used DC Message Description V42bis The modems are connected and using V 42 bis data compression MNP5 The modems are connected and using MNP Level 5 error correction NONE No data compression is being used Transmit and Receive Throughput and Link Utilization Status Display Pressing W again brings you to the Transmit Tx and Receive Rx Throughput and Link Utilization Status displays kb yyy kb yyy These displays provide the modem s throughput rate in kilobits and the total percent of the analog channel currentl
235. m the local modem to the DTE through the CTS signal The modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full The DTR signal has no impact on flow control in sync applications XON XOFF Pass Through Flow Control The local modem and DTE operate flow control by passing characters embedded in the data stream between them The characters are then passed through PT to the remote site to be acted upon The XOFF character signals the transmitting device to stop sending data the XON character allows the receiving device to start sending data Check your DTE s manual to verify if the DTE recognizes XON XOFF flow control Note Pass through flow control must be used with caution when Mode Normal and Modem Flow On because XON XOFF characters are acted on by the remote modem at its DCE port Pass through flow control isn t applicable in sync data compression mode If sync data compression is enabled and you select XON XOFF PT the modem behaves as if flow control were disabled Transmit Clock This selection applies only if the modem is operating in SDC mode When the Tx Clk flow control option is selected the modem uses a transmit clock for flow control based on available buffer space The transmit clock is stopped when the buffers are full inhibiting the flow of data from the DTE It s started again when buffer space is available Note This option is operational only when internal timing has been selected Clock Internal
236. mand expires the modem hangs up and displays CHAPTER 6 Commands BUSY The length of time between finishing dialing and displaying the BUSY message is the amount of time it takes the modem to detect the busy signal If the modem does not detect data carrier before the time specified by AT TT Call Timeout command expires the modem hangs up and displays NO CARRIER The length of time between finishing dialing and displaying the NO CARRIER message is the amount of time it takes the modem to detect ringback plus the amount of time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command If data carrier is detected the modem displays a speed specific connect message If the modem is configured for error correction and 1 or AT XC2 Msg Short or Long the modem displays the suffix RELIABLE or RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy ATY Longspace Disconnect The ATY Longspace command enables the long space disconnect function Refer to the AT MD command MODULATION OPT S eee me AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not disconnect all when it receives space that exceeds 1 6 seconds in duration When terminating a call the modem does not send continuous space for 4 seconds On 1 The modem disconnects when it receives space that exceeds 1 6 seconds in duration When terminating a call the modem sends continuous space for 4 seconds ATZ Selecting an Option S
237. martCom III SmartCom II RELAY Gold Modem Flow On Flow XON XOFF Speed Conver Off Modem Flow Off Flow Off Speed Conver Off Modem Flow Off Flow Off Speed Conver Off Use with MNP or LAPM connections only Use with MNP or LAPM connections only Crosstalk XVI Crosstalk 4 ProComm Plus ProComm Mirror III Dyna Mite SmarTerm 320 SmarTerm 220 PC TALK 4 BitCom Crosstalk XVI Crosstalk 4 SmartCom SmartCom II RELAY Gold ProComm Plus ProComm Mirror III Dyna Mite SmarTerm 320 SmarTerm 220 PC TALK 4 BitCom Normal Modem Flow On Flow XON XOFF Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Optional Speed Conver Optional DTE DCE Modem Flow Off Flow Off Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Optional Speed Conver Optiona DTE DCE Modem Flow Off Flow Off Speed Conver On Modem Flow Optional Flow Optional Speed Conver Optional DTE DCE Use with MNP or LAPM connections only Use with MNP or LAPM connections only Use with MNP or LAPM connections only Use with MNP or LAPM connections only CHAPTER 4 Getting Started PRIMARY AS 400 CONFIGURATION Your modem can be configured and operated from an attached PC or other DTE running the appropriate communications software package for your application You can configure and operate your modem using the AT and 25 bis command sets via the normal DTE interface 4 18 1
238. minutes A leased line modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 3 minutes while testing the leased line 4 min 4 A dial modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 4 minutes A leased line modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 4 minutes while testing the leased line 5 min 5 A dial modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 5 minutes A leased line modem configured for 4L Default restoral holds the dial line for 5 minutes while testing the leased line CHAPTER 6 Commands AT LA DTE Circuit 141 TERMINAL OPT S gt eee DTE Ct 141 AT LA DTE Ct 141 command controls whether or not the local DTE can send the modem into a local analog loopback by sending a signal on V 24 Circuit 141 Pin 18 The DTE must support Circuit 141 in order to use this option Note Alocal analog loopback test initiated via DTE Circuit 141 is overridden by front panel or AT test commands AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem does not respond to a all signal on Circuit 141 Pin 18 On 1 An off to on transition on Circuit 141 Pin 18 causes the modem to initiate a local analog loopback test An on to off transition on V 24 Circuit 141 Pin 18 takes the modem out of a local analog loopback test AT LC Line Compensation TELCO OPT S gt Ip The AT LC Line Compensation command lets the modem compensate for the effects of low loss in the
239. mmand Setting Setting RJ11C 0 Description This 6 pin modular jack type is the most common permissive data mode voice jack arrangement found in the home or office It operates on a single line bridged tip and ring voice or low speed data application service This 8 pin modular jack type is the most common programmable data mode data jack arrangement It lets you use an exclusion key telephone This jack also operates on a single line bridged tip and ring voice or low speed data application service This 6 pin modular jack type is a special permissive data mode jack arrangement that lets you use an exclusion key telephone RJ45S 2 RJ16CS 3 RJ4MB 4 This 8 pin modular programmable data mode jack arrangement supports Make Busy operation Using this jack type you can make the modem appear to be off hook to the central telephone office AT amp L Line Type MODULATION OPT S gt eee AT amp L Line command sets modem s telephone line type If you change this option while the modem has a dial line connection the change does not take effect until you disconnect the line If a call fails when the modem is configured for any one of the AT RE option settings except 108 ACU or 116 ACU the originating modem disconnects from the dial line and returns to the leased line unless the Auto Redial or Link Phone options are enabled AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Dial 0 The
240. mmediately after entering the access security password some modems expect to receive a ringback tone from the answering modem AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Disable 0 No ringback tone is sent to the remote all modem prior to sending an answer back tone Enable 1 After receiving the access security password the answer modem sends a ringback tone to the remote modem prior to sending an answer back tone The answer modem does not send a ringback tone to the remote modem when the answer modem hangs up prior to a callback AT ZV Password Verification The AT ZV PW Verify command determines whether the access security feature is enabled If ACCESS SECURITY gt eee PW Verify E access security is enabled this option selects the method used to verify a password AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Dis 0 Password and callback features are all disabled Intern 1 A single password stored in modem memory is checked against the received password This password is stored in modem memory using the AT ZI Enter Group PW command Mngr Only The network management system accessible verifies the received password using Although displayed at the modem this network selection is not accessible by the front management panelor AT ACU system 7 Front Panel Operation 7 1 Introduction This chapter describes the MODEM 32Fast s front panel options that do not have an associated
241. modem communicates over dial 1 2 3 4D lines in dial applications only 2W Lease 1 The modem communicates over a 4L 2 wire leased line The ACUs AT and V 25 bis are not functional when the modem is connected to a leased line The modem communicates over a 4 wire leased line The ACUs AT and V 25 bis are not functional when the modem is connected to a leased line 4W Lease 2 Data Format gt eee AT amp M Form command determines data format when the ACU Select option is set to AT Note To enable 32FAST SDC if not using one of the predefined option sets select the AT ACU Then make sure you select one of the sync data formats Sync Data DTR Dial or Man Dial described below Also make sure you select one of the reliable data transfer modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable using the Mode AT SM option AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Async 0 The modem is compatible with async all DTEs and uses the AT command set and auto call functions This setting is for terminals capable of communicating either sync or async over the same serial port When disconnected from the dial line communication between the modem and DTE is async The AT command set and auto call functions are used to establish calls Once in data mode the modem exchanges data synchronously with the remote mode An on to off DTR transition causes
242. modem negotiates a connection in the V 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode Normal mode is used in async applications Direct mode is used in sync applications Spd AutoRel 4 Speed Dependent Auto Reliable Once the local modem connects with the remote mode it attempts to establish an error corrected link If a connection is established at 1200 bps or less Normal mode is used in async applications Direct mode is used in sync applications During data mode the Speed Dependent Auto Reliable modem uses speed conversion if enabled This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds Enable terminal flow control when operating in the Auto Reliable mode El CHAPTER 6 Commands AT SR RTS DCD Remote Signaling ier Ip AT SR RemRTS DCD command allows two types of PN signaling It s valid only when the RTS or DCD option is set to Remote AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Codex AT SRO The Codex option setting lets you all configure the modem for Codex proprietary signaling V 13 AT SR1 This setting allows signaling that is compliant with CCITT V 13 for sync applications only AT ST AT amp V Modem Status Display See the AT amp V command description in this chapter AT TD Throughput Delay Minimization TERMINAL OPT S gt RemRST DCD b The AT TD Throughput Delay Minimization command lets you improve the modem s performance
243. modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speeds Auto Reliable using the Modem AT SM option None No auto call unit is used 2 4 To enable SDC Select None Then make sure you choose the sync data format using the NoACU Form option discussed later in this section 7 7 2 V 25 Bis DATA FORMAT The V25 Form option determines data format when the ACU Selection option is set to V25b Note enable SDC Select V 25 bis ACU Then make sure you choose one of the sync data format AsynSync or Bitsync described below Also make sure that you select one of the reliable data transfer modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable using the Modem AT SM option Option Setting Description Async Modem is compatible with async DTEs AsynSync Modem dials calls asynchronously but data is passed synchronously Bitsync The DTE uses the bit sync HDLC like protocol all outlined in the CCITT V 25 bis specification uses the character sync protocol outlined in the CCITT V 25 bis specification Note Charsync is not available for SDC operation If Charsync is selected a direct sync connection will be made regardless of the setting of the Mode AT SM option Note For all V25 Form options settings the modem uses the V 25 bis ACU if you also set the DTR option to 108 2 Discon Reset Esc or High 7 7 3 No ACU DATA FORMAT The NoACU Form option determines the format of the data when th
244. n pushed 10 DTR end restoral 11 End Restoral 116 12 Offline test initiated 13 Training failure 14 Security failure Invalid Password 15 Security callback 16 End Restoral Auto 17 Error correction link 18 Already connected 19 Dial aborted 20 Busy tone detected 21 No dial tone detected 22 Longspace detected 23 Dial aborted due to an incoming call 24 DTR not in proper state 25 Number on Forbidden or Delayed list 26 Retrain threshold exceeded 27 Answer Originate mode changed Pin 11 28 No stored number to dial 29 Test in progress 30 Callback in progress 31 FSK and sync data modes incompatible 32 Semicolon detected in dial strong 33 Answer back tone detect timeout no ringback tone 34 Answer back tone detect timeout ringback tone detected 35 Answer back tone detect timeout no call progress 37 Answer back tone detect timeout busy after ringback 38 Denied manager down 39 Error correction link retransmission limit 40 Error correction link remote requested 41 Error correction link no valid packet received 42 Error correction link establishment error 43 Error correction link accept or timeout 44 Error correction link negotiation failure 45 Error correction link protocol violation 46 Error correction link bad parameter 47 Error correction link data compression error 48 FSK and reliable data modes not valid 49 Restoral DTR 50 Restoral Circuit 116 51 Restoral Au
245. nd does not consume user bandwidth The modem supports a daisychain network management interface reducing the hardware required to connect modems to the network management system 2 6 Restoral For critical leased line applications requiring backup you can use two modems in a point to point configuration and take advantage of data speeds of V 32 bis modulation mode If the leased line fails your modems can automatically reroute data traffic through a public switched telephone network PSTN over a single 2 wire dial line This integral dial line feature guarantees that data will continue to flow if a leased line fails minimizing network downtime 2 7 Automode Multimode Using the Automode Multimode feature the modem can automatically negotiate the highest common modulation speed within a given modulation mode with a connected modem 2 8 AT Commands Using the AT compatible command set you can command the modem to dial and receive phone calls In addition to the normal AT commands the MODEM 32Fast has an extended command set to include important operational parameters used in configuring the advanced features of the modem 2 9 V 25 bis ACU For sync auto calling the modem features an Auto Call Unit ACU compliant with CCITT V 25 bis You can also use the V 25 bis ACU with async data terminal equipment DTE 2 10 LPDA2 This feature lets you use the modem IBM dial and leased line restoral applic
246. ng Function Off up modem operation On down EIA TIA 232 D Pin 23 is set as a data indicator EIA TIA 232 D Pin 23 is set for data rate input Setting Switch 1 to this position has no effect on Off up incoming calls Busy Out select A signal on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 25 makes the modem appear busy to Note The DTE Pin 25 option AT LT TERMINAL OPT s category must be set for DTE Pin 25 Busy to enable the Busy Out select feature The AT amp J Telco option command must be set to Test Indicator Signal V 24 Circuit 142 Select The modem signals to the terminal on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 25 V 24 Circuit 142 when a test is in progress Note The DTE Pin 25 option AT LT TERMINAL OPT s category must be set for DTE Pin 25 Test to enable the Busy Out select feature The AT amp J Telco option command must be set to 44 Off up On down Front panel enable The front panel functions normally Front panel disable You can only check the status displays Note If your modem is under remote configuration control by another Modem 32FAST the controlling modem retains full front panel control of your modem Off up On down Normal password protection applies Reinitializes modem to its factory settings Use this when your forget your password and need to unlock the modem from password protection Off up On down The AT and V 25 bis or LPDA 2 command sets can be used from an attached te
247. ng Setting Description Off 0 The modem flow control is not used On 1 The modem periodically sends XON all signals to the remote modem when it is able to receive data When the modem becomes unable to receive data it sends an XOFF signal to the remote modem Likewise the modem acts according to XON XOFF signals received from the remote modem by starting or stopping the transmission of data AT MM Modulation Mode MODULATION OPT S gt eee The AT MM Mod command determines the modem s data transmission in modulation mode Changing modulation mode resets the AT MX Max Rate and AT MN Min Rate commands to their defaults for the modulation mode selected AT Option Command Setting Setting Description V 34 Auto 10 The modem negotiates the highest all common connection in one of the Default following modulation modes V 34 V 32 bis V 32 V 22 bis Bell 212 V 21 or Bell 103 depending on the setting of the Low Speed option The modem negotiates the highest common connection in the proprietary modulation mode V 34 V 32 bis Auto 0 The modem negotiates the highest all common connection in one of the following modulation modes V 32 bis V 32 V 22 bis Bell 212 V 21 or Bell 103 depending on the setting of the Low Speed option V 34 only 11 Auto V32 1 The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation modes V 32 V 22 bis Bell 212 V 21 or Bell 103 de
248. ng overrides this setting and sets the Dial option to Tone or Pulse Note Do not use the Auto setting if you are in a PBX environment If a dial tone is detected after the first digit the phone number will be redialed as a pulse which may not be recognizable by the PBX CHAPTER 6 AT Commands ATQ Result Code ACU OPT S gt eee The ATQ Rslt Code command selects whether result codes including Call Progress messages are displayed AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Enable 0 Result codes are displayed at the all DTE Disable 1 Result codes are not displayed at the DTE Orig 2 Result codes are output to the DTE only when operating as an originate modem ATS S Register Data 9600 T D gt eee The ATS S Reg xxx command lets you view set the various S Registers that the modem supports S Registers contain values that determine and reflect how the modem operates and executes commands You can view and change S Register values via the AT commands described in this section or through front panel operation If an invalid S Register is entered the modem responds with an OK but no action occurs See Sevtion 7 13 10 for details on how to use numeric entry to enter the appropriate S Register For a full description of S Registers see Section 8 9 ATT Dial Type See the AT command description earlier ATV Result Code Format b 4 1
249. ng the speeds available on the DDS circuit When the modem is used as a restoral device for CSU DSUs as shown in Figure 4 4 select SDC Option Set 2 in the local and remote modems This places the modems in external timing as digital services typically provide network timing Note the following When this option set is selected for CSU DSUs the DSU s restoral configuration should be set to Timing Internal n this case the DTE rate must be set for a constant rate as provided by the network Defaults of 56 64 Kbps For proper operation be sure to enable Option Set 2 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that the Mode AT SM option is set the same in both the answer and originate modems The modem supports single channel environments only For example only Port 1 of the CSU DSU can be restored To initiate restoral set the CSU DSU to Normal mode The CSU DSU s network management channel is virtually a time division multiplexed data stream which cannot be compressed The modem may have the ARS feature enabled In this case ARS determines the link speed not the DTR rate or resul ng throughput Figure 4 4 shows a similar configuration using an external switch versus CSU DSU s internal A B switch Network configuration select SDC Option Set 2 and operation with an external switch are identical to the configuration and operation described for CSU DSU restoral CHAPTER 4 Get
250. ngth is required we recommend that you use a low capacitance type cable If the MODEM 32Fast is installed at a host site Set Modem option AT SM EC DC OPT S category to Reliable Reliable mode ensures that the modem transmits data during this test Note Do not initiate loop tests while you re performing the diagnostic procedures in this section 2 Follow steps 1 3 in the section above 3 Initiate dial connection with the host site 4 If there are no errors in data transmission the cable at the host site is most likely appropriate for your application 5 If the transmitted and received messages are different character or framing errors verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 Reduce the cable length or capacitance to the theoretical limit and retry the steps listed above If the same cable length is required we recommend that you use a low capacitance type cable Note When you re troubleshooting you should perform these tests prior to an LAL or RDL test EIE eee 10 Operating Specifications 10 1 Introduction This chapter contains operating specifications for your MODEM 32 Fast 10 2 Operating Mode Characteristics Telephone Line Type 2 wire dial 2 wire leased 4wire leased V 34 MODULATION MODE Data Rate 28 8 26 4 24 21 6 19 2 16 8 14 4 12 9 6 7 2 4 8 Kbps Baud Rate 2400 baud Carrier 1800 Hz Modulation Quadrature Am
251. nnect Incoming Call command and the modem does not detect an incoming call the modem responds with INV List of Stored Forbidden numbers When you issue the RLF command the modem precedes each forbidden number currently on the forbidden list with LSF LSF 8005551212 In this example the number 8005551212 is on the forbidden call list Table 8 8 describes each response and the conditions under which each appears The Call Failure response that s displayed depends on which Call Progress option setting you ve selected Table 8 8 Call Failure Responses Response Definition Call Failure Indication ABort Call The modem aborted a call attempt for one of the following reasons was pressed during dialing The modem did not detect a dial tone Acharacter was received from the DTE during dialing async only Call Failure Indication DCE Busy The local modem detected an incoming ring after a dialing command was entered Or a command was entered at the DTE during manual answering or dialing Call Failure Indication Engaged Tone The local modem detected a busy tone after dialing If you set the Call Progress option in the ACU OPT S menu of the front panel display to 0 1 or 2 the modem does not use the CFIET failure response List of Stored Delayed numbers When you issue the RLD command the modem precedes each number currently on the delayed list with LSD and follows each number with th
252. ns that belong to option sets a number or A for all in parentheses appears beside the selection A number tells you for which option set s the setting is the default If A appears by a setting it means that the setting is the default setting for all four option sets As an example the option setting portion of the DTR Control AT amp D option appears as follows Option Setting High 1 4 Escape Discon Reset Tail 2 108 1 3 108 2 The defaults for the DTR Control option for the modem are High for Option Sets 1 and 4 Tail for Option Set 2 108 1 for Option Set 3 For options that do not belong to option sets the default setting is designated by a D for default in parentheses by the setting The following sections describe industry standard AT commands that begin with AT Note Throughout this chapter AT commands are listed in table format In the Command Setting column the AT reference has been omitted however be sure to enter the entire AT command For example AT ZCO 6 2 Industry Standard AT Commands that begin with AT ATD DiALING AN UNSTORED TELEPHONE NUMBER DATA 9600 T D Enter Then Dial The Enter Then Dial command lets you dial a telephone number up to 50 characters without storing it in your modem s telephone book The AT Command You can dial a telephone number directly from your keyboard To do this enter the ATD comm
253. nsures that the answer modem has picked up before the password is transmitted The password 1111 is transmitted followed by the 0 code which tells the answer modem that the entry is complete To dial the answer modem proceed as follows 1 Enter the answer modem s telephone number into the calling modem 2 Once your modem has dialed the answer modem s number you must instruct it to wait for the answer modem to answer the call To do this use the dial modifier or if your modem does not support the dial modifier use the pause K dial modifier The dial modifier instructs your modem to wait for five seconds of silence after hearing the ringback tone This ensures that the answer modem has picked up the call 3 Enter the access security password 4 Include code 0 in the string telling the answer modem that password entry is complete Note The password will not be accepted and the call will be disconnected if the 0 code is not at the end of the dial string If the answer modem s Callback option AT ZC is set to Intern n it will disconnect after validating the access security password and dial the number stored in memory location n Before setting the answer modem s strap in option the calling modem s dial string must have a semicolon followed immediately by a capital H The H must be at the end of the calling string for example 5552345 1111 0 7 12 3 THE CALLING MODEM I
254. ntain only the following error code 0x08 This sense byte is sent when the modem has received an invalid command 8 17 2 DISCONNECT RESPONSE DATA FIELD When a sense byte other than 0x00 is sent in the response there is no response data field When the disconnect is successful a sense byte of 0x00 is sent in the response and a data field is included The format of this data field is as follow Bytes 0 1 Modem type OxYYYY Byte 2 Modem model code 0xZZ Byte 3 0x20 Indicates whether or not the modem received a Disconnect command while in a disconnect state 0x80 Indicates whether or not the modem received a Disconnect command while not in a disconnect state The MODEM 32Fast lets you select the modem type to be returned in the data field You can configure the modem type YYYY for 326x the default setting or 7855 The modem model code ZZ reflects the model for the appropriate modem type selected Use the LPDA2 ID op on to make the modem type selection For modem type 7855 the model code is always 10 For modem type 326x the model code reflects the number of ports This is always 01 MODEM 32Fast 9 Testing Your Modem 9 1 Introduction This chapter describes tests that help you diagnose problems faults in your modem s circuitry and in your data communications system The tests include an automatic self test loopback tests and pattern tests 9 2 Quick Tests Before your perform any o
255. nter AT ND lt CR gt THE FRONT PANEL Select the address you want displayed at View Phone See Section 7 13 10 for details on how to use numeric entry AT OC External Control The AT OC Ext command chooses which pin the AT OP Ext Select command responds to Note If the AT OP is set to 0 this command has no effect AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Pin 14 0 The Ext Select option loads an option all set based upon the transition of Pin 14 This setting overrides the Restore command setting FP 116 or FP 116 ACU Pin 20 1 The Ext Select option loads an option set based upon the transition of Pin 20 When you use this setting set the AT amp D DTR command to High This setting overrides the AT RE Restore command settings FP 108 1 and FP 108 ACU and all AT amp D DTR command settings except High CHAPTER 6 Commands AT OP External Option Set Select TERMINAL OPT S gt The AT OP Ext Select also known as 116 Select command controls how the modem uses an external pin to select option sets The pin used is defined by the AT OC Ext Cntrl command Note Upon power up if the modem is configured for Power Up In Old it reads the AT OC Ext Control option and sets the option set accordingly AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The AT OP Ext Select command is all disabled nH mL 1 12 where There are 12
256. odem see Table 4 6 Table 4 6 discusses the following communications software packages Crosstalk XVI Version 3 71 Crosstalk MK 4 Version 2 00 Mirror III Version 3 7 Dyna Mite Version 40L SmarTerm 320 Version 1 1A PC TALK Version 1 36 BitCom Version 2 6A SmartCom III Version 1 2A SmartCom II Version 3 1 SideKick Voice only Version 1 56A RELAY Gold Version 4 ProComm Version V2 1 ProComm Plus Version 1 1b 4 15 2 COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE PACKAGES OPERATING NOTES Table 4 6 lists specific guidelines to follow when operating the modem with various communications software packages To install and operate your software package follow the instructions that accompany it To ensure proper modem operation use the following V 34 specific information to adjust various modem option settings Note Depending on the communications software package version that you re using the modem may be an available selection for the Modem Type If the MODEM 32Fast is not an available selection choose the Modem Type selection recommended in the table Table 4 5 Communications Software Packages NOTES 1 The information in this table is for IBM PC or AT applications 2 NA means that no application example is provided Crosstalk XVI Version 3 71 Select Software s Modem Type Speed Range for Communications Software Package Make These Software Changes Modem Modem Make These
257. odem is in originate mode If the signal is on the modem is in answer mode Auto answer in originate The modem configures itself as an originating modem after auto answering a call In leased line operation the modem functions as if it is set to originate calls External 2 Auto 3 Note The functions provided by this setting only apply when your modem auto answers AT CD DCD Loss Disconnect TERMINAL OPT S gt eee DCD Loss Dis gt The AT CD DCD Loss Dis command determines how long the modem waits before it disconnects due to loss of carrier DCD If the S10 setting is selected and set to 255 or Off the modem attempts to retrain immediately For V 34 V 32 bis and V 32 the AT CD DCD Loss Dis command determines how long the modem waits for a retrain to complete For the 3s and 7s selections the time is forced to 15 seconds If the S10 setting is selected and set to 255 or Off the modem never disconnects due to a carrier loss AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off 0 The modem will not disconnect due to a carrier loss 3s 1 The modem hangs up if it loses carrier for 3 seconds 75 2 modem hangs up if it loses carrier for 7 seconds 510 3 The modem checks the value stored in S Register 10 to determine when it disconnects due to carrier loss See S Registers in Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces for more information about S Register 10 Connect M
258. of time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command If the modem does not detect data carrier before the time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command expires it hangs up and displays NO CARRIER If the modem does detect data carrier it displays either CONNECT for setting 0 or a speed specific connect message for setting 1 If your modem is using error correction and the AT XCI or AT XC2 Rel Msg Short or Long command the modem also displays the suffix RELIABLE Or RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy ATX2 Call Progress 2 The modem goes off hook and looks for a dial tone If it detects a dial tone the modem dials If the modem does not detect a dial tone it hangs up and displays NO DIALTONE After processing all of the characters in the dial string including dial modifiers the modem looks for data carrier for the amount of time specified by the AT TT Call Timeout command If data carrier is not detected before the time specified by the Call Timeout option expires the modem hangs up and displays NO CARRIER If data carrier is detected the modem displays a speed specific connect message If the modem is configured for error correction and AT XCI or AT XC2 Rel Msg Short or Long is selected the modem displays the suffix RELIABLE Or RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy ATX3 Call Progress 3 The modem goes off hook waits for the amount of time specified by the AT BD Blind Dial command and then
259. om off to on when it connects to the dial line This process initiates a call When the modem disconnects from the leased line to answer an incoming restoral it turns Circuit 117 Pin 16 from off to on 7 5 27 CONFIGURING FOR DIAL RESTORAL Option Set 4 the default option set for restoral operation configures the modem as an answer modem in an automatic restoral application for sync DTEs If this configuration suits your application use Option Set 4 as a starting point when you configure the modem See Chapter 4 for details on option sets option settings that apply to normal operation also apply to restoral The procedure outlined in the following sections highlights the options that are critical to dial line restoral operation Be sure you coordinate local installation with the person who is installing the remote modem Note The Restoral Option and its option settings appear on your modem s front panel only if you have the Restoral Option installed 1 Set the Restore option AT RE under the RESTORAL OPT S menu to select the restoral initiation method For automatic restoral be sure to set this option the same in both the local and remote modems Although one modem in the link originates a call and the other answers both modems can initiate or answer a restoral call 2 Configure one modem as the answer modem and one as the originating modem through the Mode option AT CA under the MODULATION O
260. om the DTE If you need to change the RTS CTS delay you will need to reset S Register 26 See Section 8 9 The phone number if you will be calling into the network Any restrictions about when you can call This may be important depending on the telephone company s requirements and restrictions Proper ACU OPT S menu settings This is important depending on your specific application Check with your system administrator for details 4 2 Front Panel Layout The front panel LEDs show the status of important modem interface signals The following sections describe the LEDs the display and the keys Note To operate your modem with the front panel keys the modem must be connected to an AC power source the rear panel power switch must be turned on and rear panel Switches 3 and 6 must be set to the up off position which is the factory default configuration 4 3 Front Panel LEDs There are six LEDs on the front panel You can see the LEDs when the front cover is closed MODEM 32Fast Figure 4 1 Front Cover of the Modem Closed TR Te RETURN ENTER 2 5 AH D Ee Figure 4 2 Front Panel of the Modem with the Cover Open CHAPTER 4 Getting Started LEDs display the real time status of key DTE interface signals If a communication problem occurs these LEDs can help you determine the cause of the problem For troubleshooting information see Chapter 9 Table 4 1 lists the LEDs
261. omatic restoral the originating modem on the leased line determines when restoral takes place The answer modem cannot automatically initiate restoral it can only answer an inbound call thus ensuring that both modems do not try to call each other at the same time Such an occurrence would result in a failed restoral attempt During data transmission the originating modem monitors leased line signal quality by counting the number of retrains both inbound and outbound that occur over a specified time period Note Retrains that cause a change through the Adaptive Rate feature are not counted If the number of retrains over a period of time exceeds the threshold set by the L to D Leased to Dial option or if the modem does not receive answers to its training sequences the originat ing modem initiates restoral by dialing the number stored in its telephone directory based on the setting of the Default Dial option Once the modems are using the dial line the originating modem continues to count retrains on the dial line If the CHAPTER 6 AT Commands AT RP Parity ACU OPT S gt When using ASCII character set you must select the parity used by the modem and DTE The Parity option applies to only async and character sync data formats The modem ignores parity bits if you re using a bit sync protocol but adds parity bits to all data units in the message field in its responses to the DTE
262. on of line deterioration increases as the amount of distortion increases The percentage increases as the amount of noise and or distortion increases An error probability value between 0 and 20 is considered good A value between 21 and 40 is considered fair A value between 41 and 70 is representative of marginal line quality AT amp W Save Changes Creating New Sets Option DATA 9600 T D gt eee Save Changes The AT amp W Save Changes command saves option set that you ve created in the modem s nonvolatile memory The first part of this section describes how to save an option set using the AT amp W command The second part describes how to save an option set from your modem s front panel AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 1 0 1 Save as Option Set 1 all 2 2 Save as Option Set 2 3 3 Save as Option Set 3 4 4 Save as Option Set 4 When you use the AT command or the front panel to select options and you do not save your modifications the modem does not enter them into nonvolatile memory However the modem operates according to these modifications until you do one of the following Choose another option set using the Select Options feature the ATZ command or AT amp D3 command Reinitialize modem s memory using Reinit Memory option for the AT amp F command Power down the modem If you do want to save messages do not turn off modem power until the Sa
263. on of this pin is determined by the setting of rear panel Switch 1 CH input signal has no effect on modem operation External Signal Element Timing Transmit timing signal generated by some sync DTEs providing clock to the local modem See front panel Clock External Timing setting Test Indicate Note For DTE speeds greater than 38 4 Kbps refer to Chapter 3 Installation for information on proper cables and lengths for your application DIAL LINE LEASE LINE PRIVATE LINE AND PHONE CONNECTOR PINOUTS Table 10 2 Network Control Port Connector Pinouts Pin In Ou Not Connected User Special In TXD In TXD Out RXD In RXD Out RTS In RTS Out Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Ground Ground DCD In DCD Out Local modem signals to local terminal when local modem is test The terminal can initiate a Busy Out condition on this circuit The signal s status is determined by the status of rear panel Switch 2 and front panel option DTE Pin 25 configured for Test or Busy DIAL LINE LEASE LINE PRIVATE LINE and PHONE connector pinouts vary by country NC NETWORK CONTROL PORT PINOUTS Table 10 2 describes the In and Out NC Network Control port pinouts In signals use a DCE type interface This type of interface connects directly to a DTE type interface Out signals use a DTE type interfac
264. onses following the next section Call Failure Indication Ring Tone Ringback is detected but the call is not completed due to a timeout Delayed Call The telephone number is on the delayed call list The modem cannot dial the number as instructed The PTT may require the modem to place a number on a delayed call list if a call to that number fails The modem cannot dial a number on the delayed call list until the prescribed time the xxx designation expires or until the power to the modem is turned off and then on again DLOxxx CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 8 10 5 CALL PROGRESS RESPONSES When using V 25 bis the modem indicates a valid connection when it switches to data mode by turning DSR EIA TIA 232 D Pin 6 V 24 Circuit 107 and DCD EIA TIA 232 D Pin 8 V 24 Circuit 109 from off to on In addition to this hardware response you may want to receive call progress responses at the DTE The modem uses the VAL valid and CNX connect messages to indicate call progress You enable the call progress messages through the V25 Resp option in the ACU OPT S menu in the front panel display The following settings for the V25 Resp option apply None The modem does not send any CONNECT messages to the DTE VAL only The modem sends a VAL message when the modems switch to data mode V 25 bis The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message once the remote modem receives an
265. option setting is not accessible from the front panel or AT ACU It is displayed for status purposes only The network management operator configures the option as needed Option Setting Description Disable The modem is not able to verify the password default Enable The modem is able to verify the password using its Group PW stored internally CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation 7 12 2 Ir THE ANSWER MODEM 15 USING THE CALLBACK FEATURE If the answer modem is not using the Callback Feature it is not necessary to provide the answer modem with a number to call back You must however specify the correct password In the answer modem 1 Set PW Verify Intern AT ZV1 ACCESS SECURITY category 2 Enter the access group security password using the Enter Group PW option AT ZI ACCESS SECURITY category Refer to the AT ZI description in Chapter 6 for details on how to enter an access group security password 3 Set the modem to answer incoming calls The modem will answer the call based on how the Answer option AT AA is set ACU OPT S category After setting the answer modem an indicated in steps 1 3 you ll dial the answer modem and provide the access security password When dialing the answer modem you enter a dial string telling the modem how to complete the call A typical non callback dial string appears as follows 5552345 1111 0 555 2345 is the answer modem s telephone number The dial modifier e
266. options control how your modem interacts with the network manager The options in the NETWK CNTL OPT S menu described below can be selected only from the front panel The following sections provide a detailed description of the option settings 7 13 1 OVERRIDE MODE The Override Modem option determines whether your modem can be controlled by the network manager Option Setting Description Off The network manager can attach your modem Once the network manager has attached it front panel control is locked out You can still use front panel keys to ready your option settings and status through the front panel menu tree but you cannot change any option settings If you attempt to change an option setting the modem responds with Net Man Attached AT commands can still be issued to the modem from an attached control terminal but testing and access security AT commands have no effect If you issue a testing or access security AT command the modem responds with Network Management Inhibited The only front panel option setting that can be changed while the network manager is attached is the Override Mode option If you change the setting from off to on you regain control of your modem s front panel Note If the network manager has set your modem s front panel password protection you cannot change the setting of the Override Mode option You can however unlock password protection using the Enter Passwo
267. or AT CN command without specifying a memory location the modem stores the number in address 1 If no telephone number follows the AT CN or AT amp Z command the specified memory location s telephone number is deleted Therefore if you enter AT CN CR Or AT amp Z CR the telephone number stored in memory location 15 deleted THE FRONT PANEL See Section 7 13 10 for details on how to use numeric entry See Section 8 4 for a description of allowable characters AT Commands The following sections describe enhanced AT commands which begin with AT Answer b 4 AT AA Answer command controls whether the modem answers calls automatically or manually AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Manual 0 An incoming call must be answered manually Ring 1 1 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the first ring Ring 2 2 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the second ring Ring 4 3 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the fourth ring Ring 8 4 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the eighth ring Using SO 5 The modem answers an incoming call according to the S Register SO setting AT AP Adaptive Rate MODULATION OPT S gt eee Adaptive Rate The AT AP Adaptive Rate command determines whether the adaptive rate feature is used The Adaptive Rate option selects the optimum data
268. or Radio noise emission from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of Industry Canada Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict bar Industrie Canada TRADEMARKS AT amp T is a registered trademark of AT amp T BitCom is a registered trademark of Bit Software Inc SideKick is a registered trademark of Inprise Corporation is a registered trademark of Symantec Corporation CrossTalk is a registered trademark of Attachmate Corporation VT100 is a trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation Hayes SmartCom II and SmartCom IIT are registered trademarks and Smartmodem 2400 is a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products Inc PC TALK is a registered trademark of Headlands Press Inc IBM AS ADD and NetView are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation Microcom Networking Protocol and are registered trademarks of Microcom Systems Inc SmarTerm is a registered trademark of Persoft Inc An Esker Company RELAY Gold is a registered trademark of VM Personal Computing Any other trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of the trademark owners Table of Contents ly
269. orrected link by sending a link request This request is seen by the non error correcting answer modem and treated as user data The link request characters may appear as a short burst of jumbled data at the answer site Also any data sent by a non error correcting modem during link negotiation will be rejected lost by the error correcting modem in either answer or originate mode Option Setting ___ Setting _______ Description Direct 0 Direct In Direct mode async or sync the modem does not use error correction When the modem operates in Direct mode all of the options in the EC DC OPT S menu are disabled During data mode the DTE speed must match the modem s speed Normal 1 Normal In Normal mode async the modem does not use error correction or data compression The break type is assumed to be standard During data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds Enable terminal flow control when operating in Normal mode The modem flow control should also be enabled using the Modem Flow option Note Selecting Mode Normal results in a Direct sync connection in the MODEM 32Fast Reliable 2 Reliable In an async application with this selection the local modem will connect with the remote modem and attempt to establish an error corrected link During Reliable data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled The loc
270. ors are recorded and displayed on the front panel at the end of the test You may use the LAL Pat test with or without a DTE to test the modem s internal circuitry If the DTE is connected the data that s sent during the test will be ignored Like the local analog loopback test the local analog loopback pattern test causes the modem to disconnect Remote Modem Local Modem Pattern Checker Figure 9 2 Local Analog Loopback Pattern Test To run an LAL Pat test 1 Use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 2 Press yp until the modem displays TEST LAL Pat 3 Press The modem displays TEST LAL Pat You ll hear the modem training if you enable the speaker 4 Press twice to reach the home display The modem displays LAL Training T D briefly and then displays LAL data rate T D For example you may see LAL 9600 T D in the status display 5 To end the test use the front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test Press The modem displays Bit Blk where the number of bit errors and block errors is displayed If the modem s transmitter and receiver were unable to synchronize the pattern the modem displays No Sync Achieved To start this test using an AT command enter the following command AT amp T8 lt CR gt CHAPTER 9 Testing Your Modem To stop th
271. ou determine if there s a problem with the DTE cables you ve selected Chapter 5 specifies how to select the appropriate cables to use in data rates higher than 38 4 Kbps After you select and install the cables perform the following steps before you proceed with installation If you continue to experience problems with data transmission after you choose a cable and run the diagnostics within this section the problem may be with your DTE or modem Note f you install the MODEM 32Fast at a host site see If the MODEM 32 Fast is installed at a host site below for diagnostic information 1 Either enable the AT ACU with async echo set to on or reinitialize the modem Ensure that modem speed and parity are identical 2 Send data to the modem from the DTE Note Do not substitute test equipment for the DTE The DTE s receivers drivers are an integral element in this test 3 If echoed data from the modem as received by the DTE matches the transmitted message send the status screen AT ST lt CR gt command 4 If there are no errors in either of the previous tests the cable you selected is appropriate for your application 5 If the transmitted and received messages are different character or framing errors verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 Reduce the cable length or capacitance to the theoretical limit and retry the steps listed above If the same cable le
272. ou must first unlock the modem either with the AT PN enter password command or from the front panel Proceed with the steps described in Section 4 6 1 to operate the remote front panel 4 7 Configuring for Your Application Depending on the complexity of your application and your specific application requirements and restrictions you must be familiar with what an option set and a communications software package are and how they are necessary to operate your modem Note If your modem is part of a network and you have a network management system installed consult your network manager for configuration information The network manager may want to configure your modem using remote front panel operation eliminating the need for you to configure the unit PREPARING FOR OPERATION The procedures explained in this section assume that you are installing the modem for the first time If the modem has been installed previously and you want to reinstall it in one of the applications provided in this section do the following to reinitialize the modem memory Note Reinitializing modem memory sets the modem back to factory defaults Option Set 1 and deletes all stored telephone numbers from modem memory 1 Press W twice Press b until the modem displays Reinit Memory 2 Press The modem displays Reinit All Mem 3 Press to reinitialize modem memory You can also reinitialize modem memory by entering from your terminal
273. overrides this setting for one incoming call If you enter the DIC command and there s no incoming call the modem responds with the INV INValid response PRNa n PRogram Number This command instructs the modem to store a phone number in a specific address in the modem s nonvolatile memory The modem has nine 1 9 phone number addresses in nonvolatile memory To store a phone number in address 2 issue the following command PRN2 1 555 1234 CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces Table 8 6 V 25 bis Commands continued Table 8 6 V 25 bis Commands continued Command Description Command Description The telephone number can contain up to 50 characters including hyphens or spaces Use the dial modifiers described in the previous section to accommodate special dialing requirements To delete a number from a specific memory address enter the PRN command followed by the address of the number you want to delete For example to delete the number in memory address 1 enter If the RLD command is issued when password protection is enabled and the modem is locked the modem responds with the invalid message INV Also if your PTT does not require delayed numbers and you issue the RLD command the modem responds with the invalid message INV Request List of Forbidden numbers This command instructs the modem to send a list of forbidden numbers to the DTE The PTT may require the modem to place a num
274. owing sequence A pull out main menu figure Figure 6 1 that illustrates all AT AT amp and AT command settings front panel options and option settings A front panel option figure in the left margin that describes how to select a command on the modem s front panel Industry standard AT and AT amp commands that begin with AT Enhanced AT commands that begin with AT A list of the menu s front panel options if any that have AT equivalent control terminal commands NOTE For descriptions of front panel options and option settings that do not have AT command equivalents see Chapter 7 Front Panel Operation Chapter 7 is organized to follow the structure of the front panel menu tree The main menu is divided into sub menu sections that describes the appropriate options and settings For a list of AT commands that do not have front panel equivalents see Non Configuration AT Commands in Chapter 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces ATRV AT EST AT amp V AEST ATDS ATDS AT amp Z ATRCN p gt DTE Rate EC Mode gt Phose Jitter Odg Data DCE Rate 1 0 EC Mode DC Mode Offset 0Hz 0 Tx Level Odbm Select Options 1 Dial From 4 1 Rx 0 Rx level 0dbm Pressing at this display DCDBIRTSIBNCTS Retrains 0 ar Echo 0 01 00 Nr Edo i O Display Modem ID s w rev Phase Roll 0 SNR OdB w SQ 0 0 TEST OPT S v AT amp L
275. panel to gain access to all modem functions Do the following 1 Display Enter Password 2 Press The modem displays Enter PW 0000 3 The cursor on the left most zero is flashing indicating it s selected Using to select digits 0 9 and b to move the cursor to the right enter your new password If should incorrectly enter the password press pand the modem displays Entry Canceled 4 Once you ve entered the password correctly press The modem displays Passwd Unlocked 5 If you should enter an incorrect password modem responds with Invalid Password Your modem relocks the password protected features after five minutes of no activity To lock the modem before the default time expires see the AT PF command AT PT Dial Type See the ATP command description earlier in this chapter CHAPTER 6 Commands AT PW Change Password FP SECURITY gt eee The AT PW Change Password command is used as follows AT PWold password new password lt CR gt If the change is successful the modem responds with OK THE FRONT PANEL 1 Display Change Password 2 Press The modem responds with Old PW 0000 3 The cursor on the left most zero is flashing indicating it is selected Using to select digits 0 9 and gt to move the cursor to the right enter your old password If you re entering a password for the first time enter the factory default password of four zero
276. peeds if required After an hour the modem returns to the leased line Specify the speed at which the modem communicates with the DTE using the DTE rate AT DE option if you wish to use a value other than the default Consult the DTE Rate AT DE option description in Chapter 6 NT For proper operation be sure to select SDC Select SCD Option Set 4 for this application puonSetdin both die localand remote modems and make sure that the Mode AT SM option is set the same in both the answer and originate modems To 56 64 Kbps Bridge Router MODEM 32Fast 28 Kbps MODEM 32Fast Figure 4 6 Point to Point Leased Line Application with Dial Restoral Option Set 4 uu I J P CHAPTER 4 Getting Started 4 14 3 MODEM 32Fast SDC DiAL ONLY APPLICATION In a typical dial application as shown in Figure 4 7 a remote terminal dials up the host for file transfers This lets remote users dial in as needed with a much higher throughput than formerly attainable over the PSTN Alternately the DTE and Host as shown in Figure 4 6 could be nodal equipment including X 25 PADs routers and bridges In this type of configuration the modems are used for remote dial up branch connectivity This is useful for remote offices that wish to upload or download data over the PSTN on an as needed basis Select SDC Option Set 3 for either of these applications Note the followin
277. pending on the setting of the Low Speed option V32 bis only 2 V 32 bis or V 32 modulation mode is used V32 only 3 V 32 modulation mode is used V22 bis only 4 V 22 bis modulation mode is used 212 only 5 Bell 212 modulation mode is used 103 only 6 Bell 103 modulation mode is used V21 only 7 V 21 modulation mode is used AT MN Minimum Rate The AT MN Min Rate command sets the minimum rate at which the modems communicate Settings vary depending on the modulation mode suede you choose but some of the following speeds are available jJ Option Setting AT oe etting Minimum Modem Modulation Rate bps 300 0 1 1209 1 1200 ont 2 2400 4800 3 pus 7200 4 2200 9600 5 9600 2 3 41 12 0 6 12 200 14 4 7 14 400 bu 8 16 800 19 2 9 19 200 aS 10 21 600 0 11 24 000 26 4 12 26 400 ae 13 28 800 Note When the V 34 Auto modulation mode is selected the modem negotiates data rates from 300 to 28 800 bps When the V 34 Only modulation mode is selected the modem negotiates data rates from 9600 to 28 800 bps AT MR AT amp S DSR Control See the AT amp S command description in this chapter AT MS AT Messages v The AT MS Msg command determines when AT connect message is sent to the DTE m Ip AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Before CD 1 The AT connect message is sent to the DTE before DCD is raised all After CD 0
278. plitude Modulation with trellis coding at 7 2 to 28 8 Kbps Quadrature Amplitude Modulation without trellis coding at 9600 bps Phase Shift Key modulation at 4800 bps CCITT V 34 compliant full duplex V 32 BIS MODULATION MODE Data Rate 14 4 12 9 6 7 2 4 8 Kbps Baud Rate 2400 baud Carrier 1800 Hz Modulation Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with trellis coding at 14 4 Kbps 12 Kbps 9600 bps 7200 bps Quadrature Amplitude Modulation without trellis coding at 9600 bps Phase Shift Key modulation at 4800 bps CCITT V 32 bis compliant full duplex V 32 MODULATION MODE Data Rate 9 6 4 8 Kbps Baud Rate 2400 baud Carrier Frequency 1800 Hz Modulation Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with trellis coding at 9600 bps Quadrature amplitude Modulation without trellis coding at 9600 bps Phase Shift Key modulation at 4800 bps CCITT compliant full duplex V 22 BIS MODULATION MODE Data Rate 2 4 1 2 Kbps Baud Rate 600 baud Carrier Frequency Answer Modem 2400 Hz Originate Modem 1200 Hz Modulation Quadrature Amplitude Modulation at 2400 bps Phase Shift Key modulation at 1200 bps CCITT V 22 compliant full duplex V 22 MODULATION MODE Data Rate 1200 bps Baud Rate 600 baud Carrier Frequency Answer Modem 2400 Hz Originate Modem 1200 Hz Modulation Phase Shift Key modulation at 1200 bps CCITT V 22 compliant full duplex BELL 212 MODULATION MODE Data Rate 1200 bps Baud Rate 600 baud Carrie
279. ption of each test AT Option Command Setting Setting Description End Test 0 Ends the test currently in progress for all each test listed below except for the Retrain test LAL 1 Initiates a local analog loopback test RDL 6 Initiates a remote digital loopback test LDL 3 Initiates a local digital loopback test Pattern Initiates an end to end pattern test LAL Pat 8 Initiates a local analog loopback pattern test RDL Pat T Initiates a remote digital loopback pattern test Busy Out ATH1 Makes the modem appear busy to ATHO incoming calls To configure the modem to use the Busy Out feature refer to the AT LT DTE Pin 25 option description in this chapter If Busy Out is enabled ATHO will disconnect the busy out condition If the modem is in escape mode the modem has transitioned to command state from the data state online or test the ATHO command disconnects the modem Selecting End Test will also disconnect the busy out condition Retrain ATO1 Initiates a retrain with the remote modem Note For maximum reliability run the RDL LDL and RDL Pat tests at a data rate of 19 2 Kbps or lower When you operate the MODEM 32Fast the modem falls back to Direct mode Mode Direct to run on line loopback tests Refer to Sync Data Compression Testing in Section 9 4 for more information AT amp T4 AT amp T5 Accept TEST OPT S gt eee Accept RDL The AT amp T4 AT amp T5 Ac
280. r Frequency Answer Modem 2400 Hz Originate Modem 1200 Hz Modulation Phase Shift Key modulation at 1200 bps Bell 212 compatible full duplex V 21 MODULATION MODE Data Rate 300 bps Baud Rate 300 baud Carrier Frequency Answer Modem 1750 Hz Originate Modem 1080 Hz Modulation Frequency Shift Keying CCITT V 21 compliant full duplex BELL 103 MODULATION MODE Data Rate 300 bps Baud Rate 300 baud Carrier Frequency Answer Modem 2125 Hz Originate Modem 1170 Hz Modulation Frequency Shift Keying Bell 103 compatible full duplex 10 3 Environmental Limits Operating Temperature Range 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Radiated Conducted Emissions FCC Part 15A compliant CISPR 22A compliant Shock and Vibrations In approved shipping container conforms to the requirements of the National Safe Transit Association Percipient Test Specification CHAPTER 10 Operating Specifications 10 4 Primary Power Requirements 100 to 240 VAC nominal 90 to 264 VAC automatic adapting 47 to 63 Hz automatic adapting Single phase AC 13 4 W input power Apparent power 0 014 kvA 10 5 Transmitter OUTPUT LEVEL FCC Programmable 0 dBm maximum 12 dBm minimum dB FCC Permissible 9 dBm maximum 0 1 dB e 2 wire leased line 0 dBm maximum 15 dBm minimum dB e 4 wire lease
281. r a call regardless of the contents of S Register 0 Ring Count to Answer On If you issue the ATA command while the modem is in escape mode or in remote configuration it responds with ERROR DIAL To dial directly from the keyboard enter ATD followed by the number you want to dial For example ATD1 617 555 1212 lt CR gt The ATD command causes the modem to go off hook dial the number and execute all dial modifiers in the dial string The call progress message you see is controlled by how you ve set the Call Progress option ATX The modem can dial up to 50 characters including spaces In originate mode if the ATD command is issued without a phone number the modem goes off hook If ATD is issued while the modem is in escape mode or remote configuration the modem responds with ERROR Note invalid characters inserted into the dial string will be ignored ATH HANG UP Settings 0 Modem hangs up 1 Busy Out the modem Format ATHn CR You may hang up the modem after entering the online escape mode by typing ATH or Typing ATHI while in command mode causes the modem to Busy Out until either the ATH command is entered or the key is pressed Note For busy out make certain that the TELCO OPT S Telco option is set for RJ4MB ATI DisPLAY SOFTWARE INFORMATION Settings 0 Displays 960 1 Displays 000 2 Displays OK 9 Displays reason for last disconnect Format ATIn
282. r in this chapter Your modem is in command mode when it s disconnected from the phone line When you use AT commands from a terminal command lines start with AT followed by the AT command setting and end with a carriage return lt CR gt The only exceptions are A repeat last command and the escape sequence AT commands may be entered in either uppercase or lowercase but mixed case is not allowed Responses to AT commands always appear in uppercase You can enter multiple AT commands on a com mand line using a single AT prefix The modem accepts up to 60 characters after the AT prefix AT commands are interpreted in sequence in the command line until one of the following occurs The modem encounters CR indicating that the end of the command line is reached The modem encounters an invalid command The modem encounters a command that causes the modem to reset go off hook or enter a test state For example you might enter ATEOVL amp W lt CR gt CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces single AT command line In this example you Table 8 1 Interpreting AT Command Strings can add spaces between the AT and command Command Interpretation characters for clarity This command disables the E amp lt gt Postscript number needed and none async echo feature It also configures the RsltForm provided Default of O is assumed
283. r of seconds specified by this S Register This process occurs before the modem blind dials a telephone number if the Blind Dial option is set to S6 AT BD2 This S Register does not affect the wait dial modifiers S REGISTER 7 WAIT FOR DATA CARRIER Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 30 Range 1 to 255 seconds If the modem s Call Timeout option AT TT is set to 7 the value of S Register 7 determines the number of seconds that the modem waits for a remote modem s carrier signal after dialing or answering a call S Register 7 also affects the following dial modifiers e W ew Dial Modifier If your modem s Call Timeout option AT TT is set to S7 the value of S Register 7 determines the amount of time that the dial modifier instructs the modem to look for five seconds of silence Dial Modifier W w and If your modem s Dial Wait option AT DD is set to S7 the value of S Register 7 determines the value of the dial wait modifier The dial wait modifier determines the amount of time that the modem waits for a second dial tone after it dials a number S REGISTER 8 PAUSE TIME FOR PAUSE DELAY DIAL MODIFIERS Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 2 Range 0 to 255 seconds This S Register determines how many seconds the modem pauses while dialing when it encounters a eK ek d
284. r on the AT Form Char Length Parity DTE Rate and Mod option settings under the ACU OPT S menu to make certain they are correct for your application 4 Set the Default Dial option in the ACU OPT S menu of the front panel display to off 5 Modify any other options as required for your application CHAPTER 4 Getting Started 6 Display Save Changes n on the front panel 7 Press to enter your changes into nonvolatile memory You can store your modifications into any of the four option set addresses Doing so overwrites the settings for the selected option set Remember to wait for the Saved Completed message 8 Set the Telco option under the TELCO OPT S menu for the appropriate jack RJ4MB RJ45S RJ16C Your modem is now configured for MI MIC control by an external dialer Make sure that the cable between the dialer and modem DIAL LINE jack supports the MI MIC leads on Pins 3 and 6 4 19 1 INITIATE A CALL For instructions refer to the user s manual supplied with the external dialer 4 19 2 TERMINATE A CALL A call may be terminated by any of the following conditions If the DTR option is set to 108 2 and the DTE drops the DTR signal If the Talk Data softkey at the home position is pressed Ifa disconnect 15 initiated at the remote modem and disconnect signaling is sent to your MODEM 32Fast MODEM 32Fast 5 V 34 Cabling Table 5 1 Maximum Cable Capacitance per Data Ra
285. ration 7 11 Front Panel Security Options Figure 7 10 illustrates the FP SECURITY menu FP SECURITY menu options let you protect some aspects of modem operation by using a password When you enable the modem s front panel password function you must enter the password before you can perform the following operations List phone numbers through the front panel AT commands or V 25 bis commands Store phone numbers through the front panel AT commands or V 25 commands Change options through front panel or AT commands Have phone numbers echoed during redialing Some FP Security menu options listed below have AT command equivalents which are described in Chapter 6 The remaining FP Security options which you can select only from the front panel are described immediately following this list DIALING OPT S 4 4 ACCESS SECURITY Password Disable D Enable OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS AT PE Enable Disable Password AT PF Setting Protection AT PN Unlocking Password Protection AT PW Entering and Changing a Password If the modem is password protected you do not need to enter the password to Dial a stored number e Answer an incoming call e View the option settings on the front panel Important Know your password before you enable the password function If you cannot remember your password the only way to regain access to all modem
286. rd function in the FP SECURITY menu and then override network management control On The network manager cannot attach your modem 7 13 2 NETWORK CONTROL ADDRESS The NC Address option lets you set your modem s network control address This is the same address that the MODEM 32Fast uses with SET RMT LL ADDR and SRCH RMT LL ADDR functions The range of valid addresses is 0 to 254 To set your network control address see Section 7 13 10 Note f you enter an invalid address the modem displays Invalid NC Addr CHAPTER 7 Front Panel Operation 7 13 3 NETWORK CONTROL RATE Set the NC Port Rate option to match the speed of your network manager This setting controls the speed of the NC ports on your modem s rear panel Option Setting Network Control Port Configured for 75 75 bps default 110 110 bps 150 150 bps 1200 1200 bps 2400 2400 bps 4800 4800 bps 9600 9600 bps 7 13 4 Pass THRU The modem uses an in band secondary channel to pass network management data to the remote modem This channel is not disruptive to main channel user data The Pass Thru option controls the manner in which the network control data is passed to the remote modem when the MODEM 32Fast is configured as a DIAL modem It also determines if the DIAL remote modem passes the network management in band secondary channel data through to its network control NC port out jack The out jack is located on the modem
287. red in its telephone directory based on the setting of the Default Dial option Once a call is successful an on to off transition of DTR from the DTE disconnects the modem from the dial line and returns it to the leased line Once restoral is terminated by any means other than the DTR signal the DTR signal from the attached DTE FP 116 FP Auto 4 must be turned off before an off to on DTR transition can initiate another restoral attempt Note The Ext Select option overrides DTR restoral if Ext option is configured for Pin 20 and the Ext Select option is configured for a setting other than Off The modem lets the DTE initiate restoral with Circuit 116 Circuit 116 lets you use off to on transitions of this signal from the DTE to initiate restoral according to CCITT V 24 specifica tions In Circuit 116 restoral the answer or originating modem can initiate restoral when the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on by dialing the number stored in its telephone directory based on the setting of the Default Dial option You can initiate restoral manually by pressing the Talk Data key at the Home position Once a call is successful an on to off transition of Circuit 116 disconnects the affected modem from the dial line and returns it to the leased line You can manually disconnect either modem from the dial line by pressing the Talk Data key at the Home position on the front panel In aut
288. reliable message you have to set the V25 Resp option in the ACU OPT S menu to V25 rate In addition you must set the Reliable Msg option to Long or Short A reliable CONNECT message would look like this CNX 9600 RELIABLE If you do not want the CONNECT message to display the data rate set the Call Progress option in the ACU OPT S menu of the front panel display to 0 In such a case the CONNECT message looks like this CN RELIABLE 8 11 Programming Guide for the V 25 bis ACU This section will help programmers develop software commands The V 25 bis command set supports both bit and character oriented sync protocols that use ASCII or EBCDIC character sets The V 25 bis ACU also supports async data formats that use the ASCII character set Chapter 12 ASCII EBCDIC Hexadecimal Equivalents provides the hexadecimal equivalents for both ASCH and EBCDIC of the characters and symbols defined by the V 25 bis specification Frame formats for both bit and character oriented sync and async transmission are defined in the following sections The modem supports most individual protocol elements necessary for the modem and terminal to communicate accurately In all cases if the modem receives a frame with a link level error framing error bad parity corrupted frame check sequence the frame is ignored 8 11 1 ASYNC FRAME FORMAT You can use the V 25 bis commands described in the previous sections from an async DTE When you use
289. ress If the address doesn t match the command 15 ignored If the address 15 valid the modem saves the address and uses it in the response COMMAND CODE C This field is one byte long and contains the command code that the modem executes Dara FIELD D The length and contents of the data field are command dependent 8 16 Information Field Format and Response The information field format differs from a command response shown below Information Field eee _ Br 5 The Response Information field contains following Command Definition H Header 2 bytes Identifier 2 bytes A Modem Address 2 bytes Command Code 1 byte SB Sense Byte 1 byte D Data field Optional The length of this field is command dependent 8 16 1 HEADER H RESPONSE FIELD The header field contains two subfields Length field This field is 1 byte long hexadecimal and contains the number of bytes in the response including itself and up to but not including the FCS field Key field This field is 1 byte long and must contain 0x50 8 16 2 IDENTIFIER FIELD The identifier field is two bytes long with the following format Byte 0 bit 0 Always 1 bit 1 Always 0 bit 2 Always 1 Shows a response bit 3 0 The command has been correctly executed 1 The command has not been correctly executed The error code is reported in the sense byte bits 4 7 Always 0
290. rly constant in frequency and severity Point to Point A line that directly connects two end points for example a remote location to a host computer Opposite of multipoint Port A connector and associated circuitry that lets digital data be injected into or retrieved from a communications network Protocol Formal set of rules that govern the format timing sequencing and error control of exchanged messages on a data network PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PTT Postal Telegraph and Telephone Government authority in many European companies that typically operates the public telecommunications network sets standards and policies and negotiates communications issues internationally for a particular country QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A type of modulation that varies an analog wave s phase and amplitude RS 232 D See EIA TIA 232 D RTS Request To Send Terminal signals to its co located modem to get ready for data transmission SDLC Sync data link control IBM Corporation s bit oriented protocol Start Bit A data bit used in async transmission Signals the beginning of a character Stop Bit A data bit used in async transmission Signals the end of a character STX Start of text control character Designates the start of a message s text as well as usually the end of the message heading SYN Sync character Establishes synchronism To ma
291. rminal The AT and V 25 bis command sets cannot be used from an attached terminal Note If your modem is under remote configuration control by another Modem 32FAST the controlling modem retains full AT ACU control Off up MODEM S SERIAL NUMBER As Figure 7 16 illustrates the modem s serial number is located on the label attached to the modem s underside Locate this label on the remote modem and record it 7 13 9 REAR PANEL SWITCHES On your modem s rear panel is a 6 position DIP switch that lets you configure the unit The DIP switch selections cannot be overridden using the remote front panel configuration The switches are numbered from left to right 1 to 6 Table 7 3 lists the switches and their uses 7 13 10 PERFORMING NUMERIC ENTRY Listed below are front panel option settings that require you to enter information using the front panel or ACUs The following procedure describes how to use the front panel keys to make a numeric entry Front Panel Option Enter Phone n Enter Than Dial S Reg xxx nnn LPDA 2 Addr nnn Enter PW nnnn Old PW nnnn New PW nnnn Verify PW nnnn Enter Group PW NC Address nnn New Address nnn Rmt Ser nnnnnnn Factory use only For proper operation this switch must be off Description Stores phone number to phone book memory in location n Lets you dial from the front panel Lets you set S Register xxx to nnn Lets you set the LPDA2 address Lets you unlock
292. rst time you are powering up your modem this message appears in the display after the message SELF TEST The 3260 3265 Ready message tells you that the modem encountered no faults during the self test and it s ready for operation If the modem detects a system fault during the self test an error message appears after the self test 3260 3265 Ready Error Message HANDLING ERROR MESSAGES If the modem fails the automatic self test and displays an error message 1 Record it It will help with troubleshooting 2 Power cycle the modem and observe the front panel display Note If the modem displays 3260 3265 Ready after it power cycles the earlier error message was probably caused by a temporary power line problem Some line problems do not affect modem operation If the modem continues to display an error message call for technical support When the modem displays either 3260 3265 Initial Or 3260 3265 Ready you can begin system testing If you need to return your modem include a copy of the record ed error message along with other relevant infor mation before you ship the modem back to us CHAPTER 9 Testing Your Modem 9 4 System Testing In addition to the automatic self test capability the modem features a built in test generator error detector and loopback circuitry to help you isolate problems You can initiate system tests From the modem s front panel By using AT
293. s 52 Ercntpanel 111 tcr E E 193 Grounding DOWD r rerin eee SEak 15 Guard me 145 SLUNG EEE EPE T A ES 150 Guard 62 Hanging up at Cartier 150 DTE maclviby senes deiss 151 PAIS Se CIO 83 ID COITECLIOD eese eee 105 ID 62 ID GS errie 71 WINE OWL nente or ea teret Ix ee te eere et dena co 105 Installation 12 CADP 13 neina are ES 12 12 cial E eere A E 14 leased eue 15 15 AE a e 178 IntrOdUCctlOf secede ss 9 Jacks urit M 12 Keys tront panel ie rr har eii 2 error COITeCUOT sea eoa raa 85 19 Leased Ine Connecting 15 Tine compensatio ieser tii eiea E 89 Line feed SOLUTI 148 Line type SCIE CIN serere asna 63 Linkiong telephone eee eee 90 Loopback see also tests local analog bord f 90 controlled by 89 remote digital controlled Dy Pra 2T inerenti ei 89 Loopback remote UEM 66 Low speed modulation mode
294. s Table 8 4 summarizes which 10 bit total character formats are valid for autobauding Table 8 4 Valid Autobauding Character Formats Senen onsets party stp ots Even or Odd None Mark or Space None Autobauding is valid only with 10 bit character formats CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces Result codes such as RING are sent at the last autobauded DTE speed and parity CONNECT result codes are also sent at the last autobauded DTE speed even if the call is established at a different speed When you turn on the modem it saves the last autobauded speed Because the modem saves parity within option sets the parity value that s saved in the power up option set is the one that s active 8 7 The Escape Sequence Use the escape sequence to return to command state from data state online or test Once in command state you can e Terminate a call e Initiate and terminate a test Issue AT action commands Change your modem s configuration Initiate a remote configuration session Read modem status using the AT ST command Enter the escape state by sending the escape character three consecutive times The escape character is selectable as any ASCII character Its value is stored in S Register 2 and the default is decimal 43 You use a guard time as part of the escape sequence The guard time is configurable using S Register 12 This specifies the time r
295. s 0000 Press again The modem responds with New PW 0000 4 The cursor on left most zero is flashing indicating it is selected Using ge to select digits 0 9 and to move the cursor to the right enter your old password Your password must contain four characters The characters are limited to 0 9 Press The modem responds with Verify PW xxxx where xxxx is the password you have just entered 5 If the password displayed is correct press again The modem responds with Password Saved 6 If the password is incorrect press any front panel key other than 0 to abort the Change Password Remote Access RMT CONFIG OPT S AT RA RmtAcc command determines whether your modem allows itself to be configured by the remote modem AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Enable 1 The local modem can be configured by the remote modem Disable 0 The local modem cannot be configured by the remote modem AT RC Initiate Terminate or Abort Remote Configuration Session RMT CONFIG OPT S gt eee The AT RC command lets you initiate terminate or abort a remote configuration session with the connected modem AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Initiate Rmt 2 The modem attempts to initiate a Cnfg remote configuration session with the connected modem The modem terminates a remote configuration session with the connected modem Ch
296. s not apply when the modem is in test mode AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Off AT DB The Off setting disables the Delay all option Buf Or S38 AT DB1 This setting starts the buffer delay 3 timer immediately upon detection of Default the disconnect request When the timer is operating the modem continues to process either the transmit or receive buffers The modem disconnects when the buffers are empty or the timer expires which ever happens first Note When the modem is set for Direct mode no buffering of data exists and the disconnect is immediate This setting prevents the timer from starting until either the transmit or receive buffers have emptied The modem disconnects Once the timer expires and the modem is set to Direct mode data is not buffered and the timer starts immediately This setting allows the timer to start immediately upon detection of the disconnect request This disconnect request continues to process either its transmit or receive buffers The modem disconnects when the timer expires regardless of the state of the buffers Note When the modem is set for Direct mode no buffering of data exists However the modem delays a disconnect until the timer expires Buf amp 538 AT DB2 38 AT DB3 AT DC Data Compression EC DC OPT S gt eee The AT DC DC command determines your modem s data compression technique Note This option does not apply
297. s off during training retraining and follows RTS in data mode When CTS follows RTS in data mode the setting of the RTS CTS Delay option applies if Mode Direct CTS always follows RTS Use this selection if your application requires CTS to immediately follow RTS This selection is independent of switched carrier operation Note Do not select this option if hardware flow control is required configured in the Flow AT FL option The RTS CTS Delay AT DL option is not available with this selection AT amp S AT MR DSR Control The AT amp S and DSR commands determine how modem sets DSR signal The modem signals the DTE with the DSR on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 6 V 24 Circuit 107 AT Option Command Setting Setting Description High DTR always 1 AT amp SO Normal AT MRO DSR is controlled by the modem 3 4 AT amp S1 DSR is on when the modem recognizes that it is communicating with a compatible modem DTR AT MR2 DSR follows DTR The same the Normal setting Disc except that when a disconnection is 2 initiated from the local end DSR is dropped immediately Sim LL AT MR4 The same as the DTR setting except DSR is dropped when the remote modem requests a disconnect AT amp T Test 1 AT amp T Test command is used to initiate and terminate tests See Chapter 7 for a complete descri
298. s to generate 58 different characters Baud Rate See Baud BCC Block check character A unique number derived from the data transmitted in a block The block check character is appended to the blocks of data to determine if a block is received with errors BER Bit Error Rate The percentage of bit errors relative to a specific number of bits received Usually expressed as a number referenced to a power of 10 Binary A numerical representation system using only two digits 0 and 1 In the case of a computer those digits represent Off and On Bit A blend of the two words binary and digit The smallest unit in a byte of information expressed as 1 or 0 Bit Oriented A communications protocol or transmission procedure in which control information is encoded in fields of one or more bits Compare with Character Oriented Block Error 1 A specified number of transmitted data bits over which an encoding procedure is applied for error control purposes A specified number of data characters or bits 2 A quantity of transmitted information or data usually determined by its own starting and ending control characters bps bits per second The rate at which data passes over a telephone line Busy Out An indication to the Central Office that the subscriber line isn t available to answer incoming calls The availability and implementation of Busy Out varies on a country by country basis Byte
299. scribed in Chapter 6 gt RmtAcc Enable 0 Disable Figure 7 13 CONFIG OPT S Menu OPTIONS WITH AT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS AT RA Remote Access AT RAC Terminate Initiate or Abort Remote Configuration Session The remote configuration function can be used in 2 wire dial or 4 wire leased line applications Since the function uses an in band secondary channel that is not disruptive to user data a remote configuration session can be established while modems are passing user data Two remote configuration methods are available e Via your AT ACU Via your front panel Whether you choose to use your front panel or your AT ACU the remote configuration feature gives you control over both your modem and the connected modem AT ACU If you use your AT ACU to establish a remote configuration session with the connected modem any status information you display and any configuration changes you perform via you AT ACU affect the remote modem only Your control terminal displays the remote modem s AT ACU information not your own However you can still use your front panel to read your status information and configure your modem Also your modem can use its AT ACU to establish a remote configuration session even if the remote modem s ACU Select option is set to V25b V 25 bis ACU LPDA2 or Off no ACU Front Panel If you use your front panel to establish a remote confi
300. se 7 7 9 LPDA2 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER This option lets the modem type be returned in the data response field The modem option settings are as follows Option Setting Description 3260 Sends 3260 in data response 7855 Sends 7855 in data response 7 7 10 LPDA2 DETERMINATION This selection lets the modem recognize the LPDA2 commands in the data stream Option Setting Description Disab LPDA2 command frames are not recognized as commands Enab LPDA2 commands are recognized in the data stream and the commands are processed ACU OPT S 4 Flow Off XON XOFF DTR CTS bd 5 5 XON XOFF PT 2 3 4L SDC TERMINAL OPT S DTE Rate Auto 1 152 196 0 176 8 172 0 64 01 2 3 4 SDC 157 6 56 01 2 3 4 SDC U S Can only 48 0 138 4 124 01 2 3 4L F 121 6 19 2 4d 16 8 144 2 3 4L S 12 0 9600 7200 4800 2400 11200 1300 TpDlyMin Rx 23 41 SDC 4 Displayed only for 326XFAST SDC products 4444444 TELCO OPT S 44444444444 444 gt AT amp C Ris Cts Delay 0 A DCD High 1 15 Normal 2 3 4 60 ACU 190 Remote 526 Wink RemRTS DCD Codex A 13 DTE Ct 140 D 7 AT LA DTE Ct 141 0ff D Y KEY _ Option Included Option Sets Country Specific Option DCD Loss Dis Off 4 DTR High 1 41 Escape
301. settings with the format 1 1H 2L nH mL where n 1 2 3 or 4 and 2 1H 3L m 1 2 3 4 When the pin specified 3 1H 4L by the Ext Cntrol option Pin 14 or 4 2H 1L Pin 20 transitions from low to high 5 2H 3L the modem loads the option set 6 2H 4L When the pin specified by the Ext 7 3HAL Cntrl option set Pin 14 or Pin 20 8 3H 2L transitions from high to low the 9 3H 4L modem loads the 1 option set 10 4H 1L 11 4H 2L For example if you set Ext 12 4H 3L Select 1H 2L and the pin specified by the Ext option Pin 14 or Pin 20 transitions from high to low the modem loads Option Set 1 If the pin specified by the Ext Cntrl option Pin 14 or Pin 20 transitions from high to low the modem loads Option Set 2 When an option set is loaded due to the pin specified by the Ext option Pin 14 or Pin 20 transition the modem disconnects from the line AT OS Overspeed TERMINAL OPT S E eee AT OS Overspeed command lets modem compensate for DTE overspeed Some async DTEs send data to the modem faster than specified a condition known as overspeed AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 1 0 0 The modem compensates for DTE all overspeed up to 1 0 2 5 1 The modem compensates for DTE overspeed up to 2 5 AT PE Enable Disable Password Protection The AT PE Password command enables disables the Password function Once you ve enable
302. ss is currently linked to For example Link 1 to None 4 Press W until the desired address appears and press For example when address is linked to address 2 the display shows Link 1 to 2 In this example if you initiated a call for the number stored in address 1 and the call fails the modem then calls the number stored in address 2 AT LS Low Speed MODULATION OPT S The AT LS Low Speed command determines which low speed modulation mode is used in the event that a higher V 34 V 32 bis V 32 or V 22 bis modulation mode connection cannot be made when the modem is set to Mod V 34 Auto V32bis or Auto V32 AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Bell 0 Bell 103 modulation mode is used CCITT 1 V 21 modulation mode is used AT LT DTE Pin 25 TERMINAL OPT S gt eee DTE Pin 25 gt AT LT DTE Pin 25 command controls whether the modem uses EIA TIA 232 D Pin 25 as in input or an output Set rear panel Switch 2 to match the setting of this option See Table 7 3 in Chapter 7 for more information on rear panel switches AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Busy 0 The DTE signals the modem on Pin 25 to make the modem appear busy to incoming calls Set rear panel DIP switch 2 to the off up position Also for this feature to work the AT amp J Telco option command must be set to RJ4MB Test 1 The modem signals the DTE on V 24 all Circuit 142 P
303. ss security at two levels front panel and modem access Front panel security lets you protect a modem via password This prevents unauthorized changes that may be made to the existing configuration Front panel security does not prevent users from using the modem You can also screen incoming calls so that unauthorized users are prevented from accessing a modem via password and callback functions 2 13 Status Snapshots This feature lets you view A snapshot of your local or remote modem s EIA signals The circuit quality monitoring system COMS parameters long or short form summary of the modem s configuration The COMS parameters continuously estimate major line parameters without disrupting data traffic You can measure selections such as signal to noise ratio and receive level and isolate causes of degraded network performance 2 14 Adaptive Rate System With the Adaptive Rate System enabled the modem continuously optimizes its transmit speed within the V 34 V 32 bis V 32 and V 22 bis modulation modes By constantly monitoring signal quality the modem adapts to the optimum transmission rate allowed by line conditions This ensures maximum throughput and efficiency 2 15 Troubleshooting V 54 and V 22 bis Tests The modem has a full range of CCITT V 54 and CCITT V 22 bis compatible tests 3 Installation THE COMPLETE PACKAGE The following items are included with your MODEM 32Fast
304. ssful or unsuccessful The LPDA2 ACU supports dial and leased line operation In dial line applications this feature eliminates the need for the additional ports and equipment in IBM environments In leased line operation and while connected on the dial line the MODEM 32Fast monitors for LPDA2 commands in the data stream If the local modem detects an LPDA2 command the frame that s being processed is aborted This prevents the remote modem from processing the command frame as valid data 8 15 1 How TO CONFIGURE FOR LPDA2 ACU To configure for LPDA2 ACU 1 Set the ACU Select option under the ACU menu LPDA2 2 Set the Sync Idle option to Mark 3 Set the DSR AT amp S or AT MR option under the TERMINAL OPT S menu to High 8 15 2 LPDA2 ACU CONTROL COMMANDS The LPDA2 ACU operates with the following two commands 1 A Dial command that allows an attached DTE to dial a telephone number and report back the call status 2 A Disconnect command that instructs the modem to drop the switched network data connection 8 15 3 LPDA2 MESSAGE FORMAT The commands and responses between the modem and the DTE use sync data link control SDLC nonsequenced information frames The format of these frames is as follows lt Information Field eee The following table explains LPDA2 responses Responses Definition Flag Ox7E Binary number 01111110 OxFD1B Binary number 1111110100011
305. sync Async Async V25 Form Bitsync Bitsync Bitsync Bitsync NoACU Form Async Sync Sync Sync Default Dial Off 1 1 1 Answer Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Async Echo On On On On Char Length 10 10 10 10 V25 Char ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Sync Idle Char Char Char Char V25 Resp V 25bis V 25bis V 25bis V 25bis Parity V 25 V 25 V 25 V 25 AT Msg Before CD Before CD Before CD Before CD Code Enable Enable Enable Enable ResltForm Verbose Verbose Verbose Verbose Rel Msg Off Off Off Off LPDA2 Addr FF FF FF FF LPDA2 ID 326X 326X 326X 326X LPDA2 Det Enable Enable Enable Enable TERMINAL OPTIONS DTE Rate Auto Flow XON XOFF TpDlyMin DTR High Trail 108 1 High RTS High Normal Normal Normal CTS AsynSync Normal Normal Normal RTS CTS Delay 0 0 0 0 High Normal Normal Normal DSR High Normal Normal Normal Overspeed 1 1 1 1 DTR Delay 525 525 525 525 CHAPTER 4 Getting Started 4 12 SDC Applications This section explains how to configure the modem to efficiently address the most common Synchronous Data Compression SDC application requirements Section 4 14 provides graphic examples of the following Application Figure Single channel point to point digital link restoral via A B switch 4 4 4 5 Point to point leased line application with dial restoral 4 6 V 34 SDC dial on
306. t 6 Press The modem displays Test Completed To busy out your modem with an AT command enter ATH1 lt CR gt To terminate the Busy Out condition enter ATH lt CR gt After you end the Busy Out condition the screen displays OK RETRAIN 01 When two modems establish a connection they train with each other Training lets modems at both ends of a connection adjust their receivers for current telephone line conditions and agree on a data rate Occasionally modems need to retrain when signal quality degrades You may need to manually retrain the modems for the following reasons e The automatic retrain function is disabled and you want to improve signal quality Signal quality is poor and you don t want to wait for the modem to retrain automatically CHAPTER 9 Testing Your Modem To initiate a retrain 1 Use front panel keys to move through the TEST OPT S menu until the modem displays TEST End Test 2 Press yp until the modem displays TEST Retrain 3 Press to initiate a retrain The test terminates automatically To initiate a retrain using an AT command enter the following command When the screen displays OK enter ATOI CR A connect message appears on the screen For example you may see Connect 9600 Reliable indicating that the two modems have returned online and initiated a return 32FAST DTE CABLE DIAGNOSTICS This section contains a procedure that helps y
307. t DTE CRSa CRNn or CIC Figure 8 7 Connecting State 8 12 4 DATA STATE When a connection is successful the modem enters data state At this time the modem turns on Circuits 107 DSR and 109 DCD Inbound data is accepted from the remote site When the local DTE turns Circuit 105 RTS on the modem turns Circuit 106 CTS on and outbound data transmission takes place as shown in Figure 8 8 CHAPTER 8 Automatic Calling Interfaces 107 109 On 108 2 On RTS 105 On Data Inbound DSR 107 On When Received DCD 109 On CTS 106 On PENA MODEM 32Fast DTE Data Outbound Figure 8 8 Data State 8 12 5 DISCONNECTING If the remote modem disconnects the local modem drops the connection and enters dialog state If the local modem s DTR option is set to 108 2 dropping DTR at the local DTE disconnects the call 8 13 Direct Mode To use the direct mode set the front panel display s DTR option to 108 1 Setting the modem s DTR option to 108 1 allows DTR signal transitions from the DTE to control connection to the dial line In direct mode the modem does not accept V 25 bis commands issue responses or CONNECT messages 8 13 1 DIRECT ANSWERING The modem signals an incoming call to the DTE on Circuit 125 Pin 22 When the DTR signal from the DTE is turned from off to on the modem connects to the line If there is an incoming cal
308. t bit and 1 stop bit V 25 bis sync V 25 bis bit sync or character sync framing format 7 bit ASCII with 1 parity bit or 8 bit EBCDIC V 25 bis async V 25 bis async character format 7 bit ASCII with 1 parity bit 1 start bit and 1 stop bit LPDA 2 dial and disconnect support Data Transmission Sync Serial by bit to 24 0 Kbps HDLC SDLC framed data when opera ng in SDC compressed sync mode Async direct mode V 14 async to sync conversion 8 9 10 and 11 bit characters Async buffered modes 10 bit serial Error Correction Async V 42 LAP M and MNP 4 Sync compressed Modified LAP M Data Compression Async V 42 bis and MNP 5 Sync compressed Modified V 42 bis Hn B p Throughput Optimization Supports proprietary Adaptive Rate System ARS Adaptive Packetization Algorithm APA and clock smoothing Security supported under modem control or under control of the Dial Management System Transmitter Section Output level tolerance 1 0 dB Output level Country dependent Timing in non compressed mode Selectable internal and external loopback Compressed mode Internal internal with clock stopping external Certification Compliance Safety UL 1950 CSA 950 TUV IEC 950 FCC Part 15 Class A Telecom Country compliance as required Environment Temperature Ambient 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Re
309. t using the Direct data transfer mode RTS behaves as if RTS Normal AT RT Auto Retrain MODULATION OPT S gt eee The AT RT Retrain command enables auto retrain feature When enabled the modem retrains if the specified bit error rate is exceeded Enabling Retrain for most applications allows the modem to compensate for changing line conditions Note When you set this feature to Off the modem is unable to detect when the central office has initiated a loopback test on the data communications line AT Option Command Setting Setting Off 0 Description The modem does not automatically initiate retrains but will respond to retrains from the remote mode Using V 34 V 32 bis or V 32 the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 4 for eight seconds Using V 22 bis the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 4 for one second The Low BER setting is more sensitive than the High BER setting When ARS is enabled this setting has no meaning High BER 2 Using V 34 V 32 bis or V 32 the all modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 3 for eight seconds Using V 22 bis the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 3 for one second When ARS is enabled bit error rate is always used The High BER setting is less sensitive than the low BER setting Low BER 1 Note We recommen
310. tablishment Methods 147 8 10 2 CODDpuratlon euer Irt ter EEEIEE 148 8 10 3 Addressed MOG oit emt 148 MEE Call Responses T 150 8 10 97 Gall Progress A E E E E AERE 151 9 10 6 Result Code Responses eiie nente 151 810 7 Reliable Connection REPONSE 151 Programming Guide forthe V25 Tis nnee ee ubt eti bu 152 8111 Frame Tt 152 Syne BitOriented Frame 152 8 11 3 Sync Character Oriented Frame Format reete tree reiten enne oa Pe pa t rona ke 153 8 12 V 25 bis Control Signaling un Addressed Mode ortae nte erae sein rhon 154 8 12 1 Idle Condition rrr ioter esee tue E PNEU eee EE PR Re eene Eran Ue 154 8 12 2 Dialog M 154 951252 estas E EEE EE E 154 Table of Contents MR 154 S T25 DISCOMMECUING 155 EM uiuere 155 Direct visi 155 8132 Direct 155 8 14 Manual Ans we ri and 155 STAL
311. te Data Rates Kbps 5 1 Introduction This section contains information about cabling and operating your modem at DTE rates greater than 19 2 Kbps Caution If you re operating your modem at DTE rates higher than 19 2 Kbps carefully follow the instructions in this chapter to determine the proper cables for your application For your modem to operate as specified we ve indicated the maximum cable capacitance for data rates higher than 19 2 Kbps If you do not follow these instructions your modem may cause data transmission errors We make no guarantee of proper operation if you do not use a cable with the correct capacitance 5 2 Cable Considerations Because of the modem s higher DTE speeds there are several considerations you must be aware of in choosing the type and length of the DTE cable you ll use with your modem We ve specified a maximum allowable cable capacitance for the expanded data rates You must determine the correct capacitance of the cable you intend to use with the modem Table 5 1 represents a range of data rates along with the maximum allowable capacitance The maximum capacitance is a total of both the inter conductor capacitance between the conductors represented as Cc in Table 5 1 and the capacitance between the shield and the conductor represented as Cs in Table 5 1 capacitance is represented in units of picofarads pF The total capacitance represented in this column is
312. te system Telephone number of remote system Must match line description of remote system Must match control unit description of remote system CRTDEVAPPC _ DEVD SYSTEM2DEV RMTLOCNAME SYSTEM1 LCLLOCNAME SYSTEM2 RMTNETID NONE CTL SYSTEM2CTL APPN NO DEVD Name of device description being created RMTLOCNAME Must match LCLLOCNAME on remote System device description Must match RMTLOCNAME on remote System device description LCLLOCNAME RMTNETID NONE for APPC Control unit description associated with the device description APPL NO for APPC 4 19 External Auto Call Unit Bell 801C Some applications use external dialers such as the Bell 801C to establish calls Once an external dialer completes a call it passes control of the dial line to the modem via the MI MIC control leads on the DIAL LINE connector This application is supported in Canada and the United States only To configure your modem for 801C external dialing using the front panel keys follow these steps 1 Configure the modem for the desired option set as previously described in Section 4 10 2 Set the DTR option in the TERMINAL OPT S menu of the front panel display to 108 2 or High Note If DTR 108 2 the signal from the DTE must be on before the modem can connect to the line On to Off transitions of the DTR signal from the DTE disconnect the modem from the line 3 Check with your system administrato
313. the modem to disconnect from the dial line This option is designed for use with the AT DT DTR Delay option in the TERMINAL OPT S menu command The AT DT command controls the length of time you have to switch from an async to a sync terminal If DTR transitions from on to off while you are switching to a sync terminal your modem disconnects from the dial line When off to on DTR transition is detected the modem automatically dials the numbers stored in the memory location designated by the Default Dial option setting Once connected the modems transmit data synchronously If DTR transitions from on to off the modem hangs up and returns to the async command mode If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer Sync Data 1 DTR Dial 2 AT M AT Data Format continued AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Man Dial 3 DTR signals toggle between talk and data modes With DTR off numbers can be dialed from a telephone Once an answer tone is heard the telephone is hung up and DTR is raised The modems connect and send data synchronously If DTR is dropped the modems disconnect AT amp P Pulse Cycle The AT amp P Pulse Cycle command determines the make percentage of the dialing pulse make break ratio AT Option Command Setting Setting Description 40 0 make break ratio is 40 60 33 1 The make break ratio is 33 5 66 5 38 2 The make break ratio is 38 5 61 5 AT amp R
314. the leased line cannot be qualified after 21 seconds or if a retrain is initiated another attempt to qualify the leased line is made according to the time specified in the Dial to Leased option Note When operating with peer to peer or alternate destination restoral the Hold Dialine option should be set the same in both modems involved with restoral In peer to peer restoral two leased line modems are involved in restoral In alternate destination restoral the remote leased line modem and a local dial line modem are involved in restoral Refer to Figures 6 2 and 6 3 in the AT HD Hold Dial Line section of Chapter 6 for examples of peer to peer and alternate destination restoral Make sure that the PSTN option AT MD under the MODULATION OPT S menu is set to On To use error correction set the Mode option AT CA under MODULATION OPT S menu to Reliable Auto Rel or Spd AutoRel While operating the leased line if the Mode option is set to any of the Reliable settings it s treated as if Mode Reliable If the Mode option is set to a Reliable setting while restoral is operating that setting is treated normally To redial failed call attempts enable the Auto Redial option AT DR in the Data 9600 T D menu When restoral is initiated and redialing is enabled and a call attempt fails the modem does not return to the leased line until the specified number of redials occurs or the call succeeds When the mode
315. the options in each branch of the menu tree Steps you down through the menu tree to menus options and settings Enter Selects a setting and initiates an action you choose This key also serves as a Talk Data softkey when at the Home display The main menus TEST OPT S MODULATION OPT S etc always appear in capital letters Using the front panel keys you can access the options under each main menu Each main menu has several options Test Line Mode etc Many of these options are configurable while others indicate modem and call status Some options let you make calls Most options contain several selectable settings You can view an option s settings in the front panel display along with the option and the setting in the display e An equal sign indicates the current setting for the option A colon indicates that the displayed setting is available but has not been selected The modem s four control keys let you access the menus options and settings that appear in the front panel display Table 4 2 lists and describes the functions of the front panel keys Note If you hold down the wor it repeats until you stop pressing 4 6 Remote Access Reset Remote access reset lets someone unfamiliar with the AT command set or the front panel quickly configure a local modem so that another modem can dial into it Once this is done you can use the remote
316. the total allowable cable capacitance 2 Maximum resistance of cable conductors is 25 ohms Maximum Cable Capacitance Cc Cs in Picofarads pF The maximum allowable cable capacitance becomes smaller as DTE rates increase The more capacitance in the cable the shorter the allowable length at a given DTE rate Similarly with the same cable the allowable lengths become shorter as DTE rates increase Since newer PCs support EIA 232 D type receivers drivers at higher speeds it s important that you adhere to information contained in this chapter to determine proper cable length To determine the per foot capacitance of your cable 1 Determine the length of the cable for your application 2 Determine the range of speeds that you ll use to operate your modem For example if you intend to operate your modem s DTE port routinely between 20 96 Kbps determine the cable capacitance for the higher speed You can operate the modem up to but not exceeding the maximum speed capacitance that you ve calculated for a cable 3 Once you ve determined the appropriate data rate range refer to Table 5 1 for the maximum allowable cable capacitance for a given speed For example if you are operating your modem at 64 Kbps the maximum capacitance is 900 pF 4 Divide the maximum cable capacitance by the length of the cable This results in the total cable capacitance per foot for the cable you intend to use The formu
317. the type of character that the V 25 bis ACU uses Option Setting Description ASCII The V 25 bis ACU uses ASCII character format all EBCDIC The V 25 bis ACU uses EBCDIC character format 7 7 6 5 IDLE The Sync Idle option applies to sync applications only direct sync or SDC operating modes Your modem sends Marks or Characters on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 3 V 24 Circuit 104 to the DTE when it has no messages to send Option Setting Description Mark Modem sends continuous Marks for one bits on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 3 V 24 Circuit 104 to the DTE when it has no messages to send Char This option setting applies to V 25 bis LPDA2 all and ACUs If the modem is configured for V 25 bis and the V25Form option is set to Charsync it sends a continuous stream of SYN synchronizing Characters on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 3 V 24 Circuit 104 when it has no messages to send If the V 25Form option is set to Bitsync the modem sends continuous flags 7E hexadecimal when it has no messages to send If the modem is configured for LPDA2 it sends continuous flags 7E hexadecimal when it does not have a message to send 7 7 1 V 25 BIS RESPONSES When using the V 25 bis ACU the modem always indicates a valid connection after local modem and remote mode switch to data mode This is accomplished by turning DSR EIA TIA 232 D Pin 6 V 24 Circuit 107 and DCD EIA TIA 232 D Pin 8 V 24 Circuit 109 from off to on In
318. timeout value The maximum value of the U modifier is the value configured in the Call Timeout AT TT option If the Call Timeout option is set for S Register 7 the maximum value of the U modifier is 255 For example the string OxE40060 sets the call timeout to 60 seconds each character in the string is a 40 bit value If a value is not specified or if the value is 0 use the Call Timeout option as described in Chapter 6 This modifier is used to show the end of the dial string and is not required for proper operation Any data following this modifier is ignored Use the C at the end of the dial string to place the command message field on a byte boundary as required by the modem This modifier lets the modem operate when nonstandard call progress signals or noise signals are found during the connection process For example if the modem interprets a ringback tone as a busy signal the call attempt will terminate incorrectly This modifier instructs the modem to monitor the telephone line for only the dial tone and the ringback tone during the remainder of the call This modifier overrides the setting of the Call Progress ATX option The dial digits following the X up to the next T are to be dialed using pulse dialing This modifier instructs the modem to wait for a dial tone before continuing 10 dial digits It s inserted between dial digits when an intermediate dial tone is expected This modifier performs
319. ting Started 4 14 2 POINT TO POINT LEASED LINE APPLICATION WITH DIAL RESTORAL Figure 4 6 illustrates a typical point to point leased line application with the modems providing both leased line and dial back up for a bridge router network A network management system NMS is shown in this application This application could also apply to any nodal equipment connection including bridges router and X 25 PADs To 28 Kbps 56 64 Kbps Figure 4 4 Single Channel Point to Point Digital Link Restoral via CSU DSU s Switch Option Set 2 To 56 Kbps 32Fast To 28 ace 32Fast CSU DSU Router 56 64 Kbps CSU DSU Figure 4 5 Single Channel Point to Point Digital Link Restoral via External A B Switch Option Set 2 re If leased line operation is disrupted modems Note the following restore the connection over a single dial line through the PSTN The line configuration default of Option Set 4 Thesnodemases toadaptivosale tbe leased line with restoral is 2 wire leased line V 34 Auto modulation mode This setting ensures With Option Set 4 the modem gives you maximum throughput when line quality network timing Clock Internal deteriorates If restoral criteria are met the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the PSTN At that time the modem attempts to run at 24 Kbps over the dial line and falls back to lower s
320. tional information is displayed The Home display appears after the modem has timed out front panel keys have not been used for at least five minutes or when your press W If you press while at the Home display it acts as a Talk Data softkey The softkey lets you switch between using a telephone to make a call and using a modem to dial From the Home display pressing brings you to the other status displays 9600 1 0 0719 2 Reliable 1 EE TEST OPT S gt r Guard Tone 1 MODULATION OPT S RESTORAL OPT S EC DC OPT S ACU OPT S DCD Loss Dis loss gt lt TERMINAL OPT S DTEPin25 TELCO 0975 o L ded j r FP SECURITY r 4 Call Timeout L Blind Dial gt 1 r Tone Length 1 Change Password ACCESS SECURITY gt NETWK CNTL RMT CONFIG 5 SET RMT LL ADDR Rmt Nest Modem Rmt Nest Modem to Search SRCH LL ADDR 7 C aor v cx be cm Cem Ce L Country specific option Figure 4 3 Front Panel Menu CHAPTER 4 Getting Started Table 4 2 Front Panel Keys Return Steps you back through the menu tree from options and menus to the Home display Steps you across
321. tions 8 2AT ACU The MODEM 32Fast uses an improved AT command set that s compatible with the industry standard AT command set The standard AT commands called action AT commands let you perform all day to day operations such as dialing and storing numbers from your async DTE Using the extensions to the AT command set you can also configure most of your modem s options These AT commands called configuration AT commands control the same options that exist in your modem s front panel menu tree This section provides information on the MODEM 32Fast AT ACU action AT commands and S Registers Note commands are explained in detail in Chapter 6 Each configuration AT command is cross referenced with the front panel option to which it corresponds This chapter covers only action AT commands For a full alphabetized listing of AT commands and their corresponding options see Chapter 11 Command Cross Referencing This chapter covers the following AT topics General rules for using AT commands e Action AT commands AT commands which do not cross reference to any front panel option Description of each S Register including Whether the register is stored in nonvolatile memory Whether the register is for status only Default values Valid value ranges 8 3 Using AT Commands The modem accepts AT Commands in command or escape mode The escape mode sequence is described late
322. to 52 Restoral Answer 53 Restoral Talk Data 54 End Restoral Talk Data 55 End Restoral Dial to Lease Timeout 56 Lease Line Test 57 Lease Line Test Manager 58 Lease Line Test Failed 59 External Option Set selected 60 Option Set selected ATZ 61 Lease Line Test Passed 62 Security No Callback Number provided 63 Security Failure Manager timeout 64 Security Failure Invalid Callback Number 65 Security Failure Interdigit timeout 66 DTE Inactive 67 Restoral ACU 68 End Restoral ACU 69 Restoral DTR ACU 70 End Restoral DTR ACU 71 Restoral ACU 116 72 End Restoral ACU 116 73 LPDA2 Disconnect 74 Remote disconnected without sending PSTN 75 Configuration change caused disconnect 76 Retraining time exceeded 77 Remote Access Reset CHAPTER 6 AT Commands Table 6 3 Status Summary Line continued Message Definition T1 Test Indicator The number displayed after 1 tells you the test in progress The numbers correspond to the following messages 0 Test End Test 1 Local Digital Loopback Test 2 Remote Digital Loopback Test 3 Local Analog Loopback Test 4 Reserved 5 Busy Out 6 Local Analog Loopback Pattern Test 7 Remote Digital Loopback Pattern Test 8 Pattern Test 9 Retrain Answer Originate A Modem is in Answer mode O Modenm is in Originate mode Dial Leased D Modem is using a dial telephone line L Modem is using a leased telephone line
323. to the local DTE when an acceptable carrier signal is received by the modem Not used Not used Answer Originate Select Answer Originate Select signal passed from terminal to modem to select answer originate status When signal is on answer signal is selected When signal is off originate signal is selected This signal works in conjunction with the front panel Mode External setting Data Signal Rate Indicator Cl 112 is passed from modem to terminal indicating signaling rate When signal is on modem operates at 4800 bps or greater When signal is off modem operates below 4800 bps Signal Quality Signal passes from modem to terminal indicating a telephone line s signal quality When signal is on signal quality is acceptable When signal is off signal quality is poor Ext Select Signal passed from terminal to modem to select between two option sets Works in conjunction with front panel Ext Select option Signal passed from terminal to modem indicating whether to use a dial line or a leased line When signal is on modem uses a dial line When signal is off modem uses a leased line This signal is used in restoral mode only Transmitter Signal Element Timing Standby Indicator Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing signal to local terminal to synchronize transmitted data TXD See front panel Clock Internal setting Signal passed from modem to terminal indicates what
324. ued ASCII Decimal Symbol ASCII Hex EBCDIC Hex ASCII Decimal Symbol ASCII Hex EBCDIC Hex o wl I lt lt 1 lt lt DO 102 _ accent Appendix Options and Displays Worksheet INTRODUCTION Use this configuration worksheet to record the MODEM 32Fast s front panel option settings and displays The worksheet is organized to follow the structure of your modem s front panel tree It doesn t list front panel options that don t have configurable settings such as Reinit Memory or Enter Then Dial Copy blanks of this worksheet to record option settings and displays of other 32FAST Modems in your network MODEM 32Fast Options and Displays Workseet Location Date Select Options Save Changes Power Up In Dial From View Phone Enter Phone l Link Phone 1 APPENDIX Options and Displays Worksheet Auto Redial S Register 0 S Register 1 S Register 2 S Register 3 S Register 4 S Register 5 S Register 6 S Register 7 S Register 8 S Register 10 S Register 11 S Register 12 S Register 18 S Register 25 S Register 26 S Register 30 S Register 38 S Register 45 S Register 46 TEST OPT S Accept RDL LAL Busy Out MODULAT
325. utobaud Feature If your communications software package supports the higher terminal rates available with the MODEM 32Fast and you wish to use the package s auto dial or auto answer features you should set the modem s DTE rate equal to that of the package The DTE Rate AT DE option is in the TERMINAL OPT S category Some communications packages will not let you select higher DTE rates for example 115 2 or 57 6 Kbps while using the package s auto dial or auto answer functions If you wish to use higher DTE rates follow these steps Set the package for Direct or Terminal modem Select the higher speed of the software CHAPTER 4 Getting Started Set the modem s DTE rate to match the software s set speed Use the AT command set to establish the connection 6 If you select the Direct mode of operation Mode Direct under the EC DC OPT S menu note the following Speed conversion and flow control are not supported If your software does not support speed detect change the modem s modulation mode to Auto V 32 After a connection is established change the software s speed to match the modem s connection rate If your software communications package supports data rates higher than 9 6 Kbps set the modem s maximum rate Max Rate AT MX to this higher rate and disable the adaptive rate feature before placing or answering calls Make sure that your package s speed and modem s conne
326. ve Completed message appears Any modifications that you make are not placed in nonvolatile memory until Save Completed appears THE AT amp W COMMAND The AT amp W command lets you create customized option sets Here s how 1 Using the ATZn command select the option set that most closely suits your application The option set number you want to modify is represented by the n 2 Use the AT commands described in this chapter to change the setting of each option you want to modify For example to change RTS CTS delay from its delay time according to S Register 26 to a new setting of 15 ms enter AT DL1 lt CR gt The modem responds with OK 3 Once you ve made all the changes to create your option set enter the AT amp Wn command The n that you choose specifies the address the option set where the new customized option set is stored The front panel displays Saving Options 4 After a few seconds your modifications are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory and the modem front panel displays Save Completed The new customized option set you have created replaces in nonvolatile memory the option set previously stored in that option set address CHAPTER 6 Commands THE FRONT PANEL To create a customized option set 1 Using the Select Options function select the option set that most closely suits your application see Chapter 4 Start Up for an in depth discussion
327. ware s automatic speed adjustment feature operates properly when you have configured the modem for Mode Auto V 22 bis Only and Speed or Mode Direct 3 Change Mirror software s remote command character value to Ctrl R before placing or answering a call Refer to Mirror III software s operating instructions for the correct procedure Speed Range for Communications Software Package 300 19 2 Kbps Default 300 bps Select Software s Modem Type Select Hayes 2400 bps Smartmode Dina Mite Version 40L Make These Software Changes Change parameter menu to work with Hayes Smartmodem 2400 Change baud rate to 19 2 Kbps or lower Change modem INIT STRING to include any other modem parameters required for application Be sure to include ATSOz1 amp C1 amp D2W M the following format Customer named filename PAR Make These Modem Changes See the Flow Control Requirements in Section 4 17 for the correct modem flow control settings Modem Modem Dials Answers Yes Yes OPERATING NOTES 1 After you ve used Dyna Mite to create your customized PAR file use the software package s Load command to configure the modem correctly You may now dial or answer incoming calls 2 Before you select the Dyna Mite Auto Dial or Auto Answer feature refer to Section 4 16 SmarTerm 320 Version 1 1A Speed Range for Select Communications Software s Make Thes
328. when the MODEM 32Fast is configured for the sync data compression operation AT Option Command Setting Setting Description Disable 0 Data compression is not attempted Enable 1 Data compression is attempted If all your modem is using LAPM error correction it uses V 42 bis data compression if DC Enabled Note In an application with Sync Data Compression enabled only LAPM error correction and V 42 bis data compression are used If your modem is using MNP error correction it attempts to negotiate V 42 bis and MNP 5 data compression with the remote modem Depending on which data compression type the remote modem can accommodate V 42 bis or MNP 5 is used Otherwise no data compression is used AT DD Wait AT DD Dial Wait command instructs modem to stop and wait for a dial tone The modifiers are as follows ew AT Option Command Setting Setting Dial Wait 2 0 2 seconds 3 1 3 seconds 4 2 4 seconds 6 3 6 seconds 12 4 12 seconds 15 5 15 seconds 20 6 20 seconds 30 7 30 seconds 40 8 40 seconds S7 9 Dial wait is determined by setting S Register 7 See S Register in Section 8 9 AT DE Rate This option governs the speed at which the modem communicates with the b 4 remna oers eee DTE during data ACU and escape modes Option Setting Setting Description Auto 1 22 Modem uses the autobaud feature to d
329. when the modem receives an acceptable carrier signal over a telephone line Demodulation Retrieving an original digital data signal from a modulated analog signal Digital Signal A data terminal s binary 0 off and 1 on output Modems convert digital signals into analog waves for transmission over conventional telephone lines DSR Data Set Ready This signal is passed from the local modem Indicates that the local modem is ready to enter the data transmission phase DTE Data Terminal Equipment End user devices that generate or receive data and provide data communications control functions Examples include central processing units CPUs front end processors FEPs high speed muxes PCs and other terminals DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency A signaling method used for push button telephones Combines two output signals to create a unique tone for each of the 12 keys EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code A method of coding digital signals using eight bits to generate 256 different characters Echo Reflection back to the sender of a transmitted signal as heard on telephone circuits involving long distances or poor transmission facilities EIA Electronic Industries Association The American electronics standards group EIA TIA 232 D The most commonly used computer modem interface An electrical standard for interconnecting datacomm equipment DCE and data
330. which error correction scheme LAPM or MNP 1 4 the modems are using and yyy displays which data compression scheme V 42 bis or MNP 5 the modems are using 2 When the remote modem establishes reliable connection the RELIABLE result code is displayed only when the Mode option under the EC DC OPT S menu is configured for Reliable AT SM2 Auto Rel AT SM3 or Spd AutoRel AT SM4 Also the Rel Msg option under the ACU OPT S menu must be set for Long AT XC2 or Short AT XC Also you receive error correction and data compression information in your result code only when the Rel Msg option is set to Long 8 6 Autobaud Feature The MODEM 32Fast automatically detects the speed and character format of AT commands issued from your DTE Specifically speed and parity detection are performed on the following character strings e AT at e A This means that command you issue to the modem will cause the modem to autobaud The exception to this is the lowercase a from which only speed can be detected When the a command is issued the modem assumes parity to be the same as that of the previous command Autobauding works for the following DTE rates e 300 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps e 9600 bps 12 000 bps 14 400 bps 16 800 bps 19 200 bps 21 600 bps 24 000 bps 26 400 bps 28 800 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bp
331. y 20min AT SIA Inactivity 30min AT SI5 InactivityzS30min AT SLO EC ID Default AT SL1 EC ID Codex AT SMO Mode Direct CHAPTER 11 Command Cross Reference Table 11 2 Cross Reference for S Registers S Register AT Command Front Panel Option 5 Answer Using SO AT BD2 Blind Dial S6 AT DD9 Dial Wait S7 AT TT5 Call Timeout S7 4 Pause Delay S8 AT CD3 DCD Loss Dis S10 AT TL1 Tone Length S11 AT DL4 RTS CTS Delay S26 AT SI5 Inactivity S30 AT DB3 Delay S38 MODEM 32Fas ee 12 ASCII EBCDIC Hexadecimal Equivalents Table 12 1 lists 7 bit ASCII and 8 bit Table 12 1 ASCII to EBCDIC Translation continued EBCDIC hexadecimal equivalents of the ASCII Decimal Symbol EBCDIC Hex characters and symbols in the V 25 bis specification Table 12 1 ASCII to EBCDIC Translation ASCII Decimal Symbol ASCII Hex EBCDIC Hex A gt CHAPTER 12 ASCII EBCDIC Hexadecimal Equivalents Table 12 1 ASCII to EBCDIC Translation continued Table 12 1 ASCII to EBCDIC Translation contin
332. y being used for transmitting and receiving data The throughput rate is a running average of the data bit rate through the modem based on the most recent data transmitted to and received from the DTE Link utilization is based on the amount of data traffic transmitted and received over the analog channel Link utilization is displayed in terms of the channel percentage being used Upon disconnection the Transmit and Receive Throughput and Link Utilization Status display shows the throughput and link utilization at the time of disconnection These displays help identify where delays in data transmission exist whether within the modem or whether an insufficient amount of data is available for transmission For example if the display indicates a 40 kb throughput with a 10 link utilization there is not enough data available for transmission Alternately if a 40 kb throughput is displayed with 100 link utilization data throughput has been optimized Note If Mode Direct AT SM these displays appear blank EIA TIA 232 D CCITT 24 Signal Status Pressing wy from the Throughput Status brings you to the EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V 24 Signal Status lines see Table 6 2 for definitions Note To the right of each EIA TIA signal in the front panel display window is a box symbol If the box symbol is filled in it indicates that the signal is on If the box is empty the signal is off Table 6 2 EIA TIA 232 D CCITT V
333. y offset Note If the value of the far end echo level parameter is 35 dB below its receive level Phase Roll has no meaning Equalizer Signal to Noise ratio displays the Signal To Noise Ratio SNR measured in decibels from 0 dBm to 38 dBm The SNR measures the signal strength compared to the signal dispersion caused by circuit noise Circuit noise is any random signal disturbances in a communications link such as electromagnetic interference which tend to degrade line performance This signal is measured after it has passed through the receiver s equalizer It is not the SNR of the telephone line since the equalizer reduces the effects of certain types of channel distortion A good or bad SNR depends on modulation mode and data rate plus your own definition of good and bad specifically which BER is acceptable for a particular application received signal 0 9 where Good 9 and 0 Signal quality is a single representation of a variety of line impairments An approximate BER to SQ table follows independent of the data rate SQ lt 3 the bit error rate is approximately greater than worse than 102 SQ 3 the bit error rate is approximately 107 SQ 4 the bit error rate is approximately 10 SQ gt 4 the bit error rate is approximately less than better than 10 Error Probability displays the probability of an error in the data stream in a percentage Error probability which acts as a confirmati

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Hand-held video camera-recorder-printer and methods for operating    Planet Technology 802.11n User's Manual  Swan45 North Tuning Guiude  a guide to completing the electronic case report forms  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file